Home

Quadrus Verifier User`s Manual

Contents

1. Reflectance Calibration process Reflectance Calibration Please input the reflectance values located on the card and click Calibrate Reflectance SOAEC 15415 Reflectance Calibration Minimum fio 0 100 B Maximum 185 ae 0 100 C AlM 2 DPM Report Guidelines Reflectance Calibration C 59132A Calibration When the R min and R min values are Calibrate Reflectance Cancel entered click Calibrate Reflectance Once reflectance calibration is complete Multi Capture Verification can be performed and a report generated Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 79 Verification by ESP Multi Capture Sequence Once the reflectance calibration process is complete place the candidate symbol as close to the center of the verifier s field of view as possible Important Multi Capture Verification requires five captures at 72 intervals throughout a 360 rotation When the symbol is placed in the Verifier s field of view its position should be considered its default position 0 ISO IEC 15415 requires that the symbol s orientation for the first capture be 45 This means 45 from the default symbol position 0 will guide you through the sequence Step 1 45 Rotation Step 2 117 Rotation Step 3 189 Rotation Step 4 261 Rotation Step 1 333 Rotation 3 80 825455 Seth bw ete Sam
2. Time Delay Between Captures Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Read Cycle Dual Camera Switching Note The following options are only available when Active Camera is set to Dual Usage Useful where different symbols can appear within a single read cycle Definition When Active Camera is set to Dual captures will alternate between the internal and external cameras starting with the internal camera Important The Quadrus Verifier does not control the timing of external cameras Captures from external cameras are streamed into the Quadrus Verifier To be sure to receive a complete first capture allow up to 33 mS delay before the first external capture Switching Mode When Switching Mode is set to Number of Captures the combined internal and external camera captures can not exceed the total number set in Number of Captures however if the combined total is less than the total then the capture pattern will be repeated until the total number of captures has been met Definition Captures can be set to alternate between the internal and external cameras by the number of captures or by camera timeouts Serial Cmd lt K243 switching mode number of internal captures number of external captures internal camera timeout external camera timeout gt Default Number of Captures Options 0 Number Of Captures 1 Timeout Switching by Number of Captures Number of Internal Camera Captures Definition The number of ca
3. Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 1 7 Locate Symbol Step 7 Locate Symbol After you place the Verifier Calibration Symbol beneath the Verifier s lighting chamber click the Locate button You will see a video representation of the Verifier s field of view EEK ESP ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect Help KE AppMode Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model Report Settings Preferences Welcome to Easy Setup Program ISOAIEC 15415 4591324 Verification AlM DPM Quality Guideline 1 The first step before grading a pir 5 3 symbol is to place the calibrated Save Report Illumination intemal inner and outer rings symbol in the center of the field of view FO The reference decode algorithm generates an Locate Calibrate initial threshold based on what is located in the center of the FOV 2 Click Locate to begin For Help press F1 Quadrus Verifier 1 Quadrus Verifier EGNMEGVEGIIINY Point to Point Com 115 2K This view allows the user to center the symbol before calibrating Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Quick Start Step 8 Calibrate Reflectance Move the symbol to the approximate center of the field of view before beginning calibration S ESP Untitled Fle Model Optons Comet Heb SS App Made _futoconnect_SendRecy Switch Medel Fepot Setirgs Preferences Welcome to Easy Setup Program ISO EC 15H5 AIM DPM Quality Guidet
4. Pruan ce fe oe mS hee eae TE pre ia Me l fad 2 Pe Pee eet ro Eee Pal Po Pom me oe Paul ioe ot at aa imn h Ea rimo DE Eaim z mm Ea a in Tu LET u wii PLEI Ss all 1 kapa Lii mpm rm marma rm es ies eres miye Lee Pirin xs Data for d non grade ze rast parameters E sey ei Bt ea EE eel ie SF J ee eS lt q Symbol data CiD Caa LEET i EOE T a EWF Lae Parsed Ull data UII Parsing must be enabled in Preferences for parsed UII smh data to appear in verification reports Tisi E LE Pte HI Mia e e O i j URES M ae weer m ere Reference data Verifier firmware version Verifier serial number report creation date ESP version company name and operator name Note PDF version shown here Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Quick Start AIM DPM Verification Report MICROSCAN FRE ee Bar Code Scanners 20 imagers Parameters Results Grade Reference Decode PASS 4 A Verification Call Contests so 4 a results and pass fail Fixed Pattern Damage e 4 A grades Axial Non Uniformity 0 07 3 B Grid Non Uniformity 0 22 4 A Cell Modulation 4 A Unused ECC 100 4 A Minimum Reflectance 100 4 A Final Grade 3 8 DPM 3 0 04 660 45Q Non Graded Parameters Data for non graded Print Growth 0 06 Symbol Size 16x1
5. V Store Report without file path prompt a M Use symbol data for file name ee your verification report C Documents and Settingsssymbol grades Default Path if you do not want to be prompted to choose a file F path click Store Report Automatically open generated report Print after saving Without file path prompt IV Includelmage Bitmap JPEG JPEG Image Quality 100 1 100 Click the Include Image check box to output the captured symbol image ISO IEC 15415 Options with your saved report as a Bitmap or JPEG image file MV Enable MIL STD 130M Check type each time for ISO IEC 15415 Verification SO IEC 15415 Single Capture C ISDAEC 15415 Multi Capture V Enable UIl Parsing Default Settings Revert Settings Returns all settings to Returns all settings to default most recent 3 72 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification ISO IEC 15415 Single Capture Verification Single Capture Verification Process Reflectance Calibration The Quadrus Verifier comes with a calibration symbol on a card like the one shown below A maximum and minimum reflectance value will be printed at the bottom of the card These are the values you will enter in the Minimum and Maximum spin boxes in the Reflectance Calibration dialog Place the Calibration Symbol as close to the center of the Verifier s field of view as possible before initiating the
6. First trigger starts the read Captures on every trigger Capture cycle y Read cycle ral Meses ends on New Trigger or Timeout as configured Processing Triggered Captures Typical Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 6 21 Capture Mode Continuous Capture Usage Continuous Capture is useful in applications with slower line speeds or where symbol spacing may be random or not time dependent Definition In Continuous Capture a capture is followed sequentially by processing as shown below Since processing is completed before another capture can occur this usually takes about 30mS a large number of captures can take place throughout a read cycle Capture Start of x Sale aise Be End of Read Cycle read cycle Processing time Continuous Capture 6 22 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Read Cycle Capture Timing Note Capture Timing applies only to Rapid Capture mode Time Before First Capture Usage In almost any moving line application a time delay is needed to ensure that a symbol will be in the reader s field of view at the beginning of the capture sequence Definition Time Before 1st Capture in a moving line application is the time between an external trigger event and the occurrence of the first capture Serial Cmd lt K242 time before 1st capture time between capture 1 and 2 time between capture 7 and 8 gt Default 0 Option
7. IMPORTANT Keep this card in a safe place It is the Verifier s most critical setup tool VERIFIER CALIBRATION SYMBOL R MAX XX R MIN XX Reflectance Calibration process Reflectance Calibration Please input the reflectance values located on the card and click Calibrate Reflectance SOAEC 15415 Reflectance Calibration Minimum fio 0 100 Maximum 185 e 0 100 C AlM 2 DPM Report Guidelines Reflectance Calibration C 59132A Calibration When the R min and R min values are Calibrate Reflectance Cancel entered click Calibrate Reflectance Once reflectance calibration is complete Single Capture Verification can be performed and a report generated Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 73 Verification by ESP Single Capture Verification Report The ISO IEC 15415 Single Capture results show data concerning the reference decode algorithm symbol contrast fixed pattern damage axial and grid non uniformity modulation unused error correction print growth symbol type symbol size element size and pixels per element All but the last five parameters are given a numeric and alphabetical grade 05 7668 ISO IEC 15415 Ver ation Report REFERENCE DECODE SYMBOL CONTRAST FIXED PATTERN DAMAGE AXIAL NON UNIFORMITY GRID NON UNIFORMITY MODULATION UNUSED ECC FINAL GRADE NON
8. Data initiated from the Host All host data is echoed to the auxiliary port in Aux Host Port Verifier Aux Host Port unpolled mode NZ Verifier Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain ID status daisy chain ID gt 3 Full duplex Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 5 13 RS 232 Auxiliary Port Daisy Chain Auxiliary Port Mode Usage Definition Serial Cmd Options Function Useful in applications where e More than one symbol type is present A symbol may be present on multiple sides of a package e Symbols are presented at different depths In a daisy chain application readers are connected in tandem or daisy chain and decoded data is relayed from one reader to another on up to the host A master reader has its host port linked to the host computer and its auxiliary port linked to the host port of the first secondary reader in the chain Thereafter each secondary reader s auxiliary port is linked to the host port of the secondary reader that is further from the host in the daisy chain Each reader in the daisy chain can be assigned an ID that accompanies any data that it sends lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain ID status daisy chain ID gt 4 Daisy chain Before the master reader times out it checks its auxiliary port for data It should be set to wai
9. 8 43 Output 1 Parameters Modulation ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Serial Cmd Default Options lt K830 grade decode symbol contrast fixed pattern damage axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation unused error correction capacity print growth gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Grade 1 D 2 Grade 2 C 3 Grade 3 B 4 Grade 4 A Unused Error Correction Capacity ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Serial Cmd Default Options Serial Cmd Default Options 8 44 lt K830 grade decode symbol contrast fixed pattern damage axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation unused error correction capacity print growth gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Grade 1 D 2 Grade 2 C 3 Grade 3 B 4 Grade 4 A Print Growth ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Disabled v The Print Growth dropdown menu shows percentage values of 1 9 The output will activate if the absolute value calculated by the verification algorithm exceeds the selected percentage value parameter lt K830 grade decode symbol contrast fixed pattern damage axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation unused error correction capacity print growth gt 0 Disabled 0 to 9 0 Disabled 1 9 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters AS9132 Symbol Quality Output 1 Note Output On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Symbol Quality for this output to function
10. Grid Non Uniformity refers to a symbol s cell deviation from the ideal grid of a theoretical perfect symbol The Data Matrix reference decode algorithm is applied to a binarized image of the symbol comparing its grid intersections to ideal grid intersections The greatest distance from an actual to a theoretical grid intersection determines the Grid Non Uniformity grade Actual grid intersection idealta eal gr The reference lt q intersection decode algorithm plots the symbol s A Vector grid intersections A deviatioh and compares them to an ideal grid The largest vector deviation on the grid Symbol Detail determines the Grid Non Uniformity grade Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 5 ISO IEC 15415 Evaluation Parameters Modulation i Modulation refers to the reflectance uniformity of a symbol s light and dark elements In this example notice that the light dark values of some elements are inconsistent Unused Error Correction Unused Error Correction indicates the amount of available error correction in a symbol Error Correction is a method of reconstructing or replacing data that is lost through symbol damage 100 Unused Error Correction is ideal The example at left is an ECC 200 Data Matrix symbol in good condition ECC 200 indicates the error correction level of the symbology A higher number indicates more robust error correction capacity Print Growth Print Growth r
11. MARKING METHOD DOT PEEN ELEMENT SHAPE ROUND REQU I REMENT FAIL IF 2 OF PARAMETER PER ELEMENT RESULTS ELEMENTS FAIL PASS FAIL QUIET ZONE gt One element PASS CONTRAST gt 28 N A CELL FILL SIZE 60 lt size lt 105 x PASS DOT OVALITY SHAPE lt 207 15 z avg 8 failed PASS DOT CENTER OFFSET SPACING lt 20 16 avg 1 failed PASS ANGLE OF DISTORTION lt 7 Degrees 1 93 degree PASS SYMBOL TYPE ECC266 ECC266 PASS MATRIX SIZE 22x22 ELEMENT SIZE 6 611 PIXELS ELEMENT 14 5 SYMBOL DATA gt gt 66 170 77245 1P13269766 1631 3 86 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Save AS9132 Verification Report Verification Report Settings Preferences Locate Calibrate ISOZIEC 15415 Multi Capture 4591324 Verification AIM DPM Quality Guideline Save Report Illumination External internal lighting disabled v Save AS9132 Verification Report as a PDF Marking Method DOT PEEN If you have already chosen Element Shape ROUND PDF in the Preferences dialog the report will be saved as a Parameters PDF file Quiet Zone Contrast Default Report Type PDF Files pdf z Cell Fill Size 2 Dot HTML Files htm Ovality Shape CSY Files cs Dot Center Rich Text Edit Files rtf Offset Spacing Angle of Distortion Verification symbol Type results and Non Graded pass fail Parameters grades Matrix Size Pixels Elem
12. down to the setting you want to change and single click the setting e Left click again on the open screen to complete the selection Fast Linear Mode Reference Decode Algorithm e Right click on the open screen and select Save to Reader to implement the command in the Verifier You can send the command without saving it or you can send and save the command simultaneously 2 12 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Using ESP Send Receive Options To access Receive Save and Default options click the Send Recv button You can also access these options by right clicking in any of the configuration views Send Recy Receiving From the Send Recv menu select Receive Reader Settings Caution Do not select this option if you do not want to upload the Verifier s settings For example if your ESP file has a number of custom settings that you want to maintain and download into the Verifier these settings would be lost by choosing Yes This is useful if you want to receive upload the Verifier s settings and save them as a file for future use For example if your Verifier has settings that you do not want to change choosing Yes would allow you to load those settings to ESP and save them in a ESP file for later retrieval Receiving the Verifier s settings will also assure that you will not be subsequently saving any unwanted changes that you or someone else has made previously in ESP Saving Sen
13. 4 A 0 01 4 A a File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help AA ARAY Be SJ W211 z fe J K M N is 1 Grid_Nu Modulation Unused_ECC Final_Grade 7s 0 03 4 A 4 A 100 4 A 4 A File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Deena SRAY BBS 2 it AAI z f Q R Ee a ENa vo wW 1 _Print_Growth Sym_Type Sym_Size Pix_Element Aperture Wavelength Angle 2 0 01 ECC200 10x10 11 6 0x000 660 nm 45 degrees File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Desa SRY BBS w z 21a AH23 f xX Y i AA AB AC 1_ Firmware_Vers Verifier Ser_Num Report_Created Vers Company Operator 21 O 2 4 2006 22 08 3 2 1 0 XYZ Corp J Doe Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 77 Verification by ESP Save Single Capture Verification Report as an RTF Default Report Type Rich Text Edit Files rtf X PDF Files pdf HTML Files htm If you have already chosen RTF in the OSV aen Preferences dialog the report will be Rich Text Edit Files rtf saved as an RTF file PARAMETER RESULTS GRADE meee a REFERENCE DECODE PASS 4 i SYMBOL CONTRAST 71 4 a FIXED PATTERN DAMAGE Verification 4 i m results and AXIAL NON UNIFORMITY 0 09 grades 4 A GRID NON UNIFORMITY 0 12 4 a l MODULATION 4 i UNUSED ECC 50 4 aA
14. I Decodes per Second Attribute 4 Symbol data appears here Capture and Decode View Notice that following a capture and successful decode e 1D symbols have a green line through them e 2D symbols are surrounded by green boxes The new settings are uploaded to ESP and displayed in the Symbol Information box below the Video screen Test Video Capture 1 With your calibrated symbol in the recommended position click the Test button Notice that the Number Of Symbols decoded is posted and Percent Decode is dynamically updated You can also click the Decodes per Second checkbox which shifts the output from Percent Decode to Decodes Second Un clicking it returns the output to Percent Decode 2 Click Stop to end the read rate test Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 11 5 Evaluation Evaluation In Evaluation you can view images currently in the Verifier capture and decode a symbol save it as a digital file and perform histogram and line scan evaluations When you click on the Evaluation tab you will see the images that are currently stored in the Verifier Click Receive to refresh this view Click Capture Decode to display the current stored image Only one capture decode event will occur regardless of read cycle settings Click Read to trigger a read cycle If there is enough time in the read cycle up to 32 good reads or 6 full scale images can be captured and displayed depending on the size
15. Allows the user to enable or disable up to four postamble character s that can be added to the end of the decoded data lt K142 status postamble character s gt Enabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled within any protocol Postamble Character s Serial Cmd Default Options 5 22 lt K142 status postamble character s gt AMAJ Corresponds to carriage return line feed NULL NULL as displayed in the menu Up to four user defined ASCII character including control characters Within a Serial Command To enter control characters within a serial command hold down the control key while typing the desired character Example lt K142 1 CNTL m CNTL j gt to enter M4J Within an Embedded Menu Control characters entered on the command line are displayed in the menu as mnemonic characters such as lt CR gt lt LF gt lt NULL gt lt NULL gt To enter a control character from within an embedded menu first type in a space with the space key This has the effect of allowing the control key to be recognized as a part of the control character Next hold down the control key while typing the desired character Example Space CNTL m Space CNTL j to enter M J Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Communications Response Timeout Usage Only used when a response is required from the host While in Multidrop if the reader does not receive an ACK or NAK from the host after sending polled data it will act on a fault The re
16. Default Options It is useful in many tightly controlled applications which require a read cycle to end before the next object appears and therefore need the flexibility of a timeout adjustment External Camera Timeout is the time allotted to the external camera and is represented in 10mS increments lt K243 switching mode number of internal captures number of external cap tures internal camera timeout external camera timeout gt 100 x 10mS 1 second 0 to 65535 Divide any positive number entered by 100 to determine the time in seconds Note A minimum setting of 2 is recommended Note Timeout or Timeout or New Trigger under End of Read Cycle must be enabled for Timeout Duration to take effect 6 28 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Read Cycle Example of Timeout in Rapid Capture Mode Since examples 5 is in Rapid Capture mode the cameras will continue to switch until the Number Of Captures setting has been met Example 5 Time Between Captures 0 Capture Mode Dual Camera Number of captures 6 Internal camera timeout 170mS External camera timeout 160mS Internal 1 2 3 5 External 3 4 5 Timeout Int 170ms 170ms Timeout Ext 160ms Processing Note The third and fifth captures were never completed since the active camera s timeout occurred during the capture When this occurs the capture is aborted and the active camera is switched
17. Output 1 Parameters Symbol Quality All AS9132 Symbol Quality parameters feature the dropdown menu shown below When set to Enabled a failing grade will activate output Tinga Tear ears Note The Symbol Contrast parameter Symbol Quality 4591324 only takes effect when Marking Method is Dot Center Offset Disabled set to Laser or Chemical Etch lt K711 1 gt Cell Fill Disabled Dot Ovality Disabled Angle of Distortion Disabled Disabled amp Symbol Contrast Disabled Quiet Zone Disabled Enabled Dot Center Offset AS9132 Symbol Quality Serial Cmd lt K840 dot center offset cell fill dot ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Cell Fill AS9132 Symbol Quality Serial Cmd lt K840 dot center offset cell fill dot ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Dot Ovality AS9132 Symbol Quality Serial Cmd lt K840 dot center offset cell fill dot ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 45 Output 1 Parameters Angle of Distortion AS9132 Symbol Quality Serial Cmd lt K840 dot center offset cell fill dot ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Contrast AS913
18. Example of Timeout in Continuous Capture Mode Continuous Capture mode is a little more involved due to the double buffering The cameras will continue to switch for the duration of the read cycle in a double buffered format so that we start processing the first image while we are capturing the second The third image will then start when both the first one is completely processed and the second is completely transferred Example 6 Time Between Captures 0 Capture Mode Dual Camera Internal camera timeout 100mS External camera timeout 160mS Internal 1 2 External 3 4 Timeout Int 100mS 100mS Timeout Ext 160ms Processing 1 2 3 4 5 6 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 6 29 Store No Read Image Store No Read Image Note Stored images will be lost whenever RAM is reset by re powering or reset save sequences the capture mode is changed or a read rate mode is initiated Usage Useful for evaluating symbols and visually comparing images captured at various settings and conditions Definition Images that are captured and processed but are not decoded may be stored for subsequent evaluation Image Storage Type Usage Useful for evaluating symbols and visually comparing images captured at various settings Definition When Disabled is selected all saved images will be cleared and no further images will be stored unless Store on No Read is selected Serial
19. Fast Linear Mode The settings in this popup dialog correspond with the different elements of the lt K250 gt command This intuitive user interface format allows you to make all the necessary configuration changes to the selected database index When you are finished click OK Your changes will be reflected in the index row on the IP Database table Reference Decode Al Cancel 12 10 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual IP Database Save Current Settings to Database Definition Allows current active configuration settings to be saved to a selected database index Serial Cmd lt K250 database index gt By ESP Video Evaluation ROI IP Database Dynamic Setup Shutter Processing Narrow Background Threshold Fixed Mode Margins Color Mode Threshold Current 1000 550 Reference Disabled White Adaptive 128 6 Standard Disabled White Adaptive 0 7 1000 550 Standard Disabled White Adaptive 0 8 1000 550 Standard Disabled White Adaptive 0 9 1000 550 Standard Disabled white Adaptive D 10 1000 550 Standard Disabled white Adaptive 0 lt gt Calibrate 5 Number of Active Indexes ER Receive Send Settings Load mae To Index Click Load Current to Index to save current active reader configuration settings to a database index of your choice When these settings are saved to a specific index they can be applied to the reader as part of a sequence of configuration profiles during o
20. Important If the user has a non video unit and this mode is selected it will behave the same as if the mode was disabled Bar Code Configuration Enables bar code configuration mode whenever the associated button position is selected When enabled the reader can accept configuration commands from symbols To disable quickly press and release the EZ button EZ Button Operation To execute EZ button commands Single Beep Position 1 Hold down button until a singe beep is heard and the 20 LED illuminates Two Beeps Position 2 Hold down button until two quick beeps are heard and the 20 and 40 LEDs illuminate Three Beeps Position 3 Hold down button until three quick beeps are heard and the 20 40 and 60 LEDs illuminate Four Beeps Position 4 Hold down button until four quick beeps are heard and the 20 40 60 and 80 LEDs illuminate Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 33 Input 1 Input 1 Usage For example an application is set up so that a mismatch stops the production line by using outputs in a latch mode A push button switch can be connected to the input pin so that when pressed it unlatches the output allowing the line to resume operations Definition A programmable discrete input used to reset counters outputs or control optoelectrical settings SerialCmd lt K730 input mode active state gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Reset Counts 2 Unlatch Output Disabled
21. gt 2 Object 2 moving in front of the detector Act 2 k beam causes another change in the trig KUVS 4 ger state This signal initiates a new read Object k3 cycle and ends the previous read cycle Ls ag detector unless Timeout is enabled and a good read or timeout has not occurred Trigger Edge 6 10 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Read Cycle Serial Data Usage Serial Data is effective in a highly controlled environment where the host knows precisely when the object is in the field of view It is also useful in determining if a No Read has occurred Definition In Serial Data the reader accepts an ASCII character from the host or controlling device as a trigger to start a read cycle A Serial Data trigger behaves the same as an External Edge trigger Serial commands are entered inside corner brackets such as lt t gt Serial Cmd lt K200 4 gt Note In Serial Data sending a non delimited start serial character will start a read cycle however a non delimited stop serial character has no effect Serial Data or External Edge Usage Serial Data or External Edge is seldom used but can be useful in an application that primarily uses an external sensing device but occasionally needs to be manually triggered An auxiliary terminal can be connected to the aux port so the user can send the serial trigger character through the reader to the host Definition In this mode the reader accepts either a serial ASC
22. 08 7 ECC200 032x032 Axial Non Uniformity Grade highlighted below shown in numeric form Value Axial Non Uniformity Output Example symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 1 0 11 3 0 43 3 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 Axial Non Uniformity Value highlighted below Grade and Value Axial Non Uniformity Output Axial Non Uniformity Grade and Value highlighted below grade shown in Example numeric form symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 0 11 3 0 43 3 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 3 28 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Grid Non Uniformity Definition Measures cell deviation from the theoretical or ideal grid intersections as determined by the reference decode algorithm When enabled appends the symbol s Grid Non Uniformity grade and or value to the verification output string Grading Scale 4 A if lt 0 38 3 B if lt 0 50 2 C if lt 0 63 1 D if lt 0 75 0 F if gt 0 75 Serial Cmd lt K756 grade aperture value wavelength value light angle value decode grade symbol contrast fixed pattern damage grade axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation grade unused error correction print growth value pixels per element value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Grade 2 Value 3 Grade and Value Grade Grid Non Uniformity Output Example symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 0 11 3 3 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 Grid Non Uniformity Grade
23. Once reflectance calibration is complete AIM DPM Verification can be performed and a report generated Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 91 Verification by ESP AIM DPM Verification Report The AIM DPM results show data concerning the reference decode algorithm cell contrast fixed pattern damage axial and grid non uniformity cell modulation unused error correction minimum reflectance print growth symbol type symbol size element size and pixels per element All but the last five parameters are given a numeric and alphabetical grade DPN 4 6 15 7666 7459 REFERENCE DECODE CELL CONTRAST FIXED PATTERN DAMAGE ARIAL NON UNIFORMITY GRID NON UNIFORMITY CELL MODULATION UNUSED ECC MINIMUM REFLECTANCE FINAL GRADE NON GRADED PARAMETERS PRINT GROWTH SYMBOL TYPE ECC288 SYMBOL SIZE 16x16 ELEMENT SIZE 6 618 PIXELS ELEMENT 18 4 SYMBOL DATA 3 92 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Save AIM DPM Verification Report There are several possible ways to save your verification report depending on what works best for your application Verification Report Settings Preferences Save Report Locate Calibrate ISOAIEC 15415 Multi Capture 4591324 Verification AIM DPM Quality Guideline Illumination External internal lighting disabled v Save AIM DPM Verification Report as a PDF If you have already chosen PDF in the Preferences dialog the report will be saved as
24. Unique Item Identifier UIT Disabled Error Message Disabled v gates Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Unique Item Identifiers UII Mode by Serial Command Serial Cmd lt K455 status errstatus gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 UII Enabled with Pass Through 2 Ull Only Enabled UII Disabled No Ull is constructed when symbol data is read UII Enabled with Pass Through Usage Use when symbols may contain either non UII data or UII data Definition Data strings with valid UII compliance indicators will be evaluated as Ulls All other data will be processed in the normal manner Ull Only Enabled Usage Use when symbols will contain only UII data or when symbols with non Ull data are to be rejected Definition All data will be treated as potential UII data and symbols that do not comply with DoD UII guidelines will be rejected UII Mode Error Messaging Serial Cmd lt K455 status errstatus gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Usage Identifies problems with data in UII format Definition Evaluates the UII elements and returns an error message if invalid Ull elements are found Important When Error Messaging is disabled any symbol with data that does not conform to UII format will be treated as a No Read Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 4 5 Error Messaging Error Messaging This feature is used to determine if UII data strings are in the correct format When
25. lt K472 status check digit status check digit output symbol length 1 sym bol length 2 gt 10 2 to 128 even only Since 2 5 characters are paired symbol length must be set to an even number If Check Digit is enabled add 2 to your symbol length For example if your symbol is 10 characters plus a check digit then enable Symbol Length 1 for 12 Note Typically when printing an 2 5 symbol with an odd number of digits a 0 will be added as the first character Note If both Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 are set to 0 then I 2 5 will be variable Symbol Length 2 Interleaved 2 of 5 Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 7 14 If using a second symbol a zero or any even symbol length from 2 to 64 may be specified If not using a second symbol set Symbol Length 2 to 0 to ensure data integrity Allows user to define a second symbol length for l 2 of 5 lt K472 status check digit status check digit output symbol length 1 sym bol length 2 gt 6 2 to 128 even only Since 2 5 characters are paired symbol length must be set to an even number If Check Digit is enabled add 2 to your symbol length For example if your symbol is 10 characters plus a check digit then enable Symbol Length for 12 Note Typically when printing an 2 5 symbol with an odd number of digits a 0 will be added as the first character Note If both Symbol Length 1 and Symbol Length 2 are set to 0 the
26. lt K532 minimum element size maximum element size wavelength lighting gt Default 660 Options 400 to 700 3 40 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Lighting Definition A string of ASCII characters that represents the angle and configuration of illumination used in the verification environment Important For reliable Direct Part Mark verification results Microscan recommends setting the Lighting parameter to 90 This is because diffuse perpendicular or on axis bright field illumination in which the symbol plane is parallel to the plane of the Verifier s sensor and the symbol is uniformly illuminated at a 90 angle of incidence is most effective for reading Direct Part Marks Note Details about other lighting configurations and their corresponding ASCII representations can be found in AIM Global s Direct Part Mark DPM Quality Guideline available at www aimglobal org Serial Cmd lt K532 minimum element size maximum element size wavelength lighting gt Default 45Q Options Any ASCII string up to 15 characters Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 3 41 AIM DPM Verification Setup by ESP AIM DPM Verification Setup by ESP AIM DPM Verification Setup allows the user to fine tune lighting and camera settings to comply with AIM DPM s optical requirements for 2D verification Minimum Element Size Minimum Element Size is the minimum expected element size of the candidate symbol in 1 1000 of an in
27. lt K811 0utput on output state pulse width output mode gt See Output State Output 1 for command structure and options 8 48 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Pulse Width Output 2 Output 2 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Noread Output State Normally Open EI E Seconds Output Mode Pulse Serial Cmd lt K811 output on output state pulse width output mode gt See Pulse Width Output 1 for command structure and options Output Mode Output 2 Output 2 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Noread Output State Normally Open Pulse Width 5 Output Mode Pulse Pulse Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle Serial Cmd lt K811 output on output state pulse width output mode gt See Output Mode Output 1 for command structure and options Trend Analysis Output 2 Note Output On under Output 2 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Output 2 Parameters Trend Analysis Serial Cmd lt K781 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on gt See Trend Analysis Output 1 for command structure and options Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 49 Output 2 Parameters ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Output 2 Note Output On under Output 2 Parameters must be set to Symbol Quality for this output to function Output 2 Parameters Symbol Quality Al
28. 1000 Code 39 Disabled Focus Distance 435 Focus Position Calibrate Symbol Type Don t Calibrate Processing High Gain 30 Message 2227 Bad Symbol Message 2277 No Symbol Message 2277 Send configuration settings to the reader without saving by clicking Send to Reader i As Send and Save Send to Reader m Click Save As to save the report as plain text or a tab delimited text file Send configuration settings to the reader and save in ESP by clicking Send and Save e To create a symbol containing any of the command settings in the table click Generate Barcode This will bring up the Bar Code Dialog e To save the Differences from Default report either as plain text or as a tab delimited text file click Save As e Click Send and Save to send the settings to the reader and save them or Send to Reader to send the settings without saving them Important The use the Differences from Default feature you must connect to the reader and Receive Reader Settings via the Send Recv button on the toolbar Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Send Recy 14 7 Master Database Master Database Important Master Database is used only for comparing entire symbols when Sequential and Wild Card are NOT enabled and Start Position is equal to 0 Master Database Overview Usage Used where more than one master symbol is required as in a Multisym
29. Angle Firmware Verifler_Ser Created Company Operator O 2 4 2006 20 23 2 45 degrees XYZ Corp J Doe Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Save Multi Capture Verification Report as an RTF Default Report Type Rich Text Edit Files rtf v PDF Files pdf HTML Files htm If you have already chosen RTF in the Preferences dialog the report will be saved as an RTF file Verification results grades and mean values ISO IEC 15415 VERIFICATION REPORT PARAMETER SINGLE RESULTS MEAN VALUES REFERENCE DECODE 4 A 4 A 4 a 1 4 i 4 ta PASS l SYMBOL CONTRAST 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 fA 74s FIXED PATTERN DAMAGE 4 A 4 4 A 4 A 4 A AXIAL NON UNIFORMITY 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 0 02 GRID NON UNIFORMITY 4 4 4 A 4 4 A 0 18 MODULATION 4 A 4 A 4 A 1 4 A 4 A Sess l l UNUSED ECC 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 fA 100 FINAL GRADES 4 A 4 A 4 a 4 A 4 a OVERALL GRADE 4 0 NON GRADED PARAMETERS PRINT GROWTH 0 04 Non graded parameters SYMBOL TYPE ECC200 and symbol data SYMBOL SIZE 16x16 PIXELS ELEMENT 10 3 Note Image captures are SYMBOL output simultaneously with DATA
30. Decode Disabled Symbol Contrast Fixed Pattern Damage Disabled Axial Non uniformity Disabled Grid Non uniformity Disabled Modulation Disabled Unused ECC Disabled Print Growth Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled 3 34 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Decode To receive a passing Decode Grade a symbol must be successfully decoded using the Verifier s reference decode algorithm When enabled includes the symbol s Decode Grade in the verification report A symbol will receive a 0 F if it cannot be decoded using the specified reference decode algorithm It will receive a 4 A if it can be decoded using the specified reference decode algorithm 150 15415 Parameters Grade Output Disabled Aperture Disabled Wavelength Disabled Light Angle Disabled CE Disabled z Symbol Contrast Disabled Fixed Pattern Damage Grade Cid Axial Non uniformity Disabled Grid Non uniformity Disabled Modulation Disabled Unused ECC Disabled Print Growth Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled Symbol Contrast Measures the difference between light and dark symbol elements This measurement also includes the symbol s Quiet Zone When enabled includes the Symbol Contrast grade and or value in the verification report ISOJIEC 15415 Parameters Grade Output Disabled Aperture Disabled Wavelength Disabled Light Angle Disabled Decode Disabled E Disabled X Fixed Pattern Damage Disabled Axial Non u
31. Decode Grade Symbol Contrast Grade Symbol Contrast Value Fixed Pattern Damage Grade Axial Non Uniformity Grade Axial Non Uniformity Value Grid Non Uniformity Grade Grid Non Uniformity Value Modulation Grade Unused Error Correction Capacity Grade Unused Error Correction Capacity Value Print Growth Value Pixels Per Element Value Symbol Type Symbol Dimensions Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 13 General Verification Serial Output Numeric ISO Grade Type If numeric grading is chosen ISO IEC 15415 grades will be represented by 0 fail 1 2 3 or 4 best for Single Capture verification or by the decimal values 0 0 to 4 0 for Multi Capture verification Output Example All Numeric grades highlighted below symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 0 11 3 0 43 3 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 Output 2 C 005 660 45 4 A 4 A 075 3 B 1 D 0 11 3 B 0 43 3 B 2 C 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 3 14 Command Field Grade Aperture Value Wavelength Value Light Angle Value Decode Grade Symbol Contrast Grade Symbol Contrast Value Fixed Pattern Damage Grade Axial Non Uniformity Grade Axial Non Uniformity Value Grid Non Uniformity Grade Grid Non Uniformity Value Modulation Grade Unused Error Correction Capacity Grade Unused Error Correction Capacity Value Print Growth Value Pixels Per Element Value Symbol Type Symbol Dimensions Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verifi
32. Default Static Options 0 Static The reader uses IP address configured via K command ESP or embedded menu 1 DHCP The reader acquires an IP address from a DHCP BOOTP Primary TCP Port Definition TCP port in which the reader receives commands and sends symbol data Usage The port number is configured for the convenience preference of the host system Note The primary TCP port and the video TCP must be different Serial Cmd lt K125 P address subnet address gateway address P address mode primary TCP port video TCP port gt Default 2001 Options 1024 to 65535 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 5 19 Network Video TCP Port Definition Usage Serial Cmd Default Options 5 20 TCP port in which the reader sends responses to ESP related commands video symbol information histogram from the Primary TCP port Note that if the Video TCP port is unconnected the reader will respond to the Primary TCP port instead Note The primary TCP port and the video TCP must be different The port number is configured for the convenience preference of the host system lt K125 P address subnet address gateway address P address mode primary TCP port video TCP port gt 2002 1024 to 65535 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Communications Preamble Preamble Status Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Useful for identifying and controlling incoming data For example defining the
33. EX CAM_ON Options Any 1 to 10 ASCII characters except NULL lt or gt Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 10 5 Over Temperature Message Over Temperature Message Over Temperature Status Usage Helps ensure that the reader is being used within its temperature specification Definition When enabled a message is sent whenever the system detects that the internal temperature has exceeded it s specified operating temperature Serial Cmd lt K402 over temperaturestatus warning message gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Warning Message Serial Cmd lt K402 over temperature status warning message gt Default OVER_TEMP Options Any 1 to 10 ASCII characters except NULL lt or gt 10 6 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Diagnostics Service Message Service Message Status Definition When enabled a message is sent whenever the system detects that a user set service time has expired The service timer is reset on power on thus the timer only records the time that has elapsed since the last reset The message is sent every time the timer expires Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Service Message Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default SERVICE Options Any 1 to 10 ASCII characters except NULL lt or gt Threshold Definition Sets the number of hours or minutes t
34. FINAL GRADE 4 i NON GRADED PARAMETERS PRINT GROWTH 0 08 SYMBOL TYPE ECC200 Non graded parameters and symbol data SYMBOL SIZE 16x16 PIXELS ELEMENT 6 1 Note Image captures are SYRBOL output simultaneously with DATA 123 the RTF The format JPG or BMP is determined in Aperture 0 000 Wavelength 660 nm the Preferences dialog Firmware Version Serial Number This report was created on Wednesday February 0l 2006 at 15 09 37 Company XYZ Corp Operator J Doe name Reference data Verifier firmware version Verifier serial number report creation date ESP version company name and operator 3 78 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification ISO IEC 15415 Multi Capture Verification Multi Capture Verification Process Reflectance Calibration The Quadrus Verifier comes with a calibration symbol on a card like the one shown below A maximum and minimum reflectance value will be printed at the bottom of the card These are the values you will enter in the Minimum and Maximum spin boxes in the Reflectance Calibration dialog Place the Calibration Symbol as close to the center of the Verifier s field of view as possible before initiating the IMPORTANT Keep this card in a safe place It is the Verifier s most critical setup tool VERIFIER CALIBRATION SYMBOL R MAX XX R MIN XX
35. Grade and Worst Case Value Dot Ovality Grade Output Grade Report Options Grade Worst Case and Average Values Cell Fill Grade Worst Case and Average Values Dot Center Offset Grade Worst Case and Average Values Dot Ovality Gradient Gray Scale Green Flash Duration Green Flash Mode Grid Non Uniformity Grid Non Uniformity AIM DPM Grid Non Uniformity ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Grid Non Uniformity ISO IEC 15415 Guard Bar Interleaved 2 of 5 H Half Duplex Half Duplex Aux Port Mode Hardware Configuration Hardware Default Hardware Required Height Row Depth Hex String 10 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual l Hex Value Highlighting Histogram Histogram Evaluation Hollow Mode Host Host 422 Status Host Communications Host Port Connection Host Port Protocol 1 0 Parameters I O Parameters by ESP I O Parameters Serial Commands IB 150 Kit Accessories ICMP IEC Illumination Illumination Source Image Image Captioning Image File Transfers Image Format EZ Trax Output by ESP Image Format EZ Trax Output by Serial Command Image Frame Video Output Image Library Request Image Mode Image Mode EZ Trax Output by Serial Command Image Output Image Processing Image Processing Database Image Processing Database by ESP Image Processing Settings Image Processing Timeout Image Resolution Image Sensor Image Storage Mode Image Storage Type Import Import Export Indica
36. If the EZ button or operational command overrides this setting the target pattern will remain on at all times Always ON The target pattern is always ON Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 8 17 Output Indicators Green Flash Mode Usage Used as a visual verification that a good read has occurred Definition An array of green LEDs in the front of the Quadrus Verifier can be programmed to flash briefly in response to user defined conditions or if in Static Presentation mode illuminate for a set period of time Serial Cmd lt K750 green flash mode target pattern status green flash duration gt Default Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 Static Presentation 3 Match 4 Mismatch Disabled Green flash LEDs are disabled Good Read Green Flash Green flash LEDs will flash for less than one second when a good read condition is meet or when matchcode is enabled and a match occurs Static Presentation Green Flash Static Presentation is used in conjunction with Continuous Read mode When operating in Static Presentation mode the red LEDs will illuminate while the Quadrus Verifier is searching for a symbol in Continuous Read mode When a symbol is placed in the FOV and a good read occurs the green LEDs will illuminate and stay on for the duration of time set in Green Flash Duration Only one read will occur during that time unless more than one symbol is enabled in Number of Symbols Note If Static Presentation
37. PRINT GROWTH SYMBOL TYPE ECC268 SYMBOL SIZE 16x18 ELEMENT SIZE 6 619 PIXELS ELEMENT 18 6 SYMBOL DATA Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 81 Verification by ESP Save Multi Capture Verification Report Save Report Report Settings Preferences ISOAEC 15415 Multi Capture 4591324 Verification AIM BPM Quality Guideline Illumination External internal lighting disabled Locate Calibrate Save Multi Capture Verification Report as a PDF If you have already chosen PDF in the Preferences dialog the report will be saved as a PDF file Symbol Contrast Default Report Type PDF Files pdf Fiod Pattern Damage HTML Files htm CSY Files cs Rich Text Edit Files rtf Verification results and mean values Parameters si Reference Decode 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A Axial Non Uniformity 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A Grid Non Uniformity 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A Modulation 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A Unused ECC 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A Final Grades 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A Overall Grade Symbol Data Symbol data 123 Non Graded Parameters Print Growth 0 04 Symbol Type ECC200 mE e Symbol Size 16x16 parameters Pixels Element 10 3 e Symbol Image Image scaled to 480x360 Mean Values PASS 74 0 02
38. REQ E 05 Request EOT AD 04 Reset STX AB 02 Start of Text ETX AC 03 End of Text ACK AF 06 Acknowledge NAK AU 15 Negative Acknowledge XON Q 11 Begin Transmission XOFF AS 13 Stop Transmission A 18 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Appendices Appendix F Data Matrix Symbology and symbol distortion Individual element or module A white corner on a white background symbol indicates an even number of elements per side a black corner indicates an odd number Even number of elements per side indicates an ECC 200 an odd number indicates 000 to 140 a Solid finder pattern on two sides define physical size orientation in most cases Alternating finder pattern on two sides used to define cell structure Data Matrix Symbol Comparison Symbol Features ECC 000 140 ECC 200 Number of rows and columns including finder pattern Odd except for some closed applications Even Element in upper right hand corner Dark for light background symbols Light for light background symbols Error correction routine Convolution Reed Solomon Symbol sizes not including quiet zones 17 to 21 sizes squares only 24 squares 6 rectangular Append in structured format No Yes up to 16 symbols Subdivide code word stream into blocks for error detection No Yes for symbols with more than 255 code words Extended channel interp
39. Symbol Type Symbol Size Pixels Per Element Aperture Wavelength Columns BD BJ 3 84 Angle Firmware Serial Number Date Time ESP Version Company Operator i Fie Edit view Insert Format Tools Data Window Help EAA SLAV amp BB gn 2h it A Sym_Data Ref_Dec 1 Sym_Con 2 1233 PASS 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A A 74 4 A 4 A 4 AJ4 A 4 A File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help g a gt EHSA SRAY amp A31 X f z 2l N ORRES TOR IRAs TW LU A A es 1 Fixed_Pat_Dam Axial_Nu 2 4 A 4 A 4 A4 AUS A 0 024 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A E File Edit view Insert Format Tools Data Window Help EHAA SLAY 8 gja z AN34 z fe Z AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH Al AJ AK 1 Grid_Nu Modulation 2 0184 A 4 A 4 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A H File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help DEHA 6RY m gja 4 4s BCc38 f AL JAM AN AO AP AQ AR ASAT AU AV AW 1 Unused_ECC Overall_Grade Final_Grade 2 100 4 A HAHA HAHA 40A 4 A AAJ ATA ATA ATA File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Deen SRY amp I gja E BE26 z f AX AY AZ gt 1 Print_Growth Sym_Type Sym_Size Pix_Element Aperture Wavelength BA BB BC 2 OECC200 14x14 9 9 0x000 660 nm File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Cesena SAY amp m Sin 4 BQ23 v fe BD BE BF BG BH Bl BJ 1
40. synchronous trigger mode gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled When disabled the trigger event for an image capture is asynchronous with the video frame This means that when a trigger occurs the video timing is reset and an image capture occurs immediately This causes flickering in an output monitor during image captures because video timing needs to resync every time the video signal is reset Enabled Synchronous Trigger When enabled the trigger event for an image capture is synchronous with the video frame This means that when a trigger occurs the image captured is not released until the start of the next video frame which occurs every 16 68ms The video timing never changes and no effect is seen during image captures on the video monitor Restrictions When the Synchronous Trigger mode is enabled it will not take effect unless the following conditions are met 1 Shutter selection is 1 1200 or faster 2 Live Video Mode is in effect 8 28 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Application Notes 1 If a Rapid Capture trigger mode is enabled the timing on the trigger will change when Synchronous Trigger mode is enabled and will probably not be sufficient for most applications This is because the trigger can have up to a 16ms delta from the time the trigger is issued until the image capture occurs Thus the trigger timing will not be stable and should not be used in a dynamic app
41. 0 18 100 4 A Captured symbol image o Bt Reference data Verifier firmware version Verifier serial number report creation date ESP version company name and operator name Aperture 0 000 Wavelength 660 nm Firmware Version Verifier Serial Number This report was created on Saturday February 04 2006 at 20 01 52 Company XYZ Corp Operator J Doe Angle 45 degrees Note See Preferences Tab for information about how to autofit PDF reports to a single page 3 82 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Save Multi Capture Verification Report as an HTML File CSV Files csv Rich Text Edit Files rtf Default Report Type HTML Files htm X If you have already chosen HTML format in the Preferences dialog the report will be saved as an HTML file 15415 Verification Report Parameters Single Results Mean pan single Results Values Reference Decode 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A PASS Symbol Contrast 4A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 74 Fixed Pattern Damage 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A pae spi Axial Mon Unif it 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 0 02 Verification results A E w w a y and mean values Grid Non Uniformity 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 0 18 Modulation 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A ane Unused ECC 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 100 Final Grades 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A
42. 001 Dot Ovality Average Value Axial Non Uniformity Value F Angle of Distortion Grade Grid Non Uniformity Grade 08 20 Angle of Distortion Value Grid Non Uniformity Value P Symbol Contrast Grade Modulation Grade 034 Symbol Contrast Value Unused ECC Grade P Quiet Zone Grade Unused ECC Value 12 4 Pixels Per Element Value Print Growth Value ECC200 Symbol Type Pixels Per Element Value 018x018 Symbol Dimensions Symbol Type Symbol Dimensions Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification General Verification Output by ESP General verification output parameters allow the user choose specific output settings for Separator Character ISO Grade Type Symbol Type and Symbol Dimension Size as they appear in ISO IEC 15415 and AS9132 verification output Symbol verification Data Matrix Separator j ISO Grade Type Alpha Note The Alpha or Numeric Symbol Type Disabled parameter only affects ISO IEC Symbol Dimension Size Disabled 15415 output Separator Character The separator you choose will appear between each field of data output General General separator 150 Grade Type A Synbol Dereon Pal sa Em Eon Ra aS BEL BS HT LF wT FFI Double click on the character displayed in the ER _so _s _si pci pc2 control tree to bring up the separator character DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN calculator You can either type your choice of EM SUB ESC FS GS RS character in the text field or if
43. 130 status gt Default Enabled Note This is the only symbol type enabled by default Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 000 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 000 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 050 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 050 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 7 4 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Symbologies ECC 080 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 080 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 100 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 100 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 140 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 140 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status gt D
44. 480x360 Captured symbol image Err aad Verification Report Parameters Single Result Mean Values Reference Decode 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A PASS Symbol Contrast 4 A 4 A A 4 A 4 A sow Grades for Fixed Pattern Damage 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A individual Axial Non umtformity 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 0 01 captures Grid Won Uniformity A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 0 04 Modulation 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A Overall Unesed ECC 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 100 grade Final Grades 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A Overall Grade 4 A Symbol Data y Symbol data Non Graded Parameters Print Growth 0 01 Symbol Type tccasa Data for non graded Symbol Size 10x10 parameters Preeis Element iL6 Reference data Verifier firmware version Verifier serial number report creation date ESP version company name and operator name Aperture 6 000 Wavelength 660 nm Angie 45 degrees Firmware Version 35 676203 56 Verifier Serisi Number This report was created on Tuesday December 13 2005 at 12 14 49 Company XYZ Corp Operator 1 Doe Note PDF version shown here Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 1 15 Generate and Save Verification Report AS9132 Verification Report Verification results and pass fail grades MICROSCAN 1 16 Captured symbol image
45. AB AC AD AE AF AG 1 Firmware_Vers Verifier Ser_Num Report_Created VersCompany Operator Copyright User_Defined 2 420383 2 26 2007 15 22 AAA Acme Joe Operator Any Label Any Data Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 95 Verification by ESP Save AIM DPM Verification Report as an RTF Default Report Type Rich Text Edit Files rtf v PDF Files pdf HTML Files htm a If you have already chosen RTF in the CSV Files Ss err Preferences dialog the report will be Rich Text Edit Files rtf saved as an RTF file AIM DPM Quality Guideline PARAMETER RESULTS GRADE ieee ak gt REFERENCE DECODE Pass 4 a CELL CONTRAST 71 4 aj FIXED PATTERN DAMAGE 4 a Verification AXIAL NON UNIFORMITY 0 00 results and 4 aj grades GRID NON UNIFORMITY 0 08 4 aj CELL MODULATION 4 hj UNUSED ECC 100 4 aR MINIMUM REFLECTANCE 100 4 hj FINAL GRADE 4 ih NON GRADED PARAMETERS PRINT GROWTH 0 07 STHBOL TIPE Ecc200 Non graded parameters and symbol data SYMBOL SIZE 16x16 ELEMENT SIZE 0 010 PIXELS ELEMENT 10 8 Note Image captures are output simultaneously with the RTF The format JPG SYMBOL DATA 123 or BMP is determined in the Preferences dialog Aperture 0 008 Wavelength 660 nm Lighting 45Q Firmware Version Serial Number 0420383 This report was created on Monday February 26 2007 Company AAA Acme Rea
46. Camera Number of internal camera captures 1 Number of external camera captures 1 Extra 33mS time delay before 1st external capture Internal 1 3 5 7 9 External 2 4 6 8 10 Processing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 Because of space limitations a limited number of captures are shown in the Continuous examples Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 6 27 Dual Camera Switching Switching by Timeout The timeout mode specifies the time each camera is active before switching to the other camera The read cycle will start with the internal camera and switch to the external camera after the specified time period has expired Internal Camera Timeout Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options It is useful in many tightly controlled applications which require a read cycle to end before the next object appears and therefore need the flexibility of a timeout adjustment Internal Camera Switching Time is the time span of the read cycle and is represented in 10mS increments It is used in conjunction with External Edge or Serial Trigger lt K243 switching mode number of internal captures number of external cap tures internal camera timeout external camera timeout gt 100 x 10mS 1 second 0 to 65535 Divide any positive number entered by 100 to determine the time in seconds External Camera Timeout Usage Definition Serial Cmd
47. Character Separator Character Composite Separator Character UPC EAN Separator Status Composite Separator Status UPC EAN Sequence On Mismatch Sequence On No Read Sequence Step Sequential Matching Serial Command Beep Status Serial Command Echo Status Serial Command Format Serial Command Status Request Serial Configuration Command Conventions Serial Configuration Commands Serial Configuration K Commands Serial Data Serial Data or External Edge Serial Number Too Long Serial Trigger Serial Trigger Character Delimited Serial Utility Commands Serial Verification Service Message Service Message Status Service Unit Set Number of Symbols Set Verification Parameters Setting Up the Verifier for EZ Trax Show Connect Prompt Show Model Prompt Show Non Printable Characters Shutter Speed Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Index 21 S Side View of IB 150 Single Beep Position 1 Single Capture Single Capture Verification Process Single Capture Verification Report Single Descriptor Status Request Single Range Status Request Single Status Request Sizing Information Sockets Software Defaults Space in Data Qualifier Start and Stop Trigger Characters Non Delimited Start Character Non Delimited Start Location Start Stop Status Statement of Agency Compliance Static Presentation Green Flash Statistic Mode 1 Image Captioning Statistic Mode 2 Image Captioning Status Byte Status Requests Step
48. Cmd lt K244 image storage type image storage mode gt Default Disabled Clear Options 0 Disabled Clear 1 Store on No Read Image Storage Mode Definition Outputs the first or last No Read images as selected In First mode images will be stored until the available image memory has been filled At this point the unit will stop storing additional images and the first images stored will be available In Last mode the last images stored will be available After the available memory has been filled images will continue to be stored by purging the oldest image in the storage memory Serial Cmd lt K244 image storage type image storage mode gt Default First Images Options 0 First Images 1 Last Images 6 30 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Read Cycle Setting Up the Verifier for EZ Trax If you are using EZ Trax software it is important to set up the Quadrus Verifier correctly before beginning Click the Read Cycle button to display the Read Cycle tree control Read Cycle Parameters ESP Values Read Cycle Multisymbol Trigger Mode Continuous Read Trigger Filter Duration 313 External Trigger State Positive Serial Trigger End of Read Cycle moe O z Read Cycle Timeout Decodes Before Output New Trigger Read Duration Output Timeout or New Trigger Last Frame Separator Last Frame or New Trigger Capture Mode Capture Time Store Noread Image Image Processin
49. Color Serial Cmd lt K250 database index shutter speed gain threshold mode threshold value processing mode background color narrow margins gt Default White Options 0 White 1 Black Narrow Margin Status Serial Cmd lt K250 database index shutter speed gain threshold mode threshold value processing mode background color narrow margins gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 12 9 Image Processing Database by ESP Image Processing Database by ESP The Image Processing command lt K250 gt is functionally the most central element of the IP Database Each column of the IP Database table corresponds to a feature of the lt K250 gt command Each image processing setting corresponds to a field in the lt K250 gt command Changes to these settings can be made by double clicking on the desired index row and then making the necessary changes in the popup dialog that appears Video Evaluation ROI IP Database Dynamic Setup Current 1000 550 1000 550 Database 1 Standard Shutter Speed Gain 1000 50 50000 550 Narrow Margins Disabled v Shutter Processing Narrow Background Threshold Fixed Speed Mode Margins Color Mode Threshold R eference Disabled 1000 Disabled ET E Disabled 0 1023 Background Color White v White Adaptive White Adaptive 0 Processing Mode M Standard
50. DD GS DUNABCD GS PNO1234567891123456789212 345678931234 GS SEQ123 AC RS EOT Error message UII Part Number Too Long Serial Number Too Long Character limit 30 gt RS DD GS DUN ABCD GS PNO09876 GS SEQ123456789 11234567892 1234567 8931 RS EOT Error message UI Serial Number Too Long EID Too Long Character limit 13 gt RS DD GS DUN 1234567891 1234211 GS PNO98 76 GS SEQ123 AC RS EOT Error message UII EID Too Long Invalid Compliance Indicator RS 05 GS 800406141411A0B9C3D6 RS EOT Error message Invalid UII Compliance Indicator The following symbol will read in UII with Pass Through mode because the invalid compliance indicator suggests that the encoded characters form a non UII data string Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Valid Data Qualifier Formats Valid Data Qualifier Formats The table below shows examples of correctly applied data qualifiers and the decoded UII output Examples of Valid Data Qualifiers and Concatenated Ulls Encoded data string Application Identifier gt RS 05 GS 0100061414199999 GS 211 AOB9C3D6 RS EOT ae Al Format 05 Concatenated UII 000614141999991A0B9C3D6 Encoded data string Data Identifier gt RS 06 GS 18SOCVA5674A36458 RS EOT DI Format 06 concatenated UII DOCVA5674A36458 Encoded data string Text Element Identifier gt RS DD GS CAG987654 GS SERMKJHUIYD RS EOT TE
51. Decoded symbol Master symbol after decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 abc 004 sequenced because of previous match 004 004 005 005 def 006 sequenced because of previous match 006 ghi 006 not sequenced because of previous mismatch 006 006 007 Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 9 11 Sequence Step Sequence Step Usage Useful in applications in which it is desirable to count by intervals other than 1 Definition Sequencing in Matchcode operations can occur in steps from 1 to 32 768 Sequencing performs like a mechanical counter by displaying positive integers and a specific number of digits after roll overs For example 000 3 997 not 3 and 999 3 002 not 1002 SerialCmd lt K228 sequence step gt Default 1 Options 1 to 32768 Note See lt K223 gt command for more information An example of Sequence Step if Sequence Step is set to 3 and Sequential Matching is set to Increment Master symbol Decoded symbol Master symbol after decode 003 001 003 003 002 003 003 003 006 006 004 006 006 005 006 006 006 009 9 12 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Matchcode Match Replace Usage Provides a convenient shortcut for applications that need to output a pre defined text string whenever a symbol matches a master symbol Definition Outputs a user defined data string whenever a match occurs and Matchcode is enabled Serial Cmd lt K735 status repla
52. Definition With Mismatch enabled the reader transmits symbol data whenever the symbol data information does NOT match the master symbol Note A No Read can still be transmitted if enabled 8 4 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Good Read Usage Good Read is used when an application requires all symbol data to be transmitted It s typically used in tracking applications in which each object is uniquely identified Definition With Good Read enabled the reader transmits symbol data on any good read regardless of Matchcode Type setting Note A No Read can still be transmitted if enabled Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 5 When to Output Symbol Data When to Output Symbol Data Definition Serial Cmd Default Options This command allows the user to choose when symbol data can be sent to the host lt K705 symbol data output status when to output gt As Soon As Possible 0 As Soon As Possible 1 End of Read Cycle As Soon As Possible Usage As Soon As Possible is useful in applications in which symbol data needs to be moved quickly to the host typically when the host is making decisions based on symbol data Definition Enabling As Soon As Possible causes symbol data to be sent to the host immediately after a symbol has been successfully decoded Note More than one decode might in fact be required to qualify as a good read depending on how Decodes Before Output is set End of Re
53. GRADED PARAMETERS PRINT GROWTH SYMBOL TYPE ECC268 SYMBOL SIZE 16x18 ELEMENT SIZE 6 619 PIXELS ELEMENT 18 5 SYMBOL DATA 3 74 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Save Single Capture Verification Report There are several possible ways to save your verification report depending on what works best for your application Report Settings Preferences Save Report Locate Calibrate ISOZIEC 15415 Multi Capture 4591324 Verification AIM DPM Quality Guideline Illumination Extemal internal lighting disabled Save Single Capture Verification Report as a PDF If you have already chosen PDF in the Preferences dialog the report will be saved as a PDF file ISO IEC 15415 Verification Report Parameters Results Grade Reference Decode PASS aa Symbol Contrast 75 mee 4 A Verification HTML Files htm CS Files csv Rich Text Edit Files rtf Default Report Type PDF Files pdf Z tat non uniformity ae a r aa Fixed Pattern Damage 4 A Grid Non Uniformity 0 18 4 A Modulation 4 A Unused ECC 100 4 A Symbol data Captured symbol image Final Grade 4 A Symbol Data 123 Non Graded Parameters dri caro ae Data for Symbol Type ECC200 non graded Symbol Size 16x16 parameters Pixels Element 10 3 Symbol Image Image scaled to 480x3
54. Illumination Internal inner and outer rings i Locate Calibrate Save Report is explained in greater detail in Step 11 Generate and Save Verification Report e For ISO IEC 15415 Verification click ISO IEC 15415 and then select Single Capture or Multi Capture when the ISO 15415 Single or Multi Capture dialog appears ISOAIEC 15415 alt ISO 15415 Single or Multi Capture Would you like to perform a ISO 15415 Single or Multi Capture Single Capture Select the desired capture process for ISO IEC C Multi Capture 15415 verification F Don t show this dialog again These options can be changed in the Preferences tab ISO IEC 15415 Single Capture Cancel e For AS9132 Verification click AS9132A Verification 4591324 Verification e For AIM DPM Verification click AIM DPM Quality Guideline AlM DPM Quality Guideline Verification results are displayed in the viewing area at the lower right of the Verification view Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 1 11 Verify Symbol ISO IEC 15415 Single Capture Verification Results The ISO IEC 15415 Single Capture results show data concerning the reference decode algorithm symbol contrast fixed pattern damage axial and grid non uniformity modulation unused error correction capacity print growth symbology type symbol size element size and pixels per element All but the last four parameters are given a numer
55. MS Connect 5100 Description Quadrus Verifier 1 Show legacy products MS 880 MS 850 amp MS 710 MV Show this dialog at startup 1 Click the button showing the Quadrus Verifier 2 Click OK 3 Note You can also simply double click the Quadrus Verifier button to make your selection 4 Click Yes when the following dialog box appears Would you like to connect to the Quadrus Verifier Yes No Note If you need to select another model later you can find it in Application Mode under Model on the menu toolbar Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 1 5 Select Communications Protocol Step 5 Select Communications Protocol When the following dialog appears make your selection and click Next Select Protocol Please select the protocol to use RS 232 C TCP IP lt Back Cancel RS 232 1 In the RS 232 dialog if your communications port is not the default COM1 use the dropdown menu to change your communications port 2 Click Connect 3 If the connection fails click the Autoconnect button select a different communications port and try again Autoconnect Note If your host settings cannot be changed to match the Verifier s settings check the Force Connect box TCP IP See Chapter 16 Ethernet 1 6 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Quick Start Step 6 Position Verifier and Symbol When you connect to ESP the first thing you will see is the Report tab of t
56. Noread Pulse Width Good Read Match Output Mode Mismatch Noread Trend Analysis Symbol Quality Diagnostic Warning In Read Cycle SerialCmd lt K812 output on output state oulse width output mode gt See Output On Output 1 for command structure and options Output State Output 3 Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Noread CT Normal Oper z Pulse Width Normally Open Output Mode Normally Closed SerialCmd lt K812 outout on output state pulse width output mode gt See Output State Output 1 for command structure and options 8 52 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Pulse Width Output 3 Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Noread Output State Normally Open Pulse Width Seconds Output Mode Pulse Serial Cmd lt K812 output on output state pulse width output mode gt See Pulse Width Output 1 for command structure and options Output Mode Output 3 Output 3 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Noread Output State Normally Open Pulse Width 5 Outou Mode z Pulse Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle Serial Cmd lt K812 output on output state pulse width output mode gt See Output Mode Output 1 for command structure and options Trend Analysis Output 3 Note Output On under Output 3 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Output 3
57. Output Mode Diagnostic Warning In Read Cycle Definition Allows the user to set the conditions under which an output or outputs will be activated Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Default Mismatch or No Read Options 0 Mismatch Or No Read 1 Good Read Match 2 Mismatch 3 No Read 4 Trend Analysis 5 Symbol Quality 6 Diagnostic Warning 7 In Read Cycle Note If Output On is set to Mismatch Or No Read Match or Mismatch a transition switching will not occur unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 35 Output 1 Parameters Mismatch or No Read Output On Activates discrete output when the data does not match that of the master symbol or the symbol has not been decoded before the end of the read cycle Good Read Match Output On Activates a discrete output when the symbol data matches the master symbol Note If you want to output for a good read and Matchcode is not enabled you can enable any output for Match Mismatch Output On Activates a discrete output when the symbol data does not match that of the master symbol No Read Output On Activates a discrete output whenever the symbol data is not decoded before the end of the read cycle Trend Analysis Output On Activates discrete output when a trend analysis condition is met depending on the trend analysis option enabled Sym
58. Overall Grade 4 A Symbol Data Symbol data 123 Non Graded Parameters Print Growth 0 04 Symbol Type ECC200 Data for i up non graded Symbol Size 16x16 parameters Pixels Element 10 3 Symbol Image Image scaled to 480x360 Captured symbol image Aperture 0 000 Firmware Version 35 676201 E2 Verifier Serial Number This report was created on Saturday February 04 2006 at 20 14 22 Software Version 3 2 1 0 Company XYZ Corp Operator J Doe Wavelength 660 nm Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Reference data Verifier firmware version Verifier serial number report creation date ESP version company name and operator name Angle 45 degrees 3 83 Verification by ESP Save Multi Capture Verification Report as a CSV File CSV output is in a spreadsheet format with all parameters listed in a horizontal orientation Default Report Type csv Files cs v X PDF Files pdf HTML Files CS Files csv Rich Text Edit Files rtf htm If you have already chosen CSV format in the Preferences dialog the report will be saved as a CSV file Columns A M Symbol Data Reference Decode Grade Symbol Contrast Columns N Y Fixed Pattern Damage Axial Non Uniformity Columns Z AK Grid Non Uniformity Modulation Columns AL AW Unused ECC Overall Grade Final Grade Columns AX BC Print Growth
59. Parameters Trend Analysis Serial Cmd lt K782 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on gt See Trend Analysis Output 1 for command structure and options Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 53 Output 3 Parameters ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Output 3 Note Output On under Output 3 Parameters must be set to Symbol Quality for this output to function Output 3 Parameters Output On Symbol Quality All ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality parameters except Print Growth feature the alphanumeric grade options shown below If the decoded symbol s grade falls below the selected threshold grade Sig Symbol Quality ISO 15415 Grade Output Disabled the output will activate Decode Disabled Symbol Contrast Disabled Fixed Pattern Damage Disabled Disable F 2 Axial Non uniformity Disabled Disahiad Grid Non uniformity Disabled Modulation Disabled Unused ECC Disabled Print Growth Disabled Serial Cmd lt K832 grade decode symbol contrast fixed pattern damage axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation unused error correction capacity print growth value gt See ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Output 1 for command structure and options AS9132 Symbol Quality Output 3 Note Output On under Output 3 Parameters must be set to Symbol Quality for this output to function Output 3 Parameters Output On Symbol Quality All AS9132 Symbol Quality parameters featu
60. Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 No Read Note Beeper will also sound if any of the following occur e The reader is defaulted e Asend save command from ESP or an Exit command from any embedded menu e A calibration routine is completed A lt Z gt lt Zp gt lt Zd gt or lt K701 1 gt command is sent Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 19 Serial Verification Serial Verification Allows the user to verify configuration command status Serial Command Echo Status Usage Definition Function Serial Cmd Default Options This command is useful in removing any doubt about the reader s interpretation of any configuration command For example if the current preamble is SOM and lt K701 1 START gt is entered the reader will echo back lt K701 SOM gt since the attempted entry START exceeds the four character limit for that command Therefore it is rejected and the existing SOM message is echoed back and remains the preamble message When enabled a configuration command received from the host is echoed back to Host gt the host with the resultant settings lt t Verifier If acommand with multiple fields is processed some of the fields may have been processed properly while others were not The changes will appear in the string echoed back so that the user will know which fields did or did not change lt K701 serial command ech
61. Symbol eeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeseeeseaeeseeseeeseaeeeneeeeeeseeeteatens 1 7 Step 7 Locate Symboli is3 ont Santa AS ee en 2 RG 1 8 Step 8 Calibrate Reflectance eee eeeescecseeseseesseeseaeeececeaeeeseeeeaeeeaeesaeseaeessaeseaeeeeeseaseseeessaeenees 1 9 Step 9 Set Verification Parameters cescccecceeseeeseeeeseeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeaeeeseeseaeseaeeseaeeeaeeseeseaeeeneeeeas 1 10 step 10 Verifiy Symbolist ieec ais deed See ee ak Sa A ee aata 1 11 Step 11 Generate and Save Verification Report ccceecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeseaeeeneeeaaee 1 14 This section is designed to get your Verifier up and running quickly so you can get a sense of its capabilities and test sample symbols Detailed setup information for installing the Verifier in your application can be obtained in the subsequent sections Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 1 1 Check Required Hardware Step 1 Check Required Hardware Video OUT to Monitor 140d XN HOST To Host Hardware Required Caution Be sure that all cables are connected BEFORE applying power to the system Always power down BEFORE disconnecting any cables Item Description Part Number 1 Quadrus Verifier FIS 6700 100XG 2 IB 150 Kit Included with Verifier 3 Power Supply Inclu
62. Verifier User s Manual 5 25 Aux Port System Data Status 5 26 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual N 6 Read Cycle Contents Read Cycle by ESP vit orriei edan nai test decreas tener o SETE ends aie Nie 6 2 Read Cycle Serial Commands eecceesceeseeceeeeeeeeeaeecaeeeeeceaeeseeeeaeeesaeeeaeeeaeeseaeeeaeesaeeeeeseeeeags 6 3 Read Gycle Setup A EAAS AEE EEE AT E A TE T 6 4 ALETLE danl ool EEEE EEE ETTE T E ETETE 6 5 TWIG Q ET E T T 6 7 seek aae e E AEA A AE EET 6 13 RIER CE kOIo EAEE AT E A E AT 6 15 ACTIVE CAM E wsc2 is aieas safestidac abana pas ening cde saici cad chdengehssne ceased sates sduescnaasicadsicascsdndcdashadacedusdehetstatesiie 6 17 Capture MOG exis cs e scctccs detest adie ed cna od deck eats achavadsaactiaszeedacatasd ssaseaucbvauedtanstaasdesdeaaueiciaagnts 6 18 GATS TAMING EAEE E TE A T 6 23 Dual Camera Switching irsana aeaa a aaie eana eaaa aeda Ea tahaka 6 25 Store No Read MAGE a a a E e Ea a a a A a Rai 6 30 Setting Up the Verifier for EZ Trax c eeceeecceeseeseeeseeteaeeececeaeeseesaeeeseesaeeeaeeseaeseaeeseeseaeeeieetaee 6 31 After you ve established communications and completed basic read rate testing you will need to address the spatial and timing parameters associated with your application Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 6 1 Read Cycle by ESP Read Cycle by ESP Read Cycle To open the entire contents of the tree control hold down the Alt key and single click the To cl
63. Warning and Caution Summary co N N A Viewing the Quadrus Verifier s LED output with optical instruments such as magnifiers eye loupes or microscopes within a distance of 100 mm could cause serious eye injury Maximum LED light output 648 cd Wavelength 464 nm 518 nm 635 nm Location of the Quadrus Verifier s LED aperture window LED Aperture Window CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure Quaarus Verifier User s Manual xi Warning and Caution Summary Warning and Caution Summary cont a N Ne e Max Power 67 mW e Wavelength 660 nm e Location of the Quadrus Verifier s LED array gt LED Array CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure xii Quadrus Verifier User s Manual es 1 Quick Start Contents Step 1 Check Required Hardware ccceccessceseseceseecseeeeaeeeseeseaeeeaeeceaeeeaeeeeessaeeeaeeseeeseaeeseaeeeaeetaaes 1 2 Step 2 Corinect theSystemaas wes Ao RADAR Sa ee a Re 1 3 Stepe Install ESPxtcAs nines cael ais Ae etn ee ee es on ee eae 1 4 step Select MOd6l wicnsas es AG ee NEAL ee ei ce ee eee ee 1 5 Step 5 Select Communications Protocol ceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseeeseaeeeeeeeneeetieeseaeeeaeees 1 6 Step 6 Position Verifier ANd
64. a PDF file Default Report Type PDF Files pdf X HTML Files htm CS Files csv Rich Text Edit Files rtf Data for non graded parameters Bar Code Sco Captured symbol image Reference data Verifier firmware version Verifier serial number report creation date ESP version company Parameters Results Grade Reference Decode PASS 4 4 Cell Contrast 80 4 A Fixed Pattern Damage Verification 4 A Axdal Non Uniformity results and 0 07 3 B Grid Non Uniformity grades 0 22 4 A Cell Modulation 4 A Unused ECC 100 4 A Minimum Reflectance 100 4 a Final Grade 3 8 DPM 3 0 04 660 45Q Non Graded Parameters Print Growth 0 06 Symbol Size 16x16 Symbol Type ecc200 Element Size Symbol data Symbol Data 2 y Symbol Image scaled to 328x248 po SE ars Py Sia Aperture 0 004 45Q name and operator name fiemvare Version 35 676201 12 Verifier Sertal Number 0420383 Wednesday November 22 2006 at 11 27 58 Microscan ESP Version 3 4 1 6 Company AMA Acme Readers Operator Joe Operator Any Label Any Data Note See Preferences Tab for information about how to autofit PDF reports to a single page Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 93 Verification by ESP Save AIM DPM Verification Report as an HTML File Default Report Type HTML Fil
65. a symbol is overprinted or underprinted When enabled appends the symbol s Print Growth Value to the verification output string lt K756 grade aperture value wavelength value light angle value decode grade symbol contrast fixed pattern damage grade axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation grade unused error correction print growth value pixels per element value gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Value Print Growth Value highlighted below symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 0 11 3 0 43 3 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 Pixels Per Element Value Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Output Example Counts the number of pixels in each symbol element The higher the Pixels Per Element count the more readable the symbol When enabled appends the symbol s Pixels Per Element Value to the verification output string lt K756 grade aperture value wavelength value light angle value decode grade symbol contrast fixed pattern damage grade axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation grade unused error correction print growth value pixels per element value gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Value Pixels Per Element Value highlighted below symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 0 11 3 0 43 3 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 3 32 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification ISO IEC 15415 Output by ESP Grade Output Note Grade type Alpha or Numeric is determined by
66. ad die a Se a L TEE aR 8 24 Image Captioning dctwin gies a ere 8 26 SYNCHIONOUS Triggers sinai aa a a a aA 8 28 EZ BUOM ie na a a nO Ue os a atte 8 30 EZ Button Modesa sni feat eR ee es 8 32 Aput kea a a eeu ee a teas Maes 8 34 Output Parameters acs 33 doce dae ee eet 8 35 Output 2 Parameters nsi ee ee tes 8 48 Output 3 Parameters 2 25 doctidn eee le 8 52 Configuring EZ Trax Output ceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeteaeeeeeesseeeeeeteneeeaees 8 56 Chapter 9 Matchcode Matchcode by ESP acurin nino e e seid 9 2 Matchcode Serial COMMANAS eecceceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteaeeteeeeeeeteeeteneeeatens 9 3 Overview of Matchcode ceeeceeseeteseeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeteaeeteaeseaeesaeseaeeeneetaas 9 4 Maichcode Type seneesa a 9 5 Sequential Matching cescstii hee iinet 9 6 Match Start Positions rennene a ee ns 9 7 Mateh ength iie adn A ee ee na 9 8 Wild Card Charactet i 3v nis ene ld eta na 9 9 Sequence On No Read 24 0 nade die nave ieee 9 10 Sequence On Mismatch c cecceesceseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeteeeseaeeeseeeneeeeaeees 9 11 Se Quence Stepinn oat ne ee le eee 9 12 Match Replace ci ecstatic einen ident ave arate 9 13 Mismatch Replace wt sects eisai eee adel deveined entangle 9 14 New Master Pinisi2 ccss asi elcetelepee ssid eae eile eet eben eet eis ees 9 15 vi Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Introduction Chapter 10 Diagnostics Diagnostics by ES Pinn ierre eion a E i aa 10 2 Di
67. amount of error correction capacity that was used to decode the symbol and indicates the remaining amount of available error correction When enabled appends the symbol s Unused Error Correction grade and or value to the verification output string Grading Scale 4 A if gt 0 62 3 B if gt 0 50 2 C if gt 0 37 1 D if gt 0 25 0 F if lt 0 25 Serial Cmd lt K756 grade aperture value wavelength value light angle value decode grade symbol contrast fixed pattern damage grade axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation grade unused error correction print growth value pixels per element value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Grade 2 Value 3 Grade and Value Grade Output Unused Error Correction Grade highlighted below shown in numeric Example form symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 0 11 3 0 43 3 2 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 Value Output Example symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 0 11 3 0 43 3 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 Unused Error Correction Value highlighted below Grade and Value Output Unused Error Correction Grade and Value highlighted below grade Example shown in numeric form symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 0 11 3 0 43 3 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 31 ISO IEC 15415 Serial Output Print Growth Value Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Output Example Determines the degree to which
68. amp EZ SETUP BUTTON ORDERED OUTPUT FILTERING ISO amp DPM VERIFICATION WARNING MESSAGES SERVICE TIME ETC CAMERA OPTIONS CAMERA SETTINGS IPDATABASE IPDATABASE FOR GAIN SHUTTER ETC MAIN MENU OR EXIT NEXT ITEM PREVIOUS MENU S NEXT ITEM PREVIOUS ITEM THIS ITEM MAIN gt COMMUNICATIONS Menu navigation commands are case sensitive Use the space bar or N to advance to the next item CR return key to select a highlighted item B to return to the previous item M to return to the previous menu and ESC to return to the Main menu or to exit the program When exiting the program you will be prompted to save your active settings for power up Y or N Typing Y will be equivalent to saving with a lt Z gt command 1 If you are using HyperTerminal you may find that the initial screen is not visible when you call up the program with the lt D gt command If this occurs exit the embedded menu with the sequence ESC E and N and repeat the lt D gt command A 22 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Appendices Appendix J Interface Standards Interface Standards established by the Electronic Industries Association EIA specify such things as the signaling voltage levels maximum cable lengths and number of drivers With Microscan devices selection of interface is made by pin assignment RS 232 RS 232 defines an interface between two devices such as for example the Verifier and host It differs from other interface
69. as well If more than one image frame is available in a read cycle the image frame selected by the triggered video mode will be displayed When the Slide Show video mode is enabled the text is overlaid onto every image frame prior to being output to the video port so every image will have overlay text when uploaded Serial Cmd lt K762 mode gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Read Cycle Results 2 Statistic Mode 1 counts 3 Statistic Mode timing Important Notes f triggered video is not enabled this feature is disabled regardless of the mode setting e Only 26 characters can be displayed per line and only 2 lines of data will be displaye33d If the data string is longer than this it will be truncated e 1 line of captioning takes approximately 125ms to complete overlay Therefore for 2 lines of overlay an additionally 250ms of overhead will have to be added to the read cycle duration Disabled Image captioning is disabled Read Cycle Results Image Captioning When enabled the results of the read cycle will be overlaid onto the triggered video image in the upper left hand corner This will include Symbol data No Read message s if enabled and any displayable formatting such as pre amble postamble and Symbol ID 8 26 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Statistic Mode 1 counts Image Captioning Outputs trigger count image frame number decode status running read rate good read
70. by F Dot Ovality Worst Case Value and Average Value highlighted below Output Example symbol_data P 004 003 F 045 057 P F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Grade and Worst Case Value Dot Ovality Dot Ovality Grade highlighted below Output Example symbol_data P 004 003 F 045 057 P 002 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Dot Ovality Grade and Worst Case Value highlighted below Grade and Average Value Dot Ovality Output Example symbol_data P 004 003 F 045 057 P 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Dot Ovality Grade and Average Value highlighted below Grade Worst Case and Average Values Dot Ovality Output Dot Ovality Grade Worst Case Value and Average Value highlighted Example below symbol_data P 004 003 F 045 057 P 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 3 58 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Percentage Failed Ovality Definition When enabled reports the percentage of dots that failed for Dot Ovality Serial Cmd lt K712 dot center offset percentage failed offset cell fill percentage failed cell fill dot ovality percentage failed ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone grade pixels per element value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Angle of Distortion Definition Measures the symbol s deviation from a 90 relation between row and column To receive a passing grade the symbol s Angle of Distor
71. control To open nested options single click the To change a setting double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options To open the entire contents of the tree control hold down the Alt key and single click the To close the entire contents of the tree control hold down the Alt key and single click the RS232 422 Host Port Host Port Connections Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Host Protocol Host 422 Status R5232 Auxiliary Port Aux Port Connections Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Aux Port Settings Network Preamble Preamble Characters Postamble Postamble Characters Response Timeout LRC Status 4ux Port System Data Status Parameters Communications 115 2K None One Eight Point to Point Disabled 115 2K None One Eight Disabled CR Enabled CR LF 2 Disabled Disabled Enabled 5 2 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Communications Communications Serial Commands Host Port Connections lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Host Port Protocol lt K140 protoco gt Host 232 422 Status lt K102 host 422 gt Auxiliary Port lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain ID status daisy chain ID gt Daisy Chain Autoconfigure lt K150DAISY gt Daisy Chain ID lt K151 daisy chain reader daisy chain reader ID gt
72. define for your database Definition This determines the number of active database indexes Whenever the number of active database indexes is something other than 0 IP Database is enabled Serial Cmd lt K252 number of active database settings gt Default 0 Options 1 to 10 By ESP Video Evaluation RO IP Database Dynamic Setup Shutter Processing Narrow Background Threshold Fixed Speed Mode Margins Color Mode Threshold Current vues 000 ARANE Disabled White Adaptive 128 6 Standard Disabled i Adaptive 0 7 1000 550 Standard Disabled White Adaptive 0 8 1000 550 Standard Disabled White Adaptive 0 9 1000 550 Standard Disabled White Adaptive 0 10 1000 550 Standard Disabled White Adaptive 0 lt gt Calibrate pis H Number of Active Indexes Load Index To Current Use this spin box to set the number of database indexes you intend to configure and apply to the Load Current To Index reader Notice that the first five index rows in the table are highlighted because Number of Active Indexes is set to 5 in the spin box Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 12 7 Image Processing Database Image Processing Database The Image Processing Database is the sequentially applied collection of camera settings that are sent to the reader during operation but only when one or more database indexes are made active Database Index Definition Defines the specific database index 1 to 10 of
73. end a read rate routine click the Stop button in the same position as the Start button r Percent TP Clear Output Read Rate by Serial Command Enter Decodes Second Test Sending lt C gt instructs the reader to transmit the decodes per second and symbol data if any The decode rate can vary dramatically due to the angle and location of the symbol in relation to the field of view This test is very useful in aligning and positioning the reader during setup Enter Percent Test Sending lt Cp gt instructs the reader to transmit the percentage of decodes and any read symbol data Enable PDF Information Sending lt a1 gt will cause PDF417 data to be prefaced with information consisting of error correction level ECC Level n number of rows n Rows number of columns n Columns number of informative code words n Info Code Words and the number of data characters n Data Bytes This feature can be disabled by re sending lt a1 gt End Read Rate Test Sending lt J gt ends both the Percent test and the Decodes Second test Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 14 3 Counters Counters Counter commands can be a numeric value from 00000 to 65 535 After reaching the maximum numeric limit of 65 535 an error message will be displayed and the counter will automatically roll over and start counting again at 00000 To obtain the cumulative total of counts after the roll over has occurred add 65 536 per each roll over
74. every K commana starting with the lowest K command value and ending with the highest K command value lt K gt All Range Status Request This request will return the current settings of all commands within the user defined range starting with the lowest user defined K command value and ending with the highest user defined K command value Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 14 19 Status Requests lt Knnn gt Single Status Request This request will return the value of the variables associated with the requested K command The request of a single entry of a database command cannot exceed the number of database slots for the specific command lt Knnn gt Single Descriptor Status Request This request returns the basic functional description of all fields in the requested K command lt Knnn gt Single Range Status Request This request will return the value range and storage type description of all fields in the requested K command 14 20 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Utilities Other Operational Serial Commands The following serial utility commands can be entered from ESP s Terminal window or a PLC Y Modem Upload Transfer Options lt uy path filename gt Y Modem Download Transfer Options lt dy path filename gt Image Library Request lt op 9 gt Manages files in a selected directory File Source Explanation Nothing All files in root directory All files in
75. exact number of characters that the reader will recognize this does not include start and stop and check digit characters The reader ignores any symbol not having the specified length Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 10 Options 1 to 74 Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 7 21 RSS Limited RSS Limited Usage RSS Limited is designed to be read by laser and CCD readers It is not recommended for omnidirectional slot readers Definition Encodes a smaller 14 digit symbol 74 modules wide that is not omnidirectional Serial Cmd lt K483 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 7 22 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Symbologies RSS 14 Usage Used in the grocery retail and prescription drug industries where full 14 digit EAN UCC item identification may be needed Definition RSS 14 Reduced Space Symbology is a fixed length symbology that encodes 14 digits including a 1 digit indicator digit and is 96 modules wide It can be stacked into two rows read omnidirectional if printed in full height or not if height truncated for small marking Serial Cmd lt K482 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled non stacked 2 Enabled stacked and non stacked Where appropriate use 1 non stacked instead of 2 stacked and non stacked Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 7 23 PDF417 PDF417 Usage Used in applications where a large am
76. grade type symbol type symbol dimensions gt AS9132 Element Shape and Marking Method lt K711 element shape marking method JES 131 gt AS9132 Serial Output lt K712 dot center offset percentage failed offset cell fill percentage failed cell fill dot ovality percentage failed ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone grade pixels per element value gt ISO IEC 15415 Serial Output Matchcode lt K756 grade aperture wavelength light angle value decode grade symbol contrast fixed pattern damage grade axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation grade unused error correction print growth value pixels per element value gt Matchcode Type lt K223 type sequential matching match start position match length wildcard character sequence on no read sequence on mismatch gt Sequence Step lt K228 sequence step gt New Master Pin lt K225 status gt Number of Master Symbols Enter Master Symbol Data lt K224 number of master symbols gt lt K231 master symbol number data gt Read Next Symbol as Master Symbol lt Gmaster symbol number gt Request Master Symbol Data lt K231 gt for all or lt K231 master symbol number gt Delete Master Symbol Data lt K231 master symbol number gt Diagnostics Power on Reset Counts lt K406 power on resets power on saves customer default saves gt External Camera Message lt K410 disconnect msg sta
77. highlighted below shown in numeric form Value Grid Non Uniformity Output Example symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 0 11 0 43 3 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 Grid Non Uniformity Value highlighted below Grade and Value Grid Non Uniformity Output Grid Non Uniformity Grade and Value highlighted below grade shown in Example numeric form symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 0 11 3 0 43 3 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 29 ISO IEC 15415 Serial Output Modulation Grade Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Output Example Assesses the reflectance uniformity of the symbol s light and dark elements When enabled appends the symbol s Modulation Grade to the verification output string Grading Scale 4 A if gt 0 50 3 B if gt 0 40 2 C if gt 0 30 1 D if gt 0 20 0 F if lt 0 20 lt K756 grade aperture value wavelength value light angle value decode grade symbol contrast fixed pattern damage grade axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation grade unused error correction print growth value pixels per element value gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Grade Modulation Grade highlighted below shown in numeric form symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 0 11 3 0 43 3 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 3 30 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Unused Error Correction Definition Determines the
78. in the form of lt M231 master symbol data gt c Send a lt G gt Read Next Symbol as Master Symbol command d Enable the New Master Pin command and activate a discrete input to store the in the next symbol read as master symbol 6 Enter master symbol data using the method determined in step 4 9 4 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Matchcode Matchcode Type Definition ESP Serial Cmd Default Options Disabled Enabled Sequential Wild Card Allows the user to choose the way that master symbols will be compared with subsequently read symbols Note First set Triggering Mode to External or Serial Matchcode Matchcode Tyee Disabled Sequential Matching Match Start Position Match Length f wild Card Sequential Sequence on Noread Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled New Master Pin Disabled Match Replace Disabled Replacement String MATCH Mismatch Replace Disabled Replacement String MISMATCH lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on no read sequence on mismatch gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Sequential 3 Wild Card Has no effect on operations Instructs the reader to compare symbols or portions of symbols with the master symbol Instructs the reader to sequence after each match numeric only and compare symbols or portions of symbols for sequential numbers Note If Matchcode Ty
79. information EPROM Erasable programmable read only memory External Edge Allows a read cycle to be initiated by a trigger signal from an object detector when it detects the appearance of an object rising edge The read cycle ends with a good read a timeout or a new trigger External Level Allows a read cycle to be initiated by a trigger signal from an object detector The read cycle ends when the object moves out of the detector s range Fill Factor Percentage of pixel area used for light collection Firmware Software that is hard coded in non volatile memory ROM Fixed Pattern Damage A measurement of the damage to a symbol s finder pattern clock pattern quiet zone and any other fixed pattern in or adjacent to a symbol Fixed Symbol Length Increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Focal Distance In camera based vision the distance from the front of the camera to the object being viewed In optics the distance from the lens to the focal plane Focal Plane Usually found at the image sensor it is a plane perpendicular to the lens axis at the point of focus Focus The point at which rays of light converge for any given point on the object in the image Also called the focal point Frame tThe total area captured by an image sensor Frame Grabber A device that interfaces with a camera and on command samples the video converts the sample to a digital val
80. master symbol database size gt Note You must follow this command with a save command lt A gt or lt Z gt Default 1 Options 1 to 10 Master Symbol Database Size V Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5 7 Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Use arrows to set Master Symbol Database Size Caution Since the total number of characters available for the master symbol data base is 2710 changes to the Master Symbol Data Base Size will re allocate the number of characters available for each master symbol and could cause existing master symbols to be deleted except master symbol 1 unless it also exceeds the size limitation The table below specifies the maximum number of characters available to each symbol according to the number of master symbols defined from 1 through 10 Maximum Characters for Master Symbol Master Symbol Maximum Master Symbol Maximum Number Characters Number Characters 1 2710 6 451 2 1355 7 387 3 903 8 338 4 677 9 301 5 542 10 271 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 14 9 Master Database Enter Master Symbol Data Definition Allows you to enter master symbol data for a any enabled master symbol index number 1 to 10 provided the total number of characters does not exceed the maximum indicated in the Maximum Characters for Master Symbol table Serial Cmd lt K231 master symbol number master symbol data gt Optio
81. match count No Read count and mismatch count Count values are total number since reset Format DECODE T XXXXX V XXXXX XXX F X N XXXXX Where DECODE Decode status DECODE or NOREAD T Trigger count 0 65535 5 digits vi Good read Match 065635 5 digits count Read rate 0 100 3 digits F Image frame number 0 7 1 digit N No Read count 0 65535 5 digits Mismatch count 0 65535 5 digits Important e If Match Code is disabled the Mismatch count will not be displayed e Read rate is calculated as a running average Statistic Mode 2 timing Image Captioning Indicates timing information including processing time required for displayed image and total read cycle time Also included is Decode status and image frame number Format TOTAL READ TIME XXXXX ms if decoded or STATUS if a No Read F X READ CYCLE XXXXX ms Where Total Read Time Processing time required for displayed image 1ms resolution 1 to 65535 ms up to 5 digits Status Decode status is a No Read F Image frame number 0 7 1 digit Read Cycle Total read cycle time 1ms resolution 1 to 65535 ms 5 digits Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 8 27 Synchronous Trigger Synchronous Trigger Usage Helps center the image on the video display Definition Configures the image capture trigger to be synchronous with the video frame to allow for stable video during image capture events Serial Cmd lt K761
82. menu or in ESP by requesting reader settings If you did not choose to receive reader settings upon connection in ESP you can right click anywhere in the Diagnostic window and select Receive Reader Settings Power On Definition Displays a count of the number of times power to the reader is recycled Serial Cmd lt K406 power on resets oower on saves customer default saves gt Resets Definition Displays a count of the number of times the reader is reset Serial Cmd lt K406 power on resets power on saves customer default saves gt Power On Saves Definition Displays a count of the number of power on saves lt Z gt command Serial Cmd lt K406 power on resets power on saves customer default saves gt Custom Default Saves Definition Displays a count of the number of power on saves customer defaults to flash memory lt Zc gt command Serial Cmd lt K406 power on resets oower on saves customer default saves gt Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 10 3 External Camera Message External Camera Message Note This feature cannot be used if in a Continuous Read mode Disconnect Status Definition When enabled a message is sent when the system detects that the external camera is not connected Conditions On power on if enabled and the external camera is not connected the disconnect message will be output The message will not be output again unless power is cycled or a disconnect condition occurs a
83. of Triggers No Read Output will be activated when the number of No Reads equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers Bad Symbol Output will be activated when the number of Bad Symbol occurrences equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers No Symbol Output will be activated when the number of No Symbol occurrences equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number of Triggers 8 40 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Number of Triggers Trend Analysis Definition The number of triggers to examine for the trend analysis condition Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on gt Default 0 Options 0 to 255 Number to Output On Trend Analysis Definition Sets the number of Trend Analysis Mode events mismatches No Reads or reads trigger as configured by Trend Analysis Mode to occur within the trigger evaluation time period before activating the associated output For example if Number to Output On is set to 3 and Trend Analysis Mode is set to No Read then the output will not be activated until 3 No Reads have occurred Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on gt Default 0 Options 0 to 255 Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 8 41 Output 1 Parameters ISO IEC 15415 S
84. of discrete signal events per second Binarized Image A black and white image created by applying the Global Threshold to the pixel values in the reference grey scale image Blooming A condition in which too many photons are being produced to be received by a pixel The pixel overflows and causes the photons to move to adjacent pixels Blooming is similar to overexposure in film photography except that in digital imaging the result is a number of vertical and or horizontal streaks appearing from the light source in the picture Capture The act of acquiring and storing video images in a reader or host computer Also the image captured CCD Charge Coupled Device CCDs capture light with an array of light sensitive diodes each diode representing one pixel A 24 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Appendices Cell Fill The percentage of the ideal cell size filled by a directly marked dot element Check Digit A Modulus 43 or Modulus 10 digit that is added to the symbol message for additional data integrity CMOS Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor Like CCDs CMOS readers include an array of photo sensitive diodes one diode within each pixel Unlike CCDs however each pixel in a CMOS reader has its own individual amplifier integrated inside Connector A plug or socket on a device or cable to provide in out connectivity for various circuits and pins Concentrator lIntermediary device that relays data from multiple re
85. of the images and depending on the number enabled in Number of Captures under Capture Mode in the Camera Setup menu tree to the left of the tabs If you click Save the current image will be saved to the location of your choice Note An image can only be saved in the format in which it was uploaded to ESP JPEG images will be saved as jpg and bitmaps will be saved as bmp When you click the JPEG Image box Receive Capture Decode Delete r Current pending_18200_2 64 ms Active Image Save Evaluation Histogram Line Scan IV JPEG Images JPEG Image Quality High 100 Seo NOTE Linescan is unavailable when using JPEG M Contrast Low notice that the Line Scan button is grayed out The JPEG option allows faster captures and transfers but since the JPEG standard compresses image data it is not suitable for the more rigorous demands of line scan evaluation JPEG also allows you to adjust the image quality resolution by adjusting the sliding tab between 1 and 100 1 being the lowest quality and 100 being the highest When possible use the highest quality when image transfer speed must be increased use a lower image quality setting Adjustments for this setting will depend on your specific hardware and software limitations 11 6 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Camera Setup Histogram Usage Useful in determining quality and contrast of symbols Definition A h
86. preamble as a carriage return and a line feed causes each decoded message to be displayed of on its own line Define a one to four character data string that can be added to the front of the decoded data lt K141 status oreamble character s gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled within any protocol Preamble Character s Serial Cmd Default Options lt K141 status preamble character s gt AM corresponding to carriage return NULL NULL NULL Within a Serial Command To enter control characters within a serial command hold down the control key while typing the desired character Example lt K141 1 CNTL ms gt to enter M Within an Embedded Menu Control characters entered on the command line are displayed in the menu as mnemonic characters such as lt CR gt lt NULL gt lt NULL gt lt NULL gt To enter a control character from within an embedded menu first type in a space with the space key This has the effect of allowing the control key to be recognized as a part of the control character Next hold down the control key while typing the desired character Example Space CNTL m to enter M Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 5 21 Postamble Postamble Postamble Status Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Useful for identifying and controlling incoming data For example defining the postamble as a carriage return and a line feed causes each decoded message to be displayed of on its own line
87. read Serial Cmd lt NEWM gt The reader returns lt NEWM next master to load gt Once a symbol has been read and loaded the status will be cleared and the response will be lt NEWM 0 gt Delete Master Symbol Data Definition You can directly delete the master symbol data by serial command or ESP 1 Click the Utilities button to access the master symbol 2 Click the Master Database tab and double click the symbol number you want to delete 3 Delete text and click OK Serial Cmd lt K231 master symbol number gt To delete a master symbol enter the database number and a comma but leave the data field empty For example to delete master symbol 5 send the following lt K231 5 gt The command is entered with a blank master symbol data field which tells the reader to delete the selected master symbol from the database ESP 14 12 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Utilities Firmware Firmware by ESP Firmware Update App Code v Start Firmware Verification App Code Request Part No App Code 7 Request Checksum Firmware Update Application code versions are specific to your Verifier Consult with your sales representative before downloading application code If needed an application code will be sent to you in the form of a mot file To download application code 1 First be sure that your Verifier is connected to the host 2 Apply power to the Verifier 3 Before updating y
88. read message status no read message gt Default No Read Options 0 to 128 ASCII characters Note No Read Message will only be transmitted if Symbol Data Output is set to Match Mismatch or Good Read No Read Message can be set to any ASCII characters except NULL lt or gt 8 8 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Bad Symbol No Symbol Qualification Usage Useful in determining if a symbol is present and if user defined requirements for that symbol are met Definition Sets the requirements that will qualify an object or a symbol before outputting a decode or message Bad Symbol Message Usage Can tell the user if a qualified symbol is present but not decodable Definition When enabled send a message to the host whenever an object meets the qualifications setup in 1D Stacked Symbology Qualification or 2D Symbology Qualificationbut is not decoded Serial Cmd lt K715 unused message gt Default BAD_SYMBOL Options Up to 128 ASCII characters except NULL No Symbol Message Usage Can tell the user if a object does not qualify as a symbol Definition When enabled send a message to the host whenever an object meets the qualifications setup in 1D Stacked Symbology Qualification or 2D Symbology Qualificationbut is not decoded Serial Cmd lt K716 unused message gt Default NO_SYMBOL Options Up to 128 ASCII characters except NULL 1D Stacked Symbology Qualification Minimum Number of Bars D
89. root directory saved All files in saved directory nT All files in all directories del Deletes all files in the root director saved del Deletes all files in the saved directory del Deletes files in all directories Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 14 21 Status Requests 14 22 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual E 15 Output Format Contents Output Format Serial COMMANAS eccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeteeeeeeeecaaeseaeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseeeeeeeeneeteeeseeeenates 15 2 Output OLETE EE LUET EENE AE Anssicnsiaxtcctehdcysezeeis ta Ger alien NT 15 3 Format ASSIQN nanen de len nei A 15 4 Format Extractos eunn A ain i ei eel ei eee 15 5 FORMAUINSSM ie tates ae ee es ee 15 7 Output Filter Configuratio Ni neee een itis A E iat A E 15 9 Ordered Output Filter v0 lei eis Maven en eel E eee 15 13 This section explains how to control the formatting and filtering of decoded symbol data for output Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 15 1 Output Format Serial Commands Output Format Serial Commands Format Extract lt K740 output index start location length gt Format Insert lt K741 output index length hex string gt Format Assign lt K742 symbol number status gt Format Status lt K743 output format status gt Output Filter Configuration lt K744 filter number symbology length wildcard character placeholder data unused database index gt Ordered Output Filter lt K745 number of filters gt 15 2 Qu
90. setup features EP ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect Help gt 2 A X AppMode Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model Report Settings Preferences Welcome to Easy Setup Program ISO IEC 15415 1 The first step before grading a symbol is to place the calibrated symbol in the center of the field of view FO The reference decode algorithm generates an initial threshold based on what is Click Calibrate to begin the initial calibration routine Calibration and grading are explained at the left of the Verification screen 4591324 Verification AIM DPM Quality Guideline Save Report Illumination Internal inner and outer rings hd Locate Calibrate 4 located in the center of the FOV 2 Click Locate to begin Click Locate to activate video Center the symbol in the field of view For Help press F1 Quadrus Verifier 1 Locate Quadrus Verifier MENNE Point to Point COMI 1115 2K When you click Locate the video view be activated This allows you to center the candidate symbol in the Verifier s field of view before beginning the calibration routine Calibrate Reflectance Calibration is required for ISO IEC 15415 verification Illumination The Illumination dropdown menu allows you to configure LED behavior from the Verification view See Illumination Source for further detail abou
91. status daisy chain ID gt Default 115 2K Options 0 600 1 1200 2 2400 3 4800 4 9600 5 19 2K 6 38 4K 7 57 6K 8 115 2K Parity Aux Port Usage Only changed if necessary to match host setting Definition An error detection routine in which one data bit in each character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of 1 bits in the data field is even or odd Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain ID status daisy chain ID gt Default None Options 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 5 9 RS 232 Auxiliary Port Stop Bits Aux Port Usage Only changed if necessary to match host setting Definition Allows the user to select the last one or two bits in each character to indicate the end of the character Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain ID status daisy chain ID gt Default One Options 0 One 1 Two Data Bits Aux Port Usage Only changed if necessary to match host setting Definition Number of bits in each character SerialCmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain ID status daisy chain ID gt Default Eight Options 0 Seven 1 Eight Auxiliary Port Mode Definition Determines the flow of data between the auxiliary port device s the reader and the host SerialCmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain ID
92. status daisy chain ID gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Transparent 2 Half duplex 3 Full duplex 4 Daisy chain 5 Command Processing Note RS 232 host and aux port are available with full functionality 5 10 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Communications Transparent Auxiliary Port Mode Usage A common application in conjunction with handheld readers is one that employs an auxiliary readout to detect mis applied symbols Definition In Transparent mode data is passed between the auxiliary port and the host The reader buffers data from the auxiliary port and echoes the keyed data on the auxiliary port Auxiliary port data is passed through to the host whenever a return key is pressed at the auxiliary Host Aux port or whenever symbol data is sent If sent with Eon symbol data it is processed on a first in first out basis Auxiliary port data to the host is always sent with Verifier a preamble and a postamble If the reader is in a polled mode to the host auxiliary port data will still pass through lt D gt is the only command accepted by the reader from the auxiliary port All other commands will pass through to the host Data initiated from the Verifier Transmission to the auxiliary port occurs immediately upon a good read Host Aus e Data sent to the auxiliary port does not include a preamble or a postamble gi Communicati
93. status symbol size status symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimen sion tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default 0 Options 0 to 656 pixels Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 13 Bad Symbol No Symbol Qualification Dimension 2 2D Symbology Qualification Definition Checks symbol dimension for a specified number of pixels In the case of rectangular symbols checks the shorter side Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size status symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimen sion tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default 0 Options 0 to 656 pixels Dimension Tolerance 2D Symbology Qualification Definition Sets the allowable deviation in percentage for symbol sizes specified in Dimension 1 or Dimension 1 Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size status symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimen sion tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default 10 Options 0 to 100 Orientation Mode 2D Symbology Qualification Definition Sets the orientation value Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size status symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimen sion tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default Disabled Options 0 D
94. symbol Returns the number of master symbols if no number is included 1 Click the Utilities button and the Master Database tab Boe 2 Click on the Receive Reader s Database button Request All Master Symbol Data Serial Cmd lt K231 gt This command will return master symbol data for all symbols enabled up to 10 Read Next Symbol as Master Symbol Definition After you ve set the size in the database you can set the reader to read the next symbol as the master symbol for any given master symbol number Serial Cmd lt G master symbol number gt To store the next symbol read as master symbol 1 send lt G gt or lt G1 gt To store next symbol read as the master symbol for any other master symbol database number send lt G master symbol number 1 10 gt For example lt G5 gt will cause the next symbol read to be entered as master symbol 5 ESP In the Master Database tab 1 Select the master symbol index number in which you want to store the symbol data 2 Click on Read Symbol into Selected Index Caution If you ve selected an index which has existing data that data will be copied over by scanned data when you use this command Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 14 11 Master Database Request New Master Status Usage Informs the user when a new master symbol is pending and which position it is in Definition Returns the position in the master symbol database that will be loaded on the next
95. symbol Master symbol after decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 No Read 003 not sequenced 003 003 004 004 No Read 004 not sequenced 004 No Read 004 not sequenced 004 004 005 9 10 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Matchcode Sequence On Mismatch Note Matchcode must be set to Sequential for this command to function Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Enable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode and more than one consecutive mismatch may occur Disable this parameter if every trigger event should have a decode but no more than one consecutive mismatch may occur When set to Enabled the master symbol sequences on every decode match or mismatch When set to Disabled the master symbol will not sequence whenever consecutive mismatches occur lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on no read sequence on mismatch gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled The reader will sequence the master to one more less than the decoded symbol An example of Sequence On Mismatch Enabled Master symbol Decoded symbol Master symbol after decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 abc 004 sequenced on mismatch 004 004 005 005 def 006 sequenced on mismatch 006 ghi 007 sequenced on mismatch 007 007 008 An example of Sequence On Mismatch Disabled Master symbol
96. tees e A E A E E N ela ei 7 22 RSSA a RS a aE a ep eee ct 7 23 PDFATT e eel eG ee eee 7 24 MichOPDE44 72 iiso8 ieee ee eS UE RO eee 7 26 Composite nnn anoa ee dee cect 7 27 Narrow Maf giS r aaar ance eldetdd beth a Ea a Ta EEE E aE Ea AEA EN E EAE 7 28 Symbology D EEE ae ede de de eel eediideddin ai BU 7 29 Background Colt sensns a anaa a dees lb eneeeee EEE O Ea 7 30 The Quadrus Verifier conforms to ISO IEC 15415 2D verification requirements Data Matrix AS9132 verification requirements dot peen and laser etch chemical etch Data Matrix and the AIM DPM Quality Guideline This section describes the Data Matrix symbology and also the other symbologies that can be read by the Quadrus Verifier when it is being used as a reader See http www aimglobal org standards aimpubs asp for additional information about symbologies Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 7 1 Symbologies by ESP Symbologies by ESP Symbologies Click this button to bring up the Symbologies menu To open nested options single click the To open the entire contents of the tree control hold down the Alt key and single click the To close the entire contents of the tree control hold down the Alt key and single click the Symbologies 2D Symbologies Data Matrix ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status OR Code 1D S
97. the Verifier s field of view as possible When the candidate symbol is in position initiate the Single Capture Verification command lt V1 gt Single Capture Verification Report The Single Capture Verification Report will then appear detailing the symbol s adherence to ISO IEC 15415 requirements Verification The ISO IEC 15415 Single Capture results show data concerning the reference decode algorithm symbol contrast fixed pattern damage axial and grid non uniformity modulation unused error correction print growth symbol type symbol size element size and pixels per element All but the last five parameters are given a numeric and alphabetical grade 05 7668 REFERENCE DECODE SYMBOL CONTRAST FIXED PATTERN DAMAGE AXIAL NON UNIFORMITY GRID NON UNIFORMITY MODULATION UNUSED ECC FINAL GRADE NON GRADED PARAMETERS PRINT GROWTH SYMBOL TYPE SYMBOL SIZE ELEMENT SIZE PIXELS ELEMENT SYMBOL DATA Quadrus Verifier User s Manual ECC286 16x16 6 619 18 5 3 45 ISO IEC 15415 Verification by Serial Command ISO IEC 15415 Multi Capture Verification Serial Cmd lt V2 gt Multi Capture Verification Process Once the reflectance calibration process is complete place the candidate symbol as close to the center of the Verifier s field of view as possible Important Multi Capture Verification requires five captures at 72 intervals throughout a 360 rotation When the symbol
98. the auxiliary port at the same time it is transmitted to the host Host ae or e Data transmission conforms with all parameters specified in the configuration menu e g Preamble x Postamble End of Read Cycle Verifier Data initiated from the Host All host data is echoed to the auxiliary port in unpolled mode Host sen Verifier lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt 2 Half Duplex Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Full Duplex Auxiliary Port Mode Communications Usage When communication to and from the auxiliary port is required Definition In Full Duplex mode all auxiliary port data and symbol data is sent directly to the host Symbol data is not displayed on the auxiliary port menu Data initiated from the Auxiliary Port Auxiliary port data to the host is ignored if the Host Aux Port reader is in a polled mode Auxiliary port data or read data is sent to the host whenever it is received Auxiliary port data is not echoed Auxiliary port data to the host is always sent Me Verifier without a preamble or a postamble port All other commands are passed through to the host lt D gt is the only command that is accepted by the reader from the auxiliary Data initiated from the Verifier e Data is not sent to the auxiliary port
99. the heading JES 131 Verification Report as shown in the example below MARKING METHOD LASER ELECTO CHEM ETCH ELEMENT SHAPE SQUARE REQU I REMENT FAIL IF 2 OF IL PARAMETER PER ELEMENT RESULTS ELEMENTS FA PASS FAIL QUIET ZONE gt One element PASS CONTRAST gt 28 82 z PASS CELL FILL SIZE 60x lt size lt 110 162 z PASS ANGLE OF DISTORTION lt Degrees 0 8 degree PASS SYMBOL TYPE ECC266 ECC266 PASS MATRIX SIZE 16x18 ELEMENT SIZE 6 616 PIXELS ELEMENT 16 2 SYMBOL DATA Y Serial Cmd lt K711 element shape marking method JES 131 gt Default Disable Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 3 50 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification AS9132 JES 131 Marking Method by ESP Element Shape The shape of the symbol s printed dot peen or etch markings Each symbol element represents one bit 0 or 1 of binary data Symbol elements can be either round or square provided that they are consistent in size and spacing throughout the symbol Choice of Element Shape setting should be based on the actual element shape used in the symbol being verified 4591324 Parameters Element Shape ER z Marking Method Round JES 131 Dot Center Offset Disabled Percentage Failed Offset Disabled Cell Fill Disabled Percentage Failed Cell Fill Disabled Dot Ovality Disabled Percentage Failed Ovality Disabled Angle of Distortion Disabled Symbol Contrast Disabled Quiet Zone Gr
100. the reader does not keep track of the number of roll overs to the current count Note All counter values will be lost if power is recycled to the reader or the reader receives a reset or save command Counters by ESP You can access Counters from the Utilities menu Click the Request button to display the appropriate count or Clear to set counter to zero Request All Clear All Request Clear Tiet P Request Clear Good Read fn Request Clear homed PO Request Clear r P 14 4 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Utilities Counters by Serial Command No Read Counter Sending lt N gt displays the total number of No Reads that have occurred since the last reset No Read Counter Reset Sending lt O gt sets No Read Counter to 00000 Trigger Counter Sending lt T gt displays the total number of triggers since the last reset Trigger Counter Reset Sending lt U gt sets the trigger counter to 00000 Good Read Match Counter or Good Read Counter Sending lt V gt displays the total number of good reads matching the master symbol or if Master Symbol is not enabled the number of good reads since the last reset This counter is always enabled but will only work as a match count when Master Symbol is enabled If Master Symbol is not enabled this counter records the number of good reads This count can be requested at any time Good Read Match Counter Reset Sending lt W gt sets the Match Counter to 00000 M
101. the symbol s Quiet Zone When enabled appends the Symbol Contrast grade and or value to the verification output string Grading Scale 4 A if gt 70 3 B if gt 55 2 C if gt 40 1 D if gt 20 0 F if lt 20 lt K756 grade aperture value wavelength value light angle value decode grade symbol contrast fixed pattern damage grade axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation grade unused error correction print growth value pixels per element value gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Grade 2 Value 3 Grade and Value Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 25 ISO IEC 15415 Serial Output Grade Symbol Contrast Output Example symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 3 1 0 11 3 0 43 3 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 Symbol Contrast Grade highlighted below shown in numeric form Value Symbol Contrast Output Symbol Contrast Value is a percentage and is shown in the output string Example as a three digit value from 000 to 100 For example 075 75 symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 075 3 1 0 11 3 0 43 3 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 Grade and Value Symbol Contrast Output Symbol Contrast Grade and Value highlighted below grade shown in Example numeric form symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 0 11 3 0 43 3 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 3 26 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Fixed Pattern Damage Grade Definition Assesses damage to the symbol s finder pat
102. uniformity Disabled Modulation Disabled Cea Disabled Print Growth Disabled Pixels Per Element Print Growth Determines the degree to which a symbol is overprinted or underprinted When enabled includes the symbol s Print Growth Value in the verification report 150 15415 Parameters Grade Output Disabled Aperture Disabled Wavelength Disabled Light Angle Disabled Decode Disabled Symbol Contrast Disabled Fixed Pattern Damage Disabled Axial Non uniformity Disabled Grid Non uniformity Disabled Modulation Disabled Unused ECC Disabled Print Growth Disabled zl Pixels Per Element Disabled 3 38 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Pixels Per Element Counts the number of pixels in each symbol element The higher the Pixels Per Element count the more readable the symbol When enabled includes the symbol s Pixels Per Element Value in the verification report ISOJIEC 15415 Parameters Grade Output Disabled Aperture Disabled Wavelength Disabled Light Angle Disabled Decode Disabled Symbol Contrast Disabled Fixed Pattern Damage Disabled Axial Non uniformity Disabled Grid Non uniformity Disabled Modulation Disabled Unused ECC Disabled Print Growth Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 39 AIM DPM Verification Setup AIM DPM Verification Setup This command allows the user to fine tune lighting and camera settings to comply with AIM DPM s opt
103. which may be entered in decimal or binary format with a 1 represented by a thick bar and a 0 represented by a thin bar Bar width is independent of height In decimal format each part can be up to 999999 In binary format each input have up to 19 ones and zeros Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length min no of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Pharmacode Definition When enabled the reader will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length would be considered a valid symbol Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length min no of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Pharmacode Definition This specifies the exact number of characters that the reader will recognize this does not include start and stop and check digit characters The reader ignores any symbology not having the specified length Serial Cmd lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length min no of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 10 Options 4to 16 Minimum Number of Bars Pharmacode Definition Sets the minimum number of bars that a pharmacode symbol must have to be considered as a val
104. with Autoconnect F Show Target Pattern During Calibrate Ask to Save ESP File when Quitting Use Higher Quality Images F Show TCP IP Connection Option Open Image after Save Default Settings The Auto Sync dialog at the top of the Advanced tab allows you to determine whether Auto Sync will be automatically enabled in sections of ESP where it is used or if it will ask you before it enables Auto Sync functions Always Ask Before Auto Sync Occurs If you check this option box you are then able to determine what specific Auto Sync functions will be enabled Receive Settings from the Reader will automatically send the Verifier s settings to ESP when Auto Sync is enabled Send ESP Settings to the Reader will automatically send all Verifier configuration settings chosen in ESP to the Verifier Do Not Send or Receive Settings creates a condition in which Auto Sync will not send Verifier settings to ESP or send ESP settings to the Verifier Send XON with Autoconnect Sends an XON Begin Transmission command to the Verifier before starting the Autoconnect routine Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 2 9 Menu Toolbar Document Memo The information you type in the Document Memo field will appear in a context sensitive text box whenever your cursor hovers over the Document Memo item on the Options menu Insert up to 250 characters to describe this document Type document specitic information here Options Preferences Type d
105. you need to use us sP a non printable character click the abbreviation that corresponds with that character Click Delete to remove characters ISO Grade Type This parameter only affects ISO IEC 15415 verification output General Separator 150 Grade Type Alpha bed Symbol Type Alpha Symbol Dimension mare a If you choose Alpha ISO grades will be in alphabetical format A B C D F If you choose Numeric ISO grades will be in numeric format Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 3 17 General Verification Output by ESP Symbol Type When enabled Symbol Type identifies the symbology of the mark being evaluated in the verification report output General Separator E 150 Grade Type Alpha Symbol Type Disabled Es Symbol Dimension Peay Enabled Symbol Dimension Size When enabled Symbol Dimensions states the dimensions row value x column value of the mark being evaluated in the verification report output General Separator F ISO Grade Type Alpha Symbol Type Disabled Symbol Dimension Size Disabled Disabled Enabled 3 18 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification ISO IEC 15415 Verification Setup This command allows the user to fine tune lighting and camera settings to comply with ISO IEC 15415 s optical requirements for 2D verification Aperture Definition The physical size of the synthetic aperture that will be applied to the captured symbol image by the Ve
106. 0 Number of Scanning Lines 525 lines 2 1 interlaced Output Analog 1Vp p 75 ohm Communications Protocols Interface RS 232 Ethernet Symbology Data Matrix ECC 0 200 Symbol Verification Parameters Maximum Characters 78 characters plus overhead characters at a 45 angle Verification Standards For Data Matrix AIM DPM ISO IEC 15415 AS9132 Verifier Certification ISO IEC 15426 2 Front 4 40 112 mm 5 05 128 mm Side LAB 00 4 75 121 mm 3 88 99 mm Verifier Dimensions Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Appendices Indicators LEDs Read Performance Power Read Status Network Status Beeper Read Performance Power Read Status Network Status Safety Certifications Designed for FCC CE Qo ea ISO Certification ISO 9001 2000 Issued by TUV USA Inc Member of TUV NORD Group Cert No 06 1080 Product specifications are given for typical performance at 25 C 77 F using grade A symbols Some performance characteristics may vary at high temperatures or other environmental extremes 2007 Microscan Systems Inc Specifications subject to change Quadrus Verifier User s Manual A 3 Electrical Specifications Appendix B Electrical Specifications Power Requirements Inp
107. 02 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Cell Fill Grade and Average Value highlighted below Grade Worst Case and Average Values Cell Fill Output Example symbol_data P 004 003 F 045 057 P 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Cell Fill Grade Worst Case Value and Average Value highlighted below 3 56 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Percentage Failed Cell Fill Definition When enabled reports the percentage of elements that failed Cell Fill evaluation Serial Cmd lt K712 dot center offset percentage failed offset cell fill percentage failed cell fill dot ovality percentage failed ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone grade pixels per element value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Dot Ovality Definition Measures the extent to which round elements deviate from a perfect circle Worst Case Value output shows the quality of the worst element expressed as a percentage of the deviation of the actual dot from the ideal Average Value output shows the average quality of all elements expressed as a percentage of the deviation of the average dot from the ideal For a symbol to achieve a passing grade Dot Ovality must not exceed 20 and no more than 2 of the symbol s dots can exceed 20 ovality Important Dot Ovality is available only if Element Shape is set to Round lt K711 0 gt It cannot evaluate square elements Serial Cmd lt K712 dot
108. 123 the RTF The format JPG or BMP is determined in the Preferences dialog Aperture 0 000 Wavelength 660 nm Firmware Version Serial Number This report was created on Saturday February 04 2006 at 19 54 43 Company X Z Corp Operator J Doe v name Reference data Verifier firmware version Verifier serial number report creation date ESP version company name and operator Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 85 Verification by ESP AS9132 Verification AS9132 Calibration Select AS9132A Calibration on the Reflectance Calibration dialog and click Calibrate AS9132A Reflectance Calibration The Verifier is currently in Standard Click Calibrate AS91324 to perform a calibration To perform a Reflectance Calibration click the ISOAIEC 15415 radio button C ISO AEC 15415 Reflectance Calibration C AIM 7 DPM Report Guidelines Reflectance Calibration Minimum 0 100 0 100 Maximum ai A591324 Calibration Calibrate A591324 Cancel Once calibration is complete AS9132 Verification can be performed and a report generated AS9132 Verification Process Be sure that the candidate symbol as close to the center of the verifier s field of view as possible e When the symbol is in position click the AS9132A Verification button 4591324 Verification The AS9132A Verification Report will appear detailing the symbol s adherence to AS9132 requirements
109. 15 Symbol Quality Serial Cmd Default Options lt K830 grade decode symbol contrast fixed pattern damage axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation unused error correction capacity print growth gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Grade 1 D 2 Grade 2 C 3 Grade 3 B A 4 Grade 4 A Fixed Pattern Damage ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Serial Cmd Default Options lt K830 grade decode symbol contrast fixed pattern damage axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation unused error correction capacity print growth gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Grade 1 2 Grade 2 3 Grade 3 D C B 4 Grade 4 A Axial Non Uniformity ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Serial Cmd Default Options lt K830 grade decode symbol contrast fixed pattern damage axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation unused error correction capacity print growth gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Grade 1 2 Grade 2 3 Grade 3 D C B 4 Grade 4 A Grid Non Uniformity ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Serial Cmd Default Options Quadrus Verifier User s Manual lt K830 grade decode symbol contrast fixed pattern damage axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation unused error correction capacity print growth gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Grade 1 2 Grade 2 3 Grade 3 D C B 4 Grade 4 A
110. 170 77245 1P13269766 1831 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 67 AIM DPM Verification by Serial Command AIM DPM Verification by Serial Command Reflectance Calibration Definition The Reflectance Calibration command initiates a calibration process with the minimum and maximum reflectance values that are already configured in the Verifier Note If the minimum and maximum reflectance values configured in the Verifier correspond with a different calibration symbol the results after calibration may be incorrect SerialCmd lt AIMDPM R min R min gt e Place the calibration symbol provided in the approximate center of the Verifier s field of view before entering the Reflectance Calibration command Place the Calibration Symbol as lt q close to the center of the Verifier s field of view as possible before initiating the Reflectance Calibration process IMPORTANT Keep this card in a safe place It must be saved and kept in good condition as it is the Verifier s most critical setup tool VERIFIER CALIBRATION SYMBOL R MAX XX R MIN XX File Model Options Connect View Terminal Help Verification Autoconnect Switch Model Configuration Camera P Find v Send lt AIMDPM R Max R Min You can use the Terminal in ESP to send serial commands Commands can either be entered in the Send text field or directly in the terminal Importan
111. 2 Symbol Quality Serial Cmd lt K840 dot center offset cell fill dot ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quiet Zone AS9132 Symbol Quality Serial Cmd lt K840 dot center offset cell fill dot ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 8 46 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Diagnostics Output 1 Note When Diagnostic Warning is enabled under Output 1 Parameters Output Mode configuration has no effect Note Output On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Output 1 Parameters Output On Diagnostic Warning Disabled v Over Temperature Disabled Service Unit Disabled B gt HNE External Camera Disconnect Disabled Enabled Usage Alerts user to critical conditions Definition Sets up specific warnings that will cause activation on output 1 The output will remain active as long as one of the diagnostic conditions is met The output will go inactive as soon as it detects no active diagnostic warning Over Temperature Definition Sets the output to toggle to active when an over temperature condition is detected Serial Cmd lt K790 over temp service unit external camera disconnect gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Service Unit Definition Sets the output to toggle to a
112. 2 ita Bete ig T Neel ates Rie ET 7 11 InterleaVed 2 0f S A cies ccs sezeedeodeatencedeacs areae aapea eedi a ae ineke Eina 7 13 UPC EAN idino ieai ii aaa E a Ena 7 16 Ph harmac de 2s n ei ee es 7 19 RSS Expanded isiin tranen Ala ean ee 7 21 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual v Table of Contents RSS EIMICG 2 a a a a A ERE EREE ERER E Ea 7 22 RSS lA eare eos antec she A aE E Ea E EAR 7 23 PDFAT Hise eae a a a a R a TE 7 24 MichOP DFAT aranana a aa a a aE 7 26 COMPOSE a a a a a a T A a 7 27 Narrow Margins 2ecccsse cei oges st tee eezessinessaccseidecsazcesbesshagcastedtausacoasdedenecetpansets 7 28 SYMBOLOGY ID AEE E EEEO T A 7 29 Background Golot Aerea ten aaaea ra a ae sek a E a Ned eee 7 30 Chapter 8 I O Parameters I O Parameters by ESPionniecrninienen i aaea 8 2 I O Parameters Serial Commands cecceeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeseeeteaeeeeeetneeens 8 3 Symbol Data Output rne a evi aut ea a aa raa er rap Eein ERS 8 4 When to Output Symbol Datta ecceeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeseeeennene 8 6 No Read Message isisisi epa au raano Ti piaia ia 8 7 Bad No Symbol Qualification ececceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeenaeens 8 9 Read Duration Output 0 0 0 eeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeseaeeeneersaes 8 16 Output Indicatorsscet suchas aed athe al Shien 8 17 Serial Veriticatlony ic a cite iin aed i athe ade Wade eles 8 20 Video Output e nagana ee a awe Ge aes oe 8 22 Image Outputs sk sais atl
113. 6 parameters Symbol Type ecc200 Element Size 8 5 Pixels 0 009 Symbol Data 13 Symbol data Symbol Image scaled to 328x248 Captured symbol image 45Q Piemvare Version 3 676201 12 sg i Vertier Sertal Mumbar i 0420303 as Reference data Verifier firmware version nesday Novem al ifi H i M Arawa Verifier serial number report creation Company AAA Acme Readers date ESP version company name and Operator Joe Operator a Pang preblig ny oem operator name Note PDF version shown here Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 1 17 Generate and Save Verification Report 1 18 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual es 2 Using ESP Contents VerifiGatiom Ea E E ts ict ee ee NH ee 2 2 Application Modein ieee aon i ee ee 2 3 Merit Too Dats ieciticestiecstidisitectdSies el al ee ee ee E ess need ees 2 4 VIGW EEA EEE E E T EE A A 2 11 Navigating in ESPZ acinacea aa anaa a E E A E Eaa A EE a TE O EE PaE aaa 2 12 Send Receive Options ceeceeeeceeseeceeeeeseeceaeeeeeeeaeseaeeeeecaeeseeseaeesseeseaeseaaeesaeseeeeseaeeseeeseaeeeaees 2 13 This section is designed to help you understand the structure elements and application of ESP When you open ESP unless otherwise specified in the ESP Preferences dialog accessible from the Options heading on the menu toolbar you will enter EZ Mode for initial setup From there you can enter Application Mode App Mode and access several configuration menus Verification Commu
114. 60 Reference data Verifier firmware version ge Verifier serial number report creation date ESP version company name and operator name Aperture 0 000 Wavelength 660nm Angle 45 degrees Firmware Version 35 676201 E2 Verifier Serial Number This report was created on Saturday February 04 2006 at 22 00 33 Software Version 3 2 1 0 Company XYZ Corp Operator J Doe Note See Preferences Tab for information about how to autofit PDF reports to a single page Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 75 Verification by ESP Save Single Capture Verification Report as an HTML File Default Report Type HTML Files htm X CS Files cs Rich Text Edit Files rtf Parameters Reference Decode Symbol Contrast Fixed Pattern Damage Axial Non Uniformity Grid Non Uniformity Modulation Unused ECC If you have already chosen HTML format in the Preferences dialog the report will be saved as an HTML file ISO IEC 15415 Verification Report Symbol data symbol Data Non Graded Parameters Print Growth Symbol Type Symbol Size Pixels Element Results Grade pass a A 71 Vi 4 A eae erification 4 A sor results and __ a grades 4 A 0 06 4 A ae 4 A 84 4 A Final Grade 4 A 123 0 10 MISA Data for non graded LENAS parameters 6i Symbol Image Ima
115. AT 5 22 Response TIMEOUT a a aar occa aa E aaee Aaa ea EEan aiaee deans 5 23 E iOS re e EEEE AAAA AAA ry tela bist ogy hace tavegas coda 5 24 Aux Port System Data Status cece eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeetneeseaeeeneenes 5 25 Chapter 6 Read Cycle Read Gycle by ESPiiiincannediid nevi Rania iene 6 2 Read Cycle Serial COMMANAS cceeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaeeeaeeeeaeeeaeeeneeeaas 6 3 Read Cycle Setup s ncAnneadicea ainda tei nl anaes 6 4 MultiSymb0liwc cceti chin decent an nie ees 6 5 MNNQQGF iiie eerie eevee ee ee ee 6 7 Seral Tiggere aore aia aie avon eel Naa 6 13 End of Read Cycle s i citi eh dine dees aaohin dota ee 6 15 Active Camera is singe hlattiesk ache dink seine andl 6 17 Gaptur Mode isse ati ditions chee E E dace ede at 6 18 Capture TiMingy s3 a Bi ti viel hei ea aoe ea ease 6 23 Dual Camera Switching cecceeseeeseeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeseeseaeteeeseaeeseeenaeees 6 25 Store No Read Image ceeceeecesseeeseeeseeceeeeeeesseeeeaeeseaeseaeessaeeeeeeeetaaes 6 30 Setting Up the Verifier for EZ Trax ecceeceeccceeseeeeeeteeeeeeeesseeeneeeeeeeeaees 6 31 Chapter 7 Symbologies Symbologies by TE sae iat deadies ks TT 7 2 Symbologies Serial COMMANAS ecceeceeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 7 3 Data Matrix aeria ardiena aaa tech a a ae a A E o AEREE ane 7 4 QR Code 40 SEA EE E ett tsk ta 7 6 COS SO haces aches desks E A E E 7 7 COdG Ae katte Me hon Lat AS A irate Ns Bechet Si 7 10 BCAA
116. Aux Port Connections Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Aux Port Settings Network Ethernet ee Decoded symbol data Attribute Value ostamble s i P a er is shown in this table LRC Status Aux Port System Data Status Disabled v For Help press F1 Quadrus Verifier 1 _Quadrus Verifier SSNMEGTEGRINNN Point to Point Comi 115 2K Capture and Decode I Miror Image Click Capture and Decode to read the symbol in the field of view and to see a high resolution image capture of the symbol Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 2 3 Menu Toolbar Menu Toolbar File gt New Whenever New is selected the default configuration of ESP is loaded Open Save When Save or Save As is selected the ESP configuration is saved to the host computer s hard drive and available whenever the same file is selected under Open Important When you save menu changes to your hard drive these changes are not saved to your Verifier The illustration below shows how settings can be saved and received between ESP and the Verifier and ESP and the host hard drive Save to Verifier Vv A Receive Verifier Settings Import Export New Open Save Save As Print Import Export Recent File Exit Ctrl N Ctrl 0 Ctrl 5 Ctrl P Import converts the ASCII settings from a text file to ESP configuration setti
117. B interface 3 An IB 150 Kit interface and cable 4 An Ethernet switch or router RJ45 Ethernet cables use a crossover cable if connecting directly to the host computer 5 A laptop or desktop host computer with Ethernet connectivity to a network Windows Vista XP or 2000 and Microscan s ESP 16 2 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Ethernet Step 2 Preliminary Steps 1 Plug the Ethernet USB interface into the Quadrus Verifier 2 Plug the IB 150 Interface Kit cable into the Ethernet USB interface and make the connection to the host computer and power supply 3 Connect the Ethernet cables from the Ethernet USB interface to the switch or router and from the switch or router to the host computer The green NETWORK STATUS LED should illuminate when the Ethernet cable is connected 4 Start ESP and establish communication with the host computer through the RS 232 host port There are three ways the Quadrus Verifier can connect to a host by Ethernet 1 Assigning a network address 2 Using the Verifier s default IP Address 3 Using DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol assignment Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 16 3 Preliminary Steps Assigning a Network Address This procedure will configure the Verifier to work with the host computer s TCP IP configuration Note This is only a temporary solution The preferred method is to receive IP Address Subnet and Gateway if necessary from your IT department
118. CNTL m CNTL j gt Entering Special Characters in Embedded Menus Control Characters Control characters entered on the command line are displayed in the menu as mnemonic characters such as lt CR gt lt LF gt lt NULL gt lt NULL gt Press SP the space bar once then enter the control character by holding down the control key and simultaneously pressing the desired character For example to define a line feed press SP then Control and J simultaneously It is displayed as J on the command line and as lt LF gt in the menu when the screen is refreshed To Define a Carriage Return as a Character Press SP then CR It is displayed as M on the command line and as lt CR gt in the menu when the screen is refreshed To Define a Space as a Character Press SP twice It is displayed as a blank space in the menu when the screen is refreshed While it appears that nothing has been assigned the hex value 20 will be sent during data transmission To Select NUL as the Character Press SP then a 0 zero It is displayed as NUL in the menu when the screen is refreshed A 16 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Appendix E ASCII Table ASCII Table with Control Characters Appendices Dec Hex Mne Ctrl Dec Hex Ch Dec Hex Ch Dec Hex Ch 00 00 NUL 32 20 SP 64 40 96 60 01 01
119. CSV format in the Preferences dialog the report will be saved as a CSV file Verification CSV output is in a spreadsheet format with all parameters listed in a horizontal orientation Columns A I e Symbol Data Reference Decode Grade e Cell Contrast e Fixed Pattern Damage e Axial Non Uniformity Columns J P e Grid Non Uniformity e Cell Modulation e Unused ECC e Final Grade Columns Q X Print Growth Symbol Type Symbol Size Pixels Per Element Element Size Aperture Wavelength Lighting Columns Y AG Firmware Version Verifier Serial Number Date Time ESP Version Company Operator Ei File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help DEHA 64Y tee Jna D10 M fe Br HG A B c D E F G H l 1 Sym_Data Ref_Dec Cell_Cont Fixed_Pat_Dam Axial_Nu 2 123 PASS 4 A 71 4 A 04 A 4 A File Edit view Insert Format Tools Data Window DERA 6 RY LBE Fla D10 z fe REM N o P 1 Grid_NU Cell_Mod Unused_ECC Final_Grade 2 0 08 4 A 100 4 A 4 A 4 A File Edit view Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Dees 64 te So Br 2h me AF23 v f Q R S T u vV w X 1 Print_Growth Sym_Type Sym_Size Pix_Element Elmt_Size Aperture Wavelength Lighting 2 0 07 ECC200 16x16 10 8 0 010 0x008 660 nm 45Q File Edit view Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Delay hyv lB Sn 4 4 i 43 10 BL Arial AK25 z f i PE AA
120. Certifications Saturation Save Save AIM DPM Verification Report Save AIM DPM Verification Report as a CSV File Save AIM DPM Verification Report as a PDF Save AIM DPM Verification Report as an HTML File Save AIM DPM Verification Report as an RTF Save AS9132 Verification Report Save AS9132 Verification Report as a CSV File Save AS9132 Verification Report as a PDF Save AS9132 Verification Report as an HTML File Save AS9132 Verification Report as an RTF Save Current Settings to Database Save Current Settings to Database by ESP Save Current Text Save for Power On EZ Button Save Multi Capture Verification Report Save Multi Capture Verification Report as a CSV File Save Multi Capture Verification Report as a PDF Save Multi Capture Verification Report as an HTML File Save Multi Capture Verification Report as an RTF Save Single Capture Verification Report Save Single Capture Verification Report as a CSV File Save Single Capture Verification Report as a PDF Save Single Capture Verification Report as an HTML File Save Single Capture Verification Report as an RTF Saved for Power On Saving Scattering Select All 20 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual S Select Communications Protocol Select Model Selecting NUL as the Character Send Send and Save Send and Save as Customer Defaults Send Current Command Send Current View Send ESP Settings to the Reader Send XON with Autoconnect Send No Save Send Receive Options Separator
121. Change Keyboard Macros In this dialog you can first select the function key and then enter your macro keystrokes in the associated key map For example to make Ctrl F5 the keystroke to enable send a trigger character select F5 and then in the Ctrl row enter lt trigger character gt and click OK Then whenever the Ctrl F5 keystroke is pressed the trigger character will start the read cycle Change Font Allows you to modify the font used for decode data received from the Verifier on the Terminal screen Change Echo Font Allows you to modify the font used for command characters typed into the Terminal view Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 2 7 Menu Toolbar Bar Code Options Tab ESP Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced Sizing Information Bar Width 14 Mils B3 Example Default Settings The Bar Code Options dialog allows you to set the size in mils of user created symbols Sizing Information Sets the bar width in thousands of an inch of user created symbols A bar width of 14 is 0 014 inches 2 8 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Using ESP Advanced Tab ESP Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced Auto Syne When entering a view that supports Auto Sync do the following Always Ask Before Auto Syne Occurs C Receive Settings from the Reader C Send ESP Settings to the Reader Do Not Send or Receive Settings V Show Target Pattern During Locate Send XON
122. Definition When set to Disabled there is no effect on operation Reset Counts Usage Primarily used in test mode Can also be used to reset counters daily Definition When set to Reset Counts a transition to the active state of the input will cause the reader to reset the internal counters Unlatch Output Definition This setting is used in combination with any of the three discrete outputs that are in Unlatch Mode 1 A transition to the active state will clear any of the three outputs that were previously latched Active State Input Definition Sets the active level of the input pin Serial Cmd lt K730 input mode active state gt Default Active Off Options 0 Active On same as active closed 1 Active Off same as active open 8 34 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Output 1 Parameters Output 1 Parameters Output On Diagnostic Warning Output State Normally Open Pulse Width 5 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Symbol Quality ISO 15415 Symbol Quality 4591324 Diagnostics Usage This option provides switching to host software to control external devices such as PLCs and relays It is useful for routing and sorting and to prevent mis packaging and mis routing Definition Sets the discrete output functions for specific user selected conditions Output On Output 1 Output 1 Parameters CELTS Mismatch or Noread z Output State Mismatch or Noread Pulse Width
123. Doe F Reference data Verifier firmware version Verifier serial number report creation date ESP version company name and operator name 3 90 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual AIM DPM Verification Reflectance Calibration Verification The Quadrus Verifier comes with a calibration symbol on a card like the one shown below A maximum and minimum reflectance value will be printed at the bottom of the card These are the values you will enter in the Minimum and Maximum spin boxes in the Reflectance Calibration dialog Place the Calibration Symbol as close to the center of the Verifier s field of view as possible before initiating the Reflectance Calibration process Reflectance Calibration IMPORTANT Keep this card in a safe place It is the Verifier s most critical setup tool Please input the reflectance values located on the card and click Calibrate Reflectance VERIFIER CALIBRATION SYMBOL C SOAEC 15415 Reflectance Calibration R MAX XX R MIN XX AlM Z DPM Report Guidelines Reflectance Calibration 10 e a 0 100 Minimum B gt Maximum 85 ms 0 100 C 59132A Calibration When the R min and R min values are entered click Calibrate Reflectance Calibrate Reflectance Cancel
124. Enabled 8 58 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Configuring EZ Trax Output by Serial Command Usage Useful for when you want to configure EZ Trax output using serial commands instead of the EZ Trax graphic interface Definition When EZ Trax output is enabled the Imager will attempt to output all enabled EZ Trax options EZ Trax will not function unless enabled Serial Cmd lt K757 status comm port image mode image format joeg quality object info output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Comm Port Definition Selects the communication port that will be used to transfer image files Serial Cmd lt K757 status comm port image mode image format jpeg quality object info output gt Default Host Options 0 Host 1 Aux 2 USB Host Port Sends output using the current Host Port Aux Port Sends output using the Auxiliary Port USB Sends output using a USB connection Image Mode Definition Determines which read cycle condition triggers image file output Serial Cmd lt K757 status comm port image mode image format joeg quality object info output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 No Read 3 No Read and Good Read 4 Mismatch Good Read Outputs the first Good Read image in the read cycle The image file will immediately follow the symbol data Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 59 Configuring EZ Trax Output No Read Outputs the firs
125. Error Messaging is enabled the Quadrus Verifier sends a message to the host indicating an error every time a bad symbol is read The table below shows examples of error messages Examples of Error Messages Invalid Format gt RS 15 GS 800406141411 AOB9C3D6 RS EOT Header Error message Invalid UII Format Header 01 21 Invalid Al t gt RS 05 GS 0100061414199999 GS 311 AOB9C3DE RS EOT Error message Invalid Al UN 12V 1P S Invalid DI 1 gt 4RS 06 GS 12X077991289 GS 1 P4202435 GS S10936 RSHEOT oe Error message Invalid DI D CAG SER x Invalid TEI gt RS DD GS CAX987654 GS SERMKLJHUIYD RS EOT Bee Error message Invalid TEI Space in Data eee 0040614 1411 AO B9 C3D6 RS EOT Be Qualifier Error message Invalid Al or DI or TEI depending on format in use i Lower Case gt RS 05 GS 800406141411a0B9C3d6 RS EOT Characters Error message Invalid Characters in Data 4 6 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Unique Item Identifiers Examples of Error Messages cont Invalid Characters gt RS 05 GS 800406141411 0B9C3D6 RS EOT Error message Invalid Characters in Data UII Too Long Character limit 78 gt RS 05 GS 80021 2345678911 2345678921 2345678931 234567 8941 2345678951 234567896 1234567897 123456789 RS EOT Error message UII Too Long Part Number Too Long Character limit 32 gt RS
126. Ethernet Configuration lt K125 P address subnet address gatewayadadress P address mode primary TCP port video TCP port gt Preamble lt K141 status oreamble characters gt Postamble lt K142 status oostamble characters gt Response Timeout lt K143 response timeout gt LRC lt K145 status gt Aux Port System Data Status Quadrus Verifier User s Manual lt K146 aux port system data gt RS 232 422 Host Port RS 232 422 Host Port The host port can be configured with RS 232 and RS 422 connections Host Port Connections These settings define the basic transmission speeds and digital standards that ensure common formatting Baud Rate Host Port Usage Can be used to transfer data faster or to match host port settings Definition The rate at which the reader and host transfer data back and forth Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 115 2K Options 0 600 1 1200 2 2400 3 4800 4 9600 5 19 2K 6 38 4K 7 57 6K 8 115 2K Parity Host Port Definition An error detection routine in which one data bit in each character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of 1 bits in the data field is even or odd Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default None Options 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd Stop Bits Host Port Definition One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Serial Cmd l
127. G Quality Object Info Output JPEG Quality E2 Trax Output Comm Port Image Mode Image Format JPEG Quality Object Info Output Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Enabled Compressed 30 Disabled Enabled Host Disabled Disabled Host Both Noread and Good Read 7 Disabled Good Read Noread VO Parameters When EZ Trax output is enabled the Imager will attempt to output all enabled EZ Trax options EZ Trax will not function unless enabled Selects the communication port that will be used to transfer image files Determines which read cycle condition triggers image file Both Noread and Good Read output Enabled Host Disabled Compressed Lossless Compressed Enabled Host Disabled Selects the format of the image output file ed 1 100 a Disabled Sets the amount of JPEG image compression A value of 1 represents the highest compression and lowest image quality and 100 represents the lowest compression and highest image quality 8 57 Configuring EZ Trax Output Object Info Output EZ Trax Output Enabled Comm Port Hast Image Mode Disabled Image Format Compressed If a symbol is decoded during JPEG Quality 90 an image capture the symbol Obiect Info O 7 lt q type and other supplementary ea E Disabled symbol information is also Disabled included
128. H SYMBOL TYPE ECC268 SYMBOL SIZE 16x18 ELEMENT SIZE 6 618 PIXELS ELEMENT 18 4 SYMBOL DATA Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 69 Verification by ESP Verification by ESP The Quadrus Verifier s verification functionality can be controlled using ESP s graphic interfaces and tree controls Report Tab The Report tab allows the user to initiate ISO IEC 15415 Verification AS9132 Verification and AIM DPM Verification Verification reports appear in the viewing area underneath the verification buttons To save the report as a PDF file an HTML file a CSV file or an RTF file click the Save Report button ESP ESP Untitled File Model Options Connect Help gt eia The Verification user interface is ae Bo divided into three sections Report App Mode Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model Settin gs an d Preferences i i Report Settings Preferences l Welcome to Easy Setup Program ISOAEC 15415 4591324 Verification AIM DPM Quality Guideline 1 The first step before grading a Lee gt gt symbol is to place the calibrated Save Report Illumination i finner and outer rings x symbol in the center of the field of view FOV The reference decode algorithm generates an l Locale Calibrate initial threshold based on what is located in the center of the FOV Use this dropdown menu to set LED illumination characteristics Click Locate to begin Locate and Calibra
129. I Format DD concatenated UII D987654MKLJHUIYD 4 8 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual UII Parsing Unique Item Identifiers When UII Parsing is enabled and a UII mark is verified the verification report shows the concatenated UII as well as the elements of the raw decoded symbol data If the symbol does not contain a valid UII an error message will appear To enable Ull Parsing click the Enable UII Parsing box at the bottom of the Preferences view UII Elements V Enable UII Parsing The raw data string concatenated UII and the parsed Ull elements are shown at the bottom half of the verification report MICROSCAN EE Raw data string UII Format P N 1P S N S IAC EID 17V Symbol Data _ D77245132097661031 lt gt 06 17V77245 1P13209766 S1031 0 DI q Data Qualifier Format 13209766 lt Concatenated Ull 1031 _ _ ___ Serial number De Issuing Agency Code 77245 Part number t Enterprise Identifier Quadrus Verifier User s Manual UII Parsing 4 10 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual es i eader Setup The Quadrus Verifier is equipped with a full feature set that enables it to be used as a reader in a wide variety of applications The following sections describe how to set up and
130. II character or an external trigger pulse to start the read cycle Serial Cmd lt K200 5 gt Note In Serial Data or External Edge sending a non delimited start serial character will start a read cycle however a non delimited stop serial character has no effect Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 6 11 Trigger Trigger Filter Duration Usage Trigger Filter Duration can be used to help the unit trigger more consistently with an unstable external trigger Definition Trigger Filter Duration can prevent trigger bounce from falsely triggering the reader by limiting the time during which trigger pulses can be received Serial Cmd lt K200 trigger mode trigger filter duration gt Default 313 x 32us 10 24mS Options 0 to 65535 corresponding to 0 to 2 097 seconds in 32us steps If the unit is in External Edge trigger mode then Trigger Filter Duration specifies the time following an edge that the reader will not consider another edge as a valid trigger If the unit is in External Level mode then Trigger Filter Duration specifies the time following the active edge that the trigger must be sampled once again as active before considering it a valid level trigger External Trigger State Usage Allows users to select the trigger state that will operate with their systems If using an object detector use Active Off Definition When enabled for Active On lon the triggering device imposes a current on the optoisolator to activate the
131. If an IP Address has been assigned to the Verifier by your IT department the preferred method skip steps 1 3 below 1 16 4 Determine the host computer s IP Address on the host s network Go to the Windows Start menu select Run type command and press Enter a On computers running a Windows2000 operating system type ipconfig at the command prompt Add 1 to the last decimal value of the host computer s IP Address This will be the address that you assign to the Verifier For example if the host computer s address is 123 234 1 25 the Verifier s address will be 123 234 1 26 To be sure that the new IP Address is available go back to the command prompt and type ping Verifier IP Address For example ping 123 234 1 26 If the ping program responds with a Request timed out message then the IP Address can probably be used temporarily If you receive a Reply message then that address has already been assigned to another device and you need to contact your IT department for an available IP Address Send a Receive Reader Settings command From ESP s Communications menu enter your Verifier s new IP Address For example 123 234 1 26 Save this to the Verifier The Verifier now has an IP Address 5 Network that will allow communication with the Ethernet host computer In ESP s Communications IP Address 123 234 1 26 menu you will see the view shown at Sibna 255 255 255 0 right Gate
132. MICROSCAN Quadrus Verifier User s Manual P N 83 006702 Rev C Copyright and Disclaimer Copyright 2007 by Microscan Systems Inc 1201 S W 7th Street Renton Washington U S A 98057 425 226 5700 FAX 425 226 8682 ISO 9001 2000 Certification No 06 1080 Issued by T V USA All rights reserved The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and or service Microscan manufactured equipment and is not to be released reproduced or used for any other purpose without written permission of Microscan Throughout this manual trademarked names might be used Rather than put a trademark symbol in every occurrence of a trademarked name we state herein that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion and to the benefit of the trademark owner with no intention of infringement Disclaimer The information and specifications described in this manual are subject to change without notice Latest Manual Version For the latest version of this manual see the Download page on our web site at www microscan com For technical support email helpdesk microscan com Microscan Systems Inc 1201 S W 7th Street Renton WA 98057 U S A Tel 425 226 5700 Fax 425 226 8250 helpdesk microscan com Microscan Europe Tel 31 172 423360 Fax 31 172 423366 Microscan Asia Pacific R O Tel 65 6846 1214 Fax 65 6846 4641 ii Quadrus Verifier Us
133. Offset Worst Case and Average Values Dot Ovality Worst Case Value Cell Fill Worst Case Value Dot Center Offset Worst Case Value Dot Ovality Y Y Modem Download Transfer Options Y Modem Upload Transfer Options 26 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual
134. One element PASS as Contrast gt 20 96 N A Verification results and Cell Fill Size 60 lt size lt 105 95 avg 0 failed PASS pass fail Dot Ovality Shape lt 20 3 avg 0 failed PASS grades Dot Center 1 Offset Spacina lt 20 5 avg 0 failed PASS Angle of Distortion lt 7 Degrees 0 90 degree PASS Symbol Type Ecc200 Ecc200 PASS Non Graded Parameters Matrix Size 16x16 Data for non graded Pixels Element 10 2 parameters Symbol data ___ symbol pata _ 123 Symbol Image Image scaled to 480x360 Reference data Verifier firmware version Verifier serial number report creation date ESP version company name and operator name Captured symbol image Firmware Version 35 676201 E2 Verifier Serial Number This report was created on Saturday February 04 2006 at 21 35 19 Software Version 3 2 1 0 Company XYZ Corp Operator J Doe 3 88 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Save AS9132 Verification Report as a CSV File Default Report Type csv Files cs v v PDF Files pdf HTML Files htm CS Files csv Rich Text Edit Files rtf If you have already chosen CSV format in the Preferences dialog the report will be saved as a CSV file CSV output is in a spreadsheet format with all parameters listed in a horizontal orientation Columns A G Symbol Data Ma
135. Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 7 7 Code 39 Large Intercharacter Gap Code 39 Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Large Intercharacter Gap is helpful for reading symbols that are printed out of specification Caution Do not use Large Intercharacter Gap with Narrow Margins enabled since a large intercharacter gap over 3x could cause a narrow margins 5x to be interpreted as an intercharacter gap When enabled the reader can read symbols with gaps between symbol characters that exceed three times 3x the narrow element width lt K470 status check digit status check digit output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 39 Definition Serial Cmd Default Options When enabled the reader will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length would be considered a valid symbol lt K470 status check digit status check digit output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Code 39 Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 7 8 Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Specifies the exact nu
136. Output by ESP cece eeceeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeesaeeseaeeeaeeseeeseaeeseeeeaeeeneeeaee 3 17 ISO IEC 15415 Verification Setup cceeeceeceeseeceeeeteeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeaeesaeesseeeaeeseaeeseaessaeetaeeeeeeaees 3 19 ISO IEC 15415 Verification Setup by ESP cee eeceseeeeeeceeeeeneeseeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseeseaeesneeteaeeseeeenaees 3 21 ISOAEC 15415 Serial Outputs vient oe anaemia agai malin dangled 3 23 ISO IEC 15415 Output by ESP een ea Sao coal iden eed ts Meats cts leeds ae iven aa aoa eens 3 33 AIM DPM Verification Setups sirier erore inaa eea aaa a aa Ea eiS 3 40 AIM DPM Verification Setup by ESP ssessseseeeeseeeeeseeeereeinetnetreetnstnntrnttnttnetnntnnenntnntentnnetnneenenn 3 42 ISO IEC 15415 Verification by Serial Command eecceeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeesneeeteeteaeettees 3 44 AS9132 JES 131 Marking Method 0 ccceecceesceeseteneeeseeseaeeeseeeeaeeeaeeceeseaeesaaeseaeeeaeesaeseeeteaeesas 3 49 AS9132 JES 131 Marking Method by ESP ssssseseesessieesesrsereerrsrerisrrnstnntintinetnntnnntnstnntnneennennen 3 51 AS9132 Serial Output ni ida ee ek Ls eee tein a ee oe 3 53 AS9132 Output by ESP ic dcr eases LE ath eaten a r a a a ek hand 3 62 AS9132 Verification by Serial Command cee ceeccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeeseaeeseeeteaeesas 3 67 AIM DPM Verification by Serial COMMANG eecceeceeeceeeneeeeeeeeaeeeneeseeeeeeeteaeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeatees 3 68 Verification by ESR irivaci
137. Outputs Power ground Non lsolated Verifier Power Scanner Output Outputs Outputs Power ground Host 1 to 28 V Input Host 1 to 28 V Electrical Specifications Additional Isolated Output Circuit Examples Secondary Relay 1to28V RELAY Isolated Verifier Power Scanner Outputs Output Outputs Power ground Isolated Verifier Scanner Power Outputs Outputs PLC PLC Input PLC Power ground GND v Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Appendices Optoisolator Inputs All discrete inputs can be fully isolated pulses as PNP or NPN circuits Inputs include Trigger New Master and Input 1 Generic Waveform Characteristics Minimum Maximum VIN HIGH IIN HIGH 4 5V 4mA 28V 12mA VIN LOW IIN LOW 0V OmA 2V 2mA Pulse Width min 48 uS Input Examples Fully Optoisolated PNP Source Isolated Verifier NPN Source Isolated Verifier Signal Not Optoisolated Non lsolated Verifier PNP Source Non lsolated Verifier NPN Source Quaarus Verifier User s Manual A 7 Connectivity Accessories Appendix C Connectivity Accessories Three interface options are available for Verifier connectivity IB 150 Kit The IB 150 Interface Kit links the Verifier to the host power supply trigger and au
138. Rotation fo Degrees v New new symbol Caption a Set a human Same As Bar Code Value readable caption for the symbol m _ that matches the Specify encoded data or write your own caption Add start configuration code F Add end configuration code Save Settings Differences from Default Settings The symbol you create will be displayed in the field at the bottom of the Bar Code Dialog Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 2 11 Navigating in ESP Navigating in ESP To change Verifier settings or to access the Configuration Camera Terminal Utilities or Output Format views click the App Mode button J App Mode To return to Verification click the Verification button verification To make changes to configuration settings in the control trees Open or close the full contents of a control tree by holding down the Alt key and single clicking here Parameters Camera Setup B Camera mares i e X denotes the Illumination Source default option setting Region of Interest e Left click on the to expand Image Processing Settings MENM NENS Reference Decode Algorithm Standard Mode 1 e Double click the desired parameter and single Mode 2 click in the selection box to view options Mode 3 e Place your cursor in the selection box scroll Mode 4
139. S 131 Dot Center Offset Percentage Failed Offset Cell Fill Percentage Failed Cell Fill Dot Ovality Percentage Failed Ovality Angle of Distortion Symbol Contrast Quiet Zone Grade Pixels Per Element Disabled Disabled yl Round Inkjet Dot Peen Disabled Grade and Worst Cas Grade and Average Grade and Both Disabled Disabled Percentage Failed Offset When enabled reports the percentage of dots that failed Dot Center Offset evaluation 4591324 Parameters Element Shape Marking Method JES 131 Dot Center Offset Percentage Failed Offset Cell Fill Percentage Failed Cell Fill Dot Ovality Percentage Failed Ovality Angle of Distortion Symbol Contrast Quiet Zone Grade Pixels Per Element 3 62 Round Inkjet Dot Peen Disabled Disabled Disabled ka Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Cell Fill Measures the percentage of the ideal cell size that the module or element fills Worst Case Value output shows the quality of the worst element expressed as a percentage of the ideal cell size filled by that particular element Average Value output shows the average quality of all elements expressed as a percentage of the ideal cell size filled by the average element 4591324 Parameters Element Shape Round Marking Method Inkjet Dot Peen JES 131 Disabled Dot Center Offset Disab
140. SOH A 33 21 65 41 A 97 61 a 02 02 STX B 34 22 7 66 42 B 98 62 b 03 03 ETX C 35 23 67 43 C 99 63 c 04 04 EOT D 36 24 68 44 D 100 64 d 05 05 ENQ E 37 25 69 45 E 101 65 e 06 06 ACK AF 38 26 amp 70 46 F 102 66 f 07 07 BEL G 39 27 i 71 47 G 103 67 g 08 08 BS H 40 28 72 48 H 104 68 h 09 09 HT 41 29 73 49 105 69 i 10 0A LF J 42 2A x 74 4A J 106 6A j 11 0B VT MK 43 2B 75 4B K 107 6B k 12 0C FF AL 44 2C 76 4C L 108 6C 13 oD CR M 45 2D 77 4D M 109 6D m 14 OE SO N 46 2E 3 78 4E N 110 6E n 15 OF SI O 47 2F 79 4F O 111 6F 0 16 10 DLE P 48 30 0 80 50 P 112 70 p 17 11 DC1 Q 49 31 1 81 51 Q 113 71 q 18 12 DC2 AR 50 32 2 82 52 R 114 72 r 19 13 DC3 SS 51 33 3 83 53 S 115 73 s 20 14 DC4 AT 52 34 4 84 54 T 116 74 t 21 15 NAK U 53 35 5 85 55 U 117 75 u 22 16 SYN AV 54 36 6 86 56 V 118 76 v 23 17 ETB AW 55 37 7 87 57 W 119 77 w 24 18 CAN X 56 38 8 88 58 X 120 78 x 25 19 EM AY 57 39 9 89 59 Y 121 79 y 26 1A SUB AZ 58 3A 90 5A Z 122 7A Zz 27 1B ESC AT 59 3B 91 5B 123 7B 28 1C FS A 60 3C lt 92 5C 124 7C 29 1D GS 61 3D 93 5D 125 7D 30 1E RS ae 62 3E gt 94 5E A 126 7E 31 1F US A 63 3F 95 5F a 127 7F D Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual A 17 ASCII Table Communication Protocol Commands Protocol Command Control Characters Hex Mnemonic displayed on Entered in menu or Value Effect of Command Microscan menu serial command RES D 04 Reset
141. Startup Toolbar Style l Reload Last File Show Both Icon and Text MV Show Model Prompt Only Show Icon M Show Connect Prompt C Only Show Text Receive After Connect Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults Default Settings Reload Last File At startup reloads the last file saved to the host computer s hard drive Show Model Prompt At startup remembers the last connected model and displays it in the Connecting dialog whenever you attempt to connect Show Connect Prompt At startup displays the Would you like to connect prompt Receive After Connect At startup loads the Verifier s settings into ESP This is not recommended if you want to preserve your ESP settings for future use Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults At startup enables the Send and Save as Customer Defaults option in the Send Recv command 2 6 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Using ESP Terminal Tab ESP Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced F Show Non Printable Characters Default Format Fast poy ee Enhanced Format Slower Enable Echo Change Keyboard Macros Blue Background Color iv Display Incoming Data Even When Not in Focus Default Settings When Show Non Printable Characters is checked characters such as CRLF will be displayed in the Terminal window When Enhanced Format is checked the characters are displayed with more detailed formatting
142. TD 130M Change 1 Minimum Element Size Minimum Number of Bars Minimum Number of Bars Pharmacode Minimum Number of Qualified Scan Lines Mirrored Image Mismatch Mismatch Green Flash Mismatch Counter Mismatch Counter Reset Mismatch Replace Model Model Memo Modulation Modulation ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Modulation ISO IEC 15415 Modulation Grade Mounting the Quadrus Verifier in an Application Environment 14 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual N Multi Capture Multi Capture Sequence Multi Capture Verification Process Multi Capture Verification Report Multidrop Multiple Symbols in Fast Linear Mode Multisymbol Multisymbol Separator N Narrow Margin Status Narrow Margins Navigating in ESP Network Network Destination Network Protocols Supported New Master Pin New Model New Trigger No Read Counter No Read Counter Reset No Read Message No Read Message Mode No Symbol Message Noise Non UI Characters Non UII Characters in a Data String Normally Closed Normally Open Not Optoisolated Input Not Optoisolated Verifier Grounded Output Notes on Triggered Capture Mode Number of Active Database Settings Number of Active Database Settings by ESP Number of Captures Number of External Camera Captures Number of Internal Camera Captures Number of Symbols Number of Triggers Trend Analysis Number to Output On Trend Analysis Numeric ISO Grade Type O Object Detector Quaadr
143. Tab Terminal Window Terminal Window Menus Test Video Capture TFTP Server Three Beeps Position 3 Threshold Threshold Histogram Threshold Mode Threshold Value Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Index 23 U Thresholding Time Before First Capture Time Between Captures Time Delay Between Captures Timed Capture Timeout Timeout or New Trigger Top Row Pointer Trailer Character Transparent Aux Port Mode Trend Analysis Output 1 Trend Analysis Output 2 Trend Analysis Output 3 Trend Analysis Mode Trend Analysis Trend Analysis to Output 3 Trigger Trigger 4 pin Connector Trigger Counter Trigger Counter Reset Trigger Edge Trigger Filter Duration Trigger Image Mode Video Output Trigger Level Trigger Mode Triggered Capture Triggered Captures Typical Triggered Video Output Two Beeps Position 2 Two Dimensional Symbologies Two Dimensional Symbology Qualification U UII UII Constructs UII Disabled by Serial Command UII Elements UII Enabled with Error Messaging and Pass Through UII Enabled with Pass Through UII Enabled with Pass Through by Serial Command UII Mode by ESP UII Mode by Serial Command UII Mode Error Messaging by Serial Command UII Mode Features UII Parsing 24 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual V UII Too Long Ull Only Enabled Ull Only Enabled by Serial Command Ull Only Enabled with Error Messaging Unique Item Identifier Unique Item Ident
144. UARE REQUIREMENT FAIL IF 2 OF PARAMETER PER ELEMENT RESULTS ELEMENTS FAIL PASS FAIL QUIET ZONE gt One element PASS CONTRAST gt 28 85 x PASS CELL FILL SIZE 60 lt size lt 105 161 z PASS ANGLE OF DISTORTION lt 7 Degrees 8 13 degree PASS SYMBOL TYPE ECC268 Ecc268 PASS MATRIX SIZE 18x18 ELEMENT SIZE 6 618 PIXELS ELEMENT 18 4 SYMBOL DATA AIM DPM Verification Results The AIM DPM results show data concerning reference decode algorithm cell contrast fixed pattern damage axial and grid non uniformity cell modulation unused error correction capacity minimum reflectance print growth symbol type symbol size element size and pixels per element All but the last five parameters are given a numeric and alphabetical grade DPM74 07157660745Q REFERENCE DECODE CELL CONTRAST FIXED PATTERN DAMAGE AXIAL NON UNIFORMITY GRID NON UNIFORMITY CELL MODULATION UNUSED ECC MINIMUM REFLECTANCE FINAL GRADE NON GRADED PARAMETERS PRINT GROWTH SYMBOL TYPE ECC268 SYMBOL SIZE 16x16 ELEMENT SIZE 6 618 PIXELS ELEMENT 18 4 SYMBOL DATA Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 1 13 Generate and Save Verification Report Step 11 Generate and Save Verification Report To generate a report containing your verification results click the Save Report button Save Report The Grade Report Options dialog will appear unless you have disabled it in the Preferences dialog A
145. Verification Process AS9132 Verification Report AS9132 Verification Results AS9132 JES 131 Marking Method AS9132 JES 131 Marking Method by ESP ASCII Table ASCII Table with Control Characters ASIC Aspect Ratio Assigning a Network Address Auto Sync Aux Port System Data Status Auxiliary Port Auxiliary Port Connections Auxiliary Port Mode Average Value Cell Fill Average Value Dot Center Offset Average Value Dot Ovality Axial Non Uniformity Axial Non Uniformity AIM DPM Axial Non Uniformity ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Axial Non Uniformity ISO IEC 15415 B Background Color Bad Symbol Message Bad Symbol No Symbol Qualification Bar Code Configuration Bar Code Dialog Bar Code Options Tab Bar Width Status Pharmacode Baud Rate Baud Rate Aux Port Baud Rate Host Port BC412 2 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual C Beeper Begin Transmission Binarized Image Binary Frames Blooming C Calculating Number of Captures in a Rapid Capture Application Calibrate Calibrate by Serial Command Calibrate Reflectance Camera Camera Setup Camera Setup by ESP Camera Setup Serial Commands Capture Capture and Decode Capture Mode Capture Timing CCD Cell Contrast AIM DPM Cell Fill Cell Fill AS9132 Symbol Quality Cell Fill AS9132 Cell Modulation AIM DPM Change Background Color Change Echo Font Change Font Change Keyboard Macros Check Digit Check Digit Output BC412 Chec
146. Video Output Usage Useful for remote visual confirmation and review of images Definition Configures the operation of video output of RS170 standard video monitors Video source is configured video via the Active Camera command Output lt K240 gt The video output can be confined to a single event such as a good read or can be fed as continuous live video Video Output Status Serial Cmd lt K760 video output status trigger image mode image frame gt Default Live Real Time Options 0 Disabled 1 Triggered 2 Live Real Time Disabled When selected the video output is disabled Triggered Usage Ideal for dynamic applications Definition Outputs specific capture to the video output port as per the setting in Trigger Image Mode Live Real Time Note Whenever the Locate mode target pattern is activated by the EZ button Live video will automatically be enabled Usage Live output is useful during initial setup in locating symbols in the field of view in real time Definition The video output is configured for a real time operating mode and is refreshed with every video frame If used in conjunction with Dual Camera mode video will only output from the internal camera Note When Live video mode is active in order to synchronize with the video format a shutter time of 1 1000 is the slowest shutter speed setting that can be applied to the camera settings Slower shutter speeds will disable the video o
147. a aie aa iah 2 3 Menus Rola oE i A E AEE T T 2 4 A AATE A E E A T 2 11 Navigating in ESP r Eisi aaa a a ee a a aai 2 12 Send Receive Options cccesceescececeeeseeteeeeeseeeseeceeeseaeeeneeseeeeneeeeeess 2 13 Chapter 3 Verification Verification Serial COMMAMNAS eecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeteaeeeeeeeeateeeeeeeeeeeaees 3 2 Verification Operational COMMANAS eeccceeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeteneeseeeteeeeaees 3 2 Overview Of Verification eeceeeceseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeseeeeeeeseaeeerenaas 3 3 ISO IEC 15415 Evaluation Parameters c cecceeseeeeeeeeeeeneseneeeeeeeeetens 3 5 AS9132 Evaluation Parameters ecceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeteaeeeeeenneees 3 7 AIM DPM Evaluation ParameterS ccssceeessreeeeceeteneeessneeeeeneeereeees 3 10 General Verification Serial OUtOUt ee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeetaeeeeeeee 3 12 General Verification Output by ESP eeceeeceeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeteeeeneeee 3 17 ISO IEC 15415 Verification Setup 2 0 eeecceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeseeeeeneeeaees 3 19 ISO IEC 15415 Verification Setup by ESP ou eeceeeeeeeeeseeeteeeeeeteees 3 21 ISO IEC 15415 Serial Output oe eee ceee eee eeeeeeeneeteeeeeaeeteeeteeeeeeeenaees 3 23 ISO IEC 15415 Output by ESP 0 00 eeceeeeceeneeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeneetaees 3 33 AIM DPM Verification Setup eceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeaees 3 40 AIM DPM Verification Setup by ESP ou eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
148. a request for the boot code part number the Verifier returns lt b BOOT_P N gt When you send lt p gt a request for profile module part numbers the Verifier returns lt p PROFILE_P N gt 14 14 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Utilities Request Checksum You can send a request to the Verifier for part numbers checksums boot code and application code By ESP You can access Checksum from the Utilities menu 1 Click the Firmware tab 2 From the pulldown selection box to the left of the Request Checksum button make your selection 3 Select the code type to see its checksum displayed in the text field to the right of the Request Checksum button Firmware Verification App Code v Request Part No 35 634001 E7 2 App Code Request Checksum 9070 By Serial Command When you send lt gt a request for all available firmware checksums the Verifier returns lt b BOOT_CHECKSUM gt lt a APP_CHECKSUM gt lt p PROFILE_CHECKSUM gt When you send lt a gt a request for the application code checksum the Verifier returns lt a APP_CHECKSUM gt When you send lt b gt a request for the boot code checksum the Verifier returns lt b BOOT_CHECKSUM gt When you send lt p gt a request for profile module checksum the Verifier returns lt p PROFILE_CHECKSUM gt Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 14 15 Bar Code Configuration Bar Code Configuration Definition Bar code configuration is
149. a way of programming the reader by using Data Matrix ECC 200 symbols Serial Cmd lt BCCFG gt Bar code configuration can be entered three different ways 1 By forcing the reader into bar code configuration mode by serial command lt BCCFG gt 2 By configuring one of the 4 EZ button positions to Bar Code Configuration Mode 3 By reading a Data Matrix symbol with a special codeword used by ISO IEC 15415 to signify reader programming This can be either in a regular read cycle or in read rate routine Reading this symbol in the calibration routine will have no effect Once Bar Code Configuration mode has been entered the Data Matrix symbols can be thought of as serial data You can configure the reader by printing labels in Microscan s serial command format Commands are processed as if the data were streamed in through the serial port The reader will acknowledge the symbol with a beep green flash and echo the serial data to the host If the command causes the reader to produce more serial output such as serial verification or counter requests the data will be routed to the host port The Bar Code Configuration mode can be exited by any reset lt A gt or lt Z gt command as well as a lt J gt or a quick press and release of the EZ button The command to exit bar code configuration can be included as part of the bar code for example encoding lt K200 4 gt lt K220 1 gt lt J gt into a Data Matrix symbol This would configure the
150. accept data from other devices Used only with RS 232 Definition This option enables the host to send the XON and XOFF command as a single byte transmission command of start Q or stop S Serial Cmd lt K140 1 gt Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 5 5 RS 232 422 Host Port Point to Point with RTS CTS Usage Definition Serial Cmd A reader initiates a data transfer with an RTS request to send transmission The host when ready responds with a CTS clear to send and the data is transmitted CTS and RTS signals are transmitted over two dedicated wires as defined in the RS 232 standard Used only with RS 232 Point to Point with RTS CTS request to send clear to send is a simple hardware handshaking protocol that allows a reader to initiate data transfers to the host lt K140 2 gt Point to Point with RTS CTS and XON XOFF Usage Definition Serial Cmd Used only with RS 232 This option is a combination of Point to Point with RTS CTS and Point to Point with XON XOFF lt K140 3 gt Polling Mode D Usage Definition Serial Cmd When in Polling Mode D an address of 1 is automatically displayed on the configuration menu However during transmission a 1C hex poll address FS and a 1D hex select address GS are substituted for the 1 Like Point to Point Polling Mode D requires a dedicated connection to the host but unlike Point to Point it requires an address and must wait for a p
151. ad Cycle Usage End of Read Cycle is useful in timing based systems in which the host is not ready to accept data at the time it is decoded Definition Enabling End of Read Cycle means that symbol data does not get sent to the host until the read cycle ends with a timeout or new trigger Start of read cycle End of read cycle Read cycle duration Host activates trigger This is when host expects output Read Cycle 8 6 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters No Read Message Usage Used in applications where the host needs serial verification that a symbol has not been read and especially useful in new print verification Definition When enabled and if no symbol has been decoded before timeout or the end of the read cycle the No Read message will be transmitted to the host No Read Message Mode Serial Cmd lt K714 no read message status no read message gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Detailed No Read Message Disabled No message is output when a No Read condition occurs Enabled The user defined No Read message is output whenever a No Read condition occurs Detailed No Read Message Important In the case where the conditions set in Bad No Symbol Qualification are met then the Bad Symbol or No Symbol message output will override the No Read Message or the Detailed No Read Message if either is enabled Usage Use this option to cover more detailed reasons for decode failures Def
152. ade Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled Marking Method The marking method used to create the symbol inkjet dot peen laser or electro chemical etch etc Choice of Marking Method setting should be based on the method used to create the symbol being verified 4591324 Parameters Element Shape Round Marking Method Inkjet Dot Peer JES 131 Inkjet Dot Peen Dot Center Offset Laser or Chemical Percentage Failed Offset Disabled Cell Fill Disabled Percentage Failed Cell Fill Disabled Dot Ovality Disabled Percentage Failed Ovality Disabled Angle of Distortion Disabled Symbol Contrast Disabled Quiet Zone Grade Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 51 AS9132 JES 131 Marking Method by ESP JES 131 When enabled sets verification parameters to the JES 131 specification rather than the AS9132 specification JES 131 specifies a Cell Fill upper threshold of 110 instead of AS9132 s 105 JES 131 verification reports will display the heading JES 131 Verification Report 4591324 Parameters 3 52 Element Shape Marking Method HES ou Dot Center Offset Percentage Failed Offset Cell Fill Percentage Failed Cell Fill Dot Ovality Percentage Failed Ovality Angle of Distortion Symbol Contrast Quiet Zone Grade Pixels Per Element Round Inkjet Dot Peen Disabled i Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Q
153. ader can be set to wait indefinitely by setting Response Timeout to zero Definition Time the reader will wait before timing out if ACK NAK and ETX are enabled and a host response is expected Serial Cmd lt K143 response timeout gt Default 2 in 10mS increments 20mS Options 0 to 255 A zero 0 setting causes an indefinite wait Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 5 23 LRC Status LRC Status Longitudinal Redundancy Check Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 5 24 Used when extra data integrity is required An error checking routine that verifies the accuracy of transmissions It is the exclusive OR of all characters following the STX start of text up to and including the ETX end of text What this means is that the binary representation of all the characters in a transmissions are cumulatively added in a column and each resulting odd integer is assigned a 1 and each even integer a 0 two 1s 0 two Os 0 a 1 anda 0 1 The extra LRC character is then appended to the transmission and the receiver usually the host performs the same addition and compares the results lt K145 status gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Communications Aux Port System Data Status Definition When enabled directs data from the reader to the auxiliary port Serial Cmd lt K146 aux port system data gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus
154. aders to a host and that relays commands from the host to the readers or other devices Counter Memory space provided to keep track of reader events Daisy Chain Linkage of master and secondary readers to allow data to be relayed up to the host via auxiliary port connections Data Matrix A 2D matrix symbology consisting of dark and light square modules or elements within an L shaped finder pattern Decode A good read The successful scanning and decoding of the information encoded in a symbol Default Restores ROM or flash settings initializes serial commands and resets all counters Delimited Bracketed by pre defined characters Decode Rate The number of good reads per second achieved by the reader Dark Field Illumination Lighting of objects surfaces or particles at very shallow or low angles so that light does not directly enter the reader s optics Depth of Field The range of an imaging system as measured by the nearest distance to the farthest distance that an object in the field of view remains in focus Diffused Lighting Scattered soft lighting from a wide variety of angles used to eliminate shadows and specular interference from highly reflective surfaces Digital to Analog Converter DAC A VLSI circuit used to convert digitally processed images to analog for display on a monitor Digital Imaging Conversion of a video image to pixels by means of an analog to digital converter where the leve
155. adrus Verifier User s Manual Output Format Output Format Status Definition This is a global enable disable parameter In order to use formatting you must set up the format using the insert and extract commands and you must also assign a symbol to format using the Format Assign command Serial Cmd lt K743 output format status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Output Format Status Disabled When Format Status is set to Disabled output formatting is globally disabled Output Format Status Enabled When Format Status is set to Enabled output formatting is enabled However Format Assign Format Insert and Format Extract must be properly set up as well Output Format Status by ESP On the Output Format tab check the Enable Output Format box Ordered Output Output Format BV Enable Output Format V Auto Syne with Reader Set Number of Symbols h Output Phrase Preamble Symbol 1 Postamble ae CAE V Enable V Parse M Enable Parse Symbols Send and Save Receive Show Parse Table Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 15 3 Format Assign Format Assign Symbol Number Definition Symbol Number refers to the number of the symbol to which output formatting will apply For example if you wish to enable user defined formatting to symbol 2 in a multisymbol read cycle you would send the command lt K742 2 1 gt Note that the number of symbols may exceed the format capab
156. adrus Verifier requires regular maintenance and calibration to ensure reliable and accurate operation over time How often does the Verifier need to be re calibrated re certified Microscan recommends that the Quadrus Verifier be re calibrated and re certified once every year Important Even if the Verifier has not been used during the first year of ownership it should still be sent to Microscan for re calibration one year from the date of original factory calibration What is the process for Verifier re calibration re certification Schedule a return under the SRO Service Return Order process Contact the Microscan Service Department at 425 226 5700 to initiate the SRO process 3 4 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification ISO IEC 15415 Evaluation Parameters Symbol Contrast Symbol Contrast is the value difference between light and dark symbol elements and between the quiet zone and perimeter elements This example shows a low contrast symbol The light and dark elements are too close in value which undermines readability Fixed Pattern Damage ee ag Fixed Pattern Damage refers to finder pattern and clock pattern damage lt q Notice the missing elements in the clock pattern and the damaged L pattern in the example symbol Axial Non Uniformity is the amount of deviation along the symbol s major axes In this example the symbol s Y axis dimension is clearly greater than its X axis dimension
157. age Allows user to send configuration from the Host port or the auxiliary port Definition When enabled Command Processing allows commands to be entered via the aux port and direct externally triggered read cycle data in one of two ways 1 Bar code data including the serial trigger if used will be transmitted to the last port from which a command was sent 2 If the last command came from the host port then externally triggered read cycle data will only be output to the host port Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain ID status daisy chain ID gt Options 5 Command Processing Daisy Chain ID Status Usage Used in a daisy chain setup in cases where the host needs to know which reader in a daisy chain setup sent the data Definition Each reader in a daisy chain can be assigned a one or two character ID that will appear in front of decoded data and identify its source Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain ID Status daisy chain ID gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note Enable disable and length must be the same in all readers Daisy Chain ID Usage Used in a daisy chain setup in cases where the host needs to know which reader sent the data Definition A one or two character prefix which identifies the particular daisy chain reader from which the data is being sent Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud
158. agnostics Serial Commands eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeteeeeaeeenaeee 10 2 Counts Read ONIY iesin araa iaeia rae aE ati 10 3 External Camera Message esceeeceeececeeeeneeteeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeaeetes 10 4 Over Temperature MeSSAQe eeccceseeeeeenteeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeaeeteaeeeeeeneeens 10 6 service Message enart Sete cd een ad Adlets 10 7 Chapter 11 Camera Setup Gamera Setup by ESP sciinta eerie a aao eii 11 2 Camera Setup Serial COMMandS eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereteneeteeeeeneetsaee 11 3 VIJE OE aaa Mier eae eee ot ae nine Bedi 11 4 EValUatlon EE AE AT 11 6 Region of Interest ROI a r ee e ra eaa a eee pia eo ai a 11 10 IP Database EAA 11 13 DyMamiG Se tu pil scro4 lies T T TAE TEE 11 14 AEE EEA E RT pe ebee sh TA AEN 11 16 Illumination OOU E ae E a a AAE Ea sea AEEA ET EREE 11 17 Thresholding Image Processing Settings eccesceeseeceeeeeseeeeeeseaeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeeaees 11 19 Hollow MAd E i e e r a r ea a aA aaae Aaaa Aa Aaa ataia 11 21 Mirrored Images six aaae aeia a a Ta aaaea aaa Ra Aaa Teinie 11 22 Chapter 12 IP Database IP Database by ESP s0 atei iine i a aN 12 2 IP Database Serial Commands cceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeteeeeeeetteeeneeenaes 12 3 Overview of IP Database eeeeceecceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeaeeteeeseeeseeeeeaeenaes 12 4 IP Database Window in ESP eeeecceeeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeneeees 12 6 Number of Active Database SettingS
159. al type gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Required Disabled UPC Supplementals will not be decoded Enabled When enabled the Verifier will try to decode a main and a supplemental However if a supplemental is not decoded at the end of the read cycle the main will be sent by itself Required When set to Required both the main and the supplemental symbols must be read or a single No Read condition results For example if Supplementals is set to Required Separator is enabled and an asterisk is defined as the UPC separator character then the data will be displayed as MAIN SUPPLEMENTAL Note Under no circumstances will the supplemental symbol data be sent without a main symbol Note If additional symbols other than the main or supplemental will be read in the same read cycle Number of Symbols should be set accordingly Separator Status UPC EAN Usage Allows user to distinguish between the main and Supplemental symbols Definition Allows the user to insert a character between the standard UPC or EAN symbology and the supplemental symbology when Supplementals is set to Enabled or Required Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 7 17 UPC EAN Separator Character UPC EAN Note If Separator Character has been chang
160. al window If this is a command the command is also sent to the Verifier at the same time it is displayed Editing a Macro When you click the arrow next to a any macro and select Edit the following appears Macro Entry Macro Name Read Rate percent Macro Value xo gt Cancel You can edit an existing macro or type in the Macro Name text box and define it in the Macro Value text box Click OK 13 5 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Terminal Window Menus Terminal Window Menus Right click on the Terminal window to display the following menu Copy Paste Clear Select All Save Change Font Change Echo Font Disable Echo Change Background Color Non Printable Characters Default Settings Keyboard Macros b d Copy selected text to clipboard Paste from Terminal or computer text Clear all text in Terminal window Select All text in the Terminal window Save brings up a save as dialog box Change Font of data text brings up a text dialog Change Echo Font to change typed in text or commands Change Background Color of Terminal window Default Settings changes all the above back to default settings Terminal Dropdown Menu The dropdown Terminal menu has Capture Text and Save Current Text functions as well as the functions defined above Capture Text Save Current Text Change Font Change Echo Font Disable Echo Change Background Col
161. amaged lt K480 status gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Symbologies Code 39 Usage Code 39 is considered the standard for non retail symbology Definition An alphanumeric symbology with unique start stop code patterns composed of 9 black and white elements per character of which 3 are wide Serial Cmd lt K470 status check digit status check digit output status large intercharac ter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Digit Status Code 39 Serial Cmd lt K470 status check digit status check digit output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Digit Output Status Code 39 Usage Check digit Output added to the symbol provides additional security Definition When enabled the check digit character is read and compared along with the symbol data When disabled symbol data is sent without the check digit Note With Check Digit Output and an External or Serial trigger option enabled an invalid check digit calculation will cause a No Read message to be transmitted at the end of the read cycle Serial Cmd lt K470 status check digit status check digit output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Default Disabled
162. an the standard margin or other objects encroach into the margins Definition Allows the reader to read symbols with quiet zones less than 8 times the width of the narrow bar element Quiet zone is the space at the leading and trailing ends of a symbol Each quiet zone can be as narrow as only five times the width of the narrow bar element when Narrow Margins is enabled SerialCmd lt K450 narrow margins symbology identifier status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note Do not use Narrow Margins with Large Intercharacter Gap enabled in Code 39 7 28 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Symbologies Symbology ID Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Used when the symbology type and how it s decoded needs to be known Symbology ID is an ISO IEC 15415 standard prefix set of characters that identifies the symbol type When enabled the reader analyzes and identifies the symbology and adds a three character identifying prefix to the data 3 closed bracket character indicating the presence of a symbology ID 4 A C E I L Q b d p A Code 39 C Code 128 E UPC EAN I l 2 5 L PDF417 Q QR Code b BC412 d Data Matrix p Pharmacode 5 Modifier lt K450 narrow margins symbology identifier status gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Explanation of Modifiers for Code 39 Codabar and Interleaved 2 of 5 e For Code 39 Codabar and 2 5 the modifier indicat
163. arameters Element Shape Round Marking Method Inkjet Dot Peen JES 131 Disabled Dot Center Offset Disabled Percentage Failed Offset Disabled Cell Fill Disabled Percentage Failed Cell Fill Disabled Dot Ovality Disabled Percentage Failed Ovality Disabled Angle of Distortion Disabled Quiet Zone Grade Pixels Per Element Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 65 AS9132 Output by ESP Quiet Zone Grade The Quiet Zone is an unmarked space surrounding a symbol required for symbol readability To receive a passing grade the Quiet Zone must be at least one element in width 4591324 Parameters Element Shape Round Marking Method Inkjet Dot Peen JES 131 Disabled Dot Center Offset Disabled Percentage Failed Offset Disabled Cell Fill Disabled Percentage Failed Cell Fill Disabled Dot Ovality Disabled Percentage Failed Ovality Disabled Angle of Distortion Disabled Symbol Contrast Disabled Quiet Zone Grade Pixels Per Element Disabled Pixels Per Element The number of pixels in each symbol element The higher the Pixels Per Element count the more readable the symbol When enabled this feature outputs the Pixels Per Element value 4591324 Parameters Element Shape Round Marking Method Inkjet Dot Peen JES 131 Disabled Dot Center Offset Disabled Percentage Failed Offset Disabled Cell Fill Disabled Percentage Failed Cell Fill Disabled Dot Ovality Disabled Percentage Failed Ovality Disabled Angle of Dist
164. ard 1 Mode 1 2 Mode 2 3 Mode 3 4 Mode 4 5 Fast Linear Mode 6 Reference Decode Algorithm Multiple Symbols in Fast Linear Mode Applies to For Fast Linear processing mode only Usage Used to process more than one symbol appearing in the FOV Definition Searches for one or two symbols in the FOV as defined Serial Cmd lt K518 number of symbols gt Default 0 Options 0 to 2 Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 11 19 Image Processing Settings Image Processing Timeout Caution Image Processing Timeout if not properly set can have a negative impact on good reads If you do not see improvements after experimenting with various timeouts re apply the default 0 value Usage Useful in higher speed applications where image processing time is long enough that not all captures have an opportunity to be processed Definition Specifies the maximum amount of time to process a captured image When the timeout expires the image processing is aborted This timeout works in both Rapid Capture and Continuous Capture modes as well as with the IP database Serial Cmd lt K245 image processing timeout gt Default 0 Options 0 to 65535 in 1mS increments Notes 1 If set to 0 then there is no timeout 2 The timeout period does not include capture time 3 If a timeout occurs during processing the image will be recorded as a No Read For this reason a longer timeout might be tried to remove uncertainty 11 20 Quadrus Verif
165. ard governing monochrome television studio electrical signals The broadcast standard of 30 complete images per second Saturation The degree to which a color is free of white One of the three properties of color perception along with hue and intensity Scattering Redirection of light reflecting off a surface or through an object A 28 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Appendices Symbol Contrast A measurement of the difference in the light and dark values of a symbol s elements Symbology A symbol type such as Code 39 or Code 128 with special rules to define the widths and positions of bars or elements and spaces to represent specific numeric or alphanumeric information Symbol Transitions The transition of bars and spaces on a symbol used to detect the presence of a symbol on an object Trigger A signal transition or character string that initiates a read cycle UII Unique Item Identifier A globally unique data signature applied to items using direct part marking Ulls provide business intelligence for the life of a part See also IUID Unused Error Correction Capacity A measurement of the extent to which regional damage or spot damage in a 2D symbol has eroded the reading safety margin provided by error correction capacity Verification The process of testing a symbol to determine whether or not it meets specific requirements Verifier A precisely calibrated device that tests symbols for conformance to specific re
166. as sending a lt C gt from the terminal To exit read rate mode quickly press and release the EZ button Calibrate Calibration will be initiated when the associated button position is selected To abort calibration quickly press and release the EZ button Save for Power On All reader settings will be saved to non volatile memory to be recalled on power on whenever the associated button position is selected This is the same as sending the lt Z gt in the terminal 8 32 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Load New Master Functions the same as new master pin input whenever the associated button position is selected The new master pin s Consecutive Decode requirement holds true for this function Target System Turns on the targeting system target pattern whenever the associated button position is selected To disable quickly press and release the EZ button Note This mode is the only one that does not require that the button be released before taking effect Thus as soon as the Verifier beeps the appropriate number of times for the position it will take effect If it is necessary to have the target system on before another operation such as calibration or read rate is performed ensure that the target system mode is assigned a lower position so that it will be activated first Live Video Enables live video mode when the associated button position is selected To disable quickly press and release the EZ button
167. ase tab you will see the following view Video Evaluation ROI Current 1000 6 1000 7 1000 8 1000 9 1000 a IP Database Dynamic Setup 550 550 550 550 550 Processing Mode Narrow Backgrounc Threshold Fixed Color Mode Threshold Va AC Margins Reference Disabled Standard Standard Standard Standard Number of Active Indexes determines how many database indexes will be configured and applied to the reader The corresponding number of index rows in the database view will be highlighted as shown Disabled White Adaptive 0 Disabled Disabled To make changes to index Disabled settings double click the desired index row and use the popup dialog Calibrate Begins calibration 5 Number of Active Indexes Load Index To Curent White Adaptive 128 routine Receive Send iin Load Current To Index Uploads the reader s Sends IP Load Index to Current loads configuration settings image processing Database contained in the selected database index to current settings to the IP settings to active settings Load Current to Index loads current Database the reader active settings to the selected database index 12 6 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual IP Database Number of Active Database Settings Usage It is important to remember that IP Database Size must be set for the number of indexes you are planning to
168. ast Cell Contrast is the value difference between light and dark symbol elements and between the quiet zone and perimeter elements This example shows a low contrast direct part mark symbol The light and dark elements are too close in value which undermines readability Fixed Pattern Damage Fixed Pattern Damage refers to finder pattern and clock pattern damage lt q Notice the missing elements in the clock pattern and the damaged L pattern in the example symbol Axial Non Uniformity is the amount of deviation along the symbol s major axes In this example the symbol s Y axis dimension is clearly greater than its X axis dimension Grid Non Uniformity refers to a symbol s cell deviation from the ideal grid of a theoretical perfect symbol The Data Matrix reference decode algorithm is applied to a binarized image of the symbol comparing its grid intersections to ideal grid intersections The greatest distance from an actual to a theoretical grid intersection determines the Grid Non Uniformity grade Actual grid TL ap ees Pom deal grid The reference lt q intersection decode algorithm plots the symbol s Iu grid intersections nom w 4 vector deviation and compares P E them to an ideal grid cl j The largest vector deviation on the grid Symbol Detail determines the Grid Non Uniformity grade 3 10 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification cer Modula
169. atabase Overview of IUID and Ull Overview of Matchcode Overview of Verification P Parity Parity Aux Port Parity Host Port Parse Parse Table Format Extract Parse Table Format Insert Part Number Too Long Paste Pause PDF417 Percentage Failed Cell Fill Percentage Failed Offset Percentage Failed Ovality Pharmacode Picket Fence Symbol Orientation PING Pixel Pixels Per Element Pixels Per Element AIM DPM Pixels Per Element AS9132 Pixels Per Element ISO IEC 15415 Pixels Per Element Value Placeholder Point to Point Standard Point to Point with RTS CTS Point to Point with RTS CTS and XON XOFF Point to Point with XON XOFF Polling Mode D Port Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Index 17 Q Port Connectors Position Verifier and Symbol Postamble Postamble Character s Postamble Status Power 3 pin Connector Power On Power On Saves Preamble Preamble Character s Preamble Status Preferences Preferences Dialog Preferences Tab Preliminary Steps Primary Command TCP Port Primary TCP Port Print Growth Print Growth AIM DPM Print Growth ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Print Growth ISO IEC 15415 Print Growth Value Processing Mode Processing Time Progressive Scan Protocol Protocol Command Pulse Pulse Width Output 1 Pulse Width Output 2 Pulse Width Output 3 Q QR Code Quadrus Verifier Host 25 Pin Connector Quick Start Quiet Zone Quiet Zone AS9132 Symbol Qual
170. ation Definition Enables the searches for symbol Dimension 1 and Dimension 2 Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size status symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimen sion tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Bad no symbol output 2 Object qualification 3 Enable both Disabled Decoded messages are output but no attempt to qualify symbols or output Bad or No Symbol messages is undertaken Bad No Symbol Output Checks first for decodes If no symbol is decoded checks for symbol dimension If both Dimension 1 and Dimension 2 requirements are met a Bad Symbol message is output If both are not met outputs a No Symbol message 8 12 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Object Qualification Checks first for matches to symbol dimension If qualified attempts to decode If no decodes are found within the specified read cycle parameters outputs a No Read message Enable Both Same as Object Qualification except that if neither Dimension 1 nor Dimension 2 qualifies then a No Symbol message is output if either Dimension 1 or Dimension 2 qualifies then a Bad Symbol message is output Dimension 1 2D Symbology Qualification Definition Checks symbol dimension for a specified number of pixels In the case of rectangular symbols checks the longer side Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern
171. aud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Host Port Protocol Host 232 422 Status lt K140 protocol gt lt K102 host 422 gt Auxiliary Port lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain ID status daisy chain ID gt Daisy Chain Autoconfigure lt K150DAISY gt Daisy Chain ID lt K151 daisy chain reader daisy chain reader ID gt Ethernet Configuration lt K125 P address subnet address gatewayaddress P address mode primary TCP port video TCP port gt Preamble lt K141 status oreamble characters gt Postamble lt K142 status postamble characters gt Response Timeout lt K143 response timeout gt LRC lt K145 status gt Aux Port System Data Status lt K146 aux port system data gt Read Cycle Multisymbol lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Trigger Mode Duration lt K200 trigger mode trigger filter duration gt External Trigger State lt K202 extermal trigger state gt Serial Trigger Character Start Trigger Character lt K201 serial trigger character gt lt K229 start character gt Stop Trigger Character lt K230 stop character gt End of Read Cycle lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout gt Active Camera lt K240 active camera gt Captures lt K241 capture mode number of captures rapid capture mode gt Capture Timing lt K242 time before 1st capture time between cap
172. avel time i alae NUMBER OF CAPTURES i 0 4 inches L i FOV Symbol Size Travel Distance Symbol Size EAT Following up on the example from Step 1 i 0 78 0 4 0 15 2 5 captures If a required number of captures has been determined you can also work the formula backwards and determine the minimum FOV by FOV Number Of Captures Travel Time Symbol Size 6 20 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Read Cycle Triggered Capture Usage Useful in applications where delays between captures can be controlled by triggers rather than preset time delays Definition When enabled the reader will stay in the read cycle until either the user defined number of captures has been met or if configured a timeout occurs Notes on Triggered Capture Mode 1 Trigger Mode lt K200 gt must be set to Edge Serial or Serial and Edge If set to Level Triggered Capture Mode will operate the same as Timed Rapid Capture mode 2 For End of Read Cycle settings lt K220 gt a If set to Timeout or New Trigger and Timeout and a timeout occurs before number of capture have been met it will abort the read cycle and disregard the remaining number of triggers b If set to New Trigger the reader remains in the read cycle until the number of captures is satisfied and an additional trigger is received indicating both the end of the read cycle and the start and first capture of the next read cycle
173. bol setup for matching and other matchcode operations Definition Allows you to define up to 10 master symbols as the master symbol database which can be entered by keyboard scanned in displayed or deleted by serial or ESP commands 1 Click the Master Database tab 2 Set the Master Symbol Database Size 3 Select database index you want to enter the master symbol 4 Do one of the following to enter master symbol data a Double click the index row to type data directly into index b Click the Read Symbol into Selected Index to enter the next decoded symbol aT Mea Symbol Database atabase Size V Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index if Size here __pe 5 Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Loads the next symbol Index Master Symbol Data decoded into selected i index 3 4 Loads th d oads the reader s saved master symbols Saves the displayed database into ESP to the reader Double click row to enter data into popup dialog box Master Database Important Master Symbol Database is used only for comparing entire symbols when Sequential and Wild Card are NOT enabled and Start Position is equal to 0 14 8 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Master Symbol Database Size Utilities Definition Number of Master Symbols allows you to select 1 to 10 master symbols for the master symbol database Serial Cmd lt K231
174. bol Quality Output On Activates discrete output when a symbol quality condition is met depending on the symbol quality option enabled Diagnostic Warning Output On Activates discrete output when a trend analysis condition is met depending on the trend analysis option enabled In Read Cycle Output On Output is active while reader is operating in the read cycle 8 36 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Output State Output 1 Output 1 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Noread Output State Normally Open z Pulse Width a Output Mode Definition Sets the active electrical state of the discrete output Serial Cmd lt K810 0utput on output state pulse width output mode gt Default Normally Open Options 0 Normally Open 1 Normally Closed Pulse Width Output 1 Output 1 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Noread Output State Normally Open Pulse Width 0 050 Seconds Output Mode Pulse Definition Sets the time in 10 ms increments that the discrete output remains active Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Default 5 Corresponds to 05 seconds Options 0 to 255 0 to 2 55 seconds Divide the number entered on the command line by 100 for time in seconds Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 37 Output 1 Parameters Output Mode Output 1 Output 1 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Noread Output State Normally Open Pulse Width 5 re Pulse Lat
175. bration by ESP ISO IEC Verification Setup by ESP Item Unique Identification IUID J JES 131 JPEG Quality JPEG Quality EZ Trax Output by Serial Command JPEG Quality Image Output L Ladder Orientation Large Intercharacter Gap Code 39 Laser or Chemical Etch Last Frame Last Frame or New Trigger Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle LED Left Column Pointer Lens Light Angle Light Angle Value Light Collection Light Source Lighting Limitation of Liability Statement Limitations Line Scan Linear Symbologies Linear Stacked Symbology Qualification Live Real Time Video Output Load Current Settings from Database Load Current Settings from Database by ESP Load IP Database EZ Button Locate Locate Symbol Longitudinal Redundancy Check Lower Case Characters LRC Status Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Index 13 M Machine Vision Macro Name Macro Value Macros Marking Method Master Database Master Database Overview Master Symbol Database Size Match Match Green Flash Match Length Match Replace Match Start Position Matchcode Matchcode by ESP Matchcode Serial Commands Matchcode Type Maximum Characters for Master Symbol Maximum Element Size Mechanical Menu Toolbar Message Trailer Character MicroPDF417 Microscan Default Parameters Microscan Protocol Host RS 232 Supported MIL S
176. button to bring up the O Parameters menu To open nested options single click the 8 2 To open the entire contents of the tree control hold down the Alt key and single click the To close the entire contents of the tree control hold down the Alt key and single click the Parameters j I O Parameters Symbol Data Output Noread Message Bad No Symbol Qualification Read Duration Output Output Object Info Output Indicators Serial Yerification Video Output Image Output EZ Trax Output Image Captioning Synchronous Trigger EZ Button Input 1 Sg Unique Item Identifier UIT Error Message Output 1 Parameters Output 2 Parameters Output 3 Parameters Fe a E ESP Values Good Read Enabled Disabled Disabled To change a setting double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled UIl onl Quadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters I O Parameters Serial Commands Symbol Data Output lt K705 symbol data output status when to output gt No Read Message lt K714 no read message status no read message gt Bad Symbol Message lt K715 unused message gt No Symbol Message lt K716 unused message gt 1D Stacked Symbology lt K717 minimum number of bars minimum number of qualified scans start Qualifica
177. call the previously customer saved settings with an lt Arc gt or lt Zrc gt command Microscan Default Parameters Microscan default parameters are contained in the firmware and cannot be changed Software Defaults Microscan default parameters can be recalled loaded into current settings with lt Ard gt command or recalled and saved for power on with the lt Zrd gt command Hardware Default If a software default reset is not possible it may be necessary to reset the reader by shorting connecting specific pins This procedure has the same effect as the lt Zrd gt software command Important For this reset to occur this command must be executed within 60 seconds after a power on or a reset 1 Apply power to the reader 2 If using an IB 150 Interface Kit locate pins 7 and 11 on the host connector Caution Be certain that the correct pins are located Connecting the wrong pins could cause serious damage to the unit 3 Momentarily connect these wires or pins and listen for a series of short beeps 4 Within 3 seconds connect them again A longer beep should be heard If not repeat the process Default on Power On You can also use the EZ button to default the reader by holding down the EZ button while applying power to the reader provided that this feature is enabled in Default on Power On EZ Button 14 18 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Utilities Status Requests lt gt Status Byte The Verifier respo
178. cation Symbol Type Definition When enabled identifies the symbology of the mark being evaluated in the verification report output Serial Cmd lt K708 separator character unused 0 ISO grade type symbol type symbol dimension size gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ISO IEC 15415 Output Example Symbol Type highlighted below symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 0 11 3 0 43 3 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 AS9132 Output Example Symbol Type highlighted below symbol_data P 004 003 F 045 057 P 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 ISO IEC 15415 Output 2 C 005 660 45 4 A 4 A 075 3 B 1 D 0 11 3 B 0 43 3 B 2 C 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 Quaarus Verifier User Command Field ties Command Field Grade P Dot Center Offset Grade Aperture Value 004 Dot Center Offset Worst Case Value Wavelength Value 003 Dot Center Offset Average Value Light Angle Value F Cell Fill Grade Decode Grade 045 Cell Fill Worst Case Value Symbol Contrast Grade 057 Cell Fill Average Value Symbol Contrast Value P Dot Ovality Grade Fixed Pattern Damage Grade 002 Dot Ovality Worst Case Value Axial Non Uniformity Grade 001 Dot Ovality Average Value Axial Non Uniformity Value F Angle of Distortion Grade Grid Non Uniformity Grade 08 20 Angle of Distortion Value Grid Non Uniformity Value P Symbol Contrast Grade Modulation Grade 034 Symbol Contrast Value Unused ECC Grade P Quiet Zone Grade U
179. cation The Quadrus Verifier supports the Microscan communication protocol for Verifiers over two TCP IP ports This is the same protocol that is supported through the Verifier s RS 232 Host serial port Note that on Ethernet the Quadrus Verifier is a server device which requires the host to establish the connection Once the connection is established however the Verifier will send symbol data and diagnostic message data whenever it is generated Network Protocols Supported The Quadrus Verifier supports the following RFC compliant protocols IP RFC0791 RFC950 ICMP PING RFC0792 TCP RFC0793 Sockets BSD v4 3 ARP RFC0826 DHCP client RFC0951 RFC1541 RFC2131 RFC2563 partial support TFTP server Revision 2 RFC1350 Communication with the Quadrus Verifier can be established via a Telnet client raw data only no AC command processing or through a custom sockets application The Quadrus Verifier becomes a server device It listens for connection requests from the Host before communication can begin All Quadrus Verifiers have a unique 48 bit hardware MACID address This address is printed on the Verifier s product label 16 8 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Ethernet Microscan Protocol Host RS 232 Supported Configuration Commands K commands ESP interface commands lt op gt commands Utility commands lt A gt lt Z gt Host preamble lt K141 gt and postamble lt K142 gt strings are added to command re
180. cation and Length parameters in the Format Extract serial command Sample Symbol Origina ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPGRSTUVWHYZ Add Insert Step Add Extract Step Output BCD Remove Step Clear AIl Parsing Sample Symbol Original ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Output BCD Cancel You can extract and insert several character sequences using ESP s Symbol Parse feature In this example the selected extraction range is characters 2 4 The Sample Symbol example on the Symbol Parse dialog shows the selected character positions extracted and output as desired Simultaneously the data string from the actual selected symbol is displayed at the bottom left of the Parse Table followed by the user defined extracted output 15 6 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Output Format Format Insert Output Index Definition Output Index refers to the database entry you wish to modify with this command A formatted output is built by extracting data from a symbol s original data output and or inserting user defined characters It may be helpful to think of individual indexes as positions in the final formatted output you wish to build Starting with index 1 enter either an extract or insert command to begin building your desired output string Then with the next index number enter either an extract or insert command to continue building the output string Continue this process until you are finished building th
181. ccccsceeseeseeeeeeeeeteeteeeeeeeeeneees 12 7 Image Processing Database eeeeeesseeeenneeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeneateesaes 12 8 Image Processing Database by ESP cesceseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaees 12 10 Save Current Settings to Database cccsceesesseeeeseeseseeeessteensnees 12 11 Load Current Settings from Database c cccssceeeseeesseeeesteerseees 12 12 Request Selected Database Settings cecceecceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 12 13 Request All Database Settings ecceeceseeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeetaes 12 13 Chapter 13 Terminal Terminal Window sic csinicessasetsedesensctcp shceessceeeaazesaaptaseescccdeatest estecceissupeebste 13 2 FUG ss cs 28s A A nts cescedusceeshan sisedentaadesasfcnshensestaseedushsdthdedacetey 13 3 SEIN TT EE E EAE deere 13 4 MELE Ko EE E A ATT 13 5 Terminal Window MenUuS cccceeseeesesneeteeeeeeeeeeeeneeeesaeeeseeeeesentereaas 13 6 Chapter 14 Utilities Serial Utility Commands eeeeeeceeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeteeeeeaeeeneetsaes 14 2 Read Rate cin aes de ia Bete eee aiid 14 3 GOUMTETS S E eaten tet UCL Lea oa be tet pet aed Se 14 4 Quaarus Verifier User s Manual vii Table of Contents Device Control a eorr eieren rane naoa Ea EEA iea EATE EEEa ER 14 6 Differences from Default csiis teiser ipasa aieeaa AREA E aE 14 7 Master Database iire aa aa a a E E aaa EE Ea 14 8 Firmware aaea aa ea E EE AEREE aN 14 13 Bar Code Configu
182. cement string gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Replacement String Definition User defined string that when enabled will replace the matchcode data Serial Cmd lt K735 status replacement string gt Default MATCH Options Any ASCII string up to 128 characters Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 9 13 Mismatch Replace Mismatch Replace Usage Provides a convenient shortcut for applications that need to output a pre defined text string whenever a symbol does not match a master symbol Definition Outputs a user defined data string whenever a mismatch occurs and Matchcode is enabled SerialCmd lt K736 status replacement string gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Replacement String Definition User defined string that when enabled will be output whenever a mismatch occurs Serial Cmd lt K736 status replacement string gt Default MISMATCH Options Any ASCII string up to 128 characters 9 14 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Matchcode New Master Pin Usage Some applications require the line worker to change the master symbol This can be done by installing a switch at the location of the reader It is very common to have a keyed switch so that accidental switching does not occur Definition After New Master Pin is enabled a pulse can be received on the new master pin that will cause the reader to record the next decoded symbol s as the new master symbol s It is impo
183. center offset percentage failed offset cell fill percentage failed cell fill dot ovality percentage failed ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet Zone grade pixels per element value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Worst Case Value 2 Average Value 3 Worst Case and Average Values 4 Grade 5 Grade and Worst Case Value 6 Grade and Average Value 7 Grade Worst Case and Average Values Worst Case Value Dot Ovality Definition Worst Case Value is a percentage and is shown in the output string as a three digit value from 000 to 100 For example 002 2 Output ME Example Dot Ovality Worst Case Value highlighted below symbol_data P 004 003 F 045 057 002 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 57 AS9132 Serial Output Average Value Dot Ovality Definition Average Value is a percentage and is shown in the output string as a three digit value from 000 to 100 For example 001 1 Output fia Example Dot Ovality Average Value highlighted below symbol_data P 004 003 F 045 057 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Worst Case and Average Values Dot Ovality Output Example symbol_data P 004 003 F 045 057 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Grade Dot Ovality Definition Grades take into account both the worst case and average values A passing grade is represented by P and a failing grade is represented
184. ch or the symbol s mil size The minimum and maximum element size values define the range for calibration Note A larger minimum to maximum range of element size may slow down the calibration phase of the symbol grading process Once the candidate symbol is identified the AIM DPM procedure will use and report the actual aperture size used for verification AIM d DPM Setup 0 7 50 mil Maximum Element Size Wavelength Lighting 45Q Maximum Element Size Maximum Element Size is the maximum expected element size of the candidate symbol in 1 1000 of an inch or the symbol s mil size The minimum and maximum element size values define the range for calibration Note A larger minimum to maximum range of element size may slow down the calibration phase of the symbol grading process Once the candidate symbol is identified the AIM DPM procedure will use and report the actual aperture size used for verification AIM DPM Setup Minimum Element a 7 50 mi Wavelength Lighting E 3 42 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Wavelength Wavelength represents the wavelength of illumination in the lighting environment used for verification Important The operator must ensure that this setting matches that of the illumination source being used AIM DPM Setup Minimum Element Size i aadi Element Size Paaran 400 700 nm eee Lighting Lighting is represented by a combination of ASCII charac
185. ch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle Definition Sets the condition in which the discrete output is de activated Serial Cmd lt K810 output on output state pulse width output mode gt Default Pulse Options 0 Pulse 1 Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin 2 Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition 3 Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle Pulse This is the default mode of operation in which the programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active for the duration of the selected pulse width Latch Mode 1 Unlatch Input 1 Pin The programmable output is active when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the discrete Input 1 has been activated Latch Mode 2 Unlatch Opposite Condition The programmable output is activated when the Output On condition has been met and held active until the opposite condition selected under Output On has been met For example if No Read is enabled under Output On the programmable output will go active upon a No Read and remain active until the opposite condition a good read occurs Latch Mode 3 Unlatch Re Enter Read Cycle The programmable output is active when the Output On condition has been met and is held active until a new read cycle begins 8 38 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Trend Analysis Output 1 Note O
186. checkbox 2 Move the threshold marker vertical green dashed line in the Histogram chart Hint This should be midway between the maximum and minimum curves 3 Click on the Send Threshold button to adopt the new threshold position Histogram Evaluation In the histogram shown below the first peak from the left is the Low Peak Its highest point occurs at the 20 in the dark to light range The next peak is the High Peak which occurs at 141 The minimum dark and maximum light represent the entire range of pixels that are derived from the capture Threshold is the mean setting 81 on this graph and represented by the vertical dashed green line In practical terms the threshold represents the point at which all pixels on the left are regarded as dark and all pixels on the right are regarded as light You can adjust the threshold by unchecking the Enable Autothreshold checkbox moving the threshold and clicking Send Threshold to save the new setting 11 8 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Camera Setup Line Scan 1 From the Evaluation tab click the Line Scan button The window shown in the figure below appears Hint When the Histogram window opens you might need to expand the window and or adjust the scroll bars in order to bring the image into view 2 Drag your mouse pointer across the image horizontally It will create a dashed horizontal line Pixel information and a visual representation of the dark and l
187. ck Start procedure lt K531 aperture wavelength angle reflectance maximum reflectance minimum gt 10 0 to 100 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification ISO IEC 15415 Verification Setup by ESP ISO IEC 15415 Verification Setup allows the user to fine tune lighting and camera settings to comply with ISO IEC 15415 s optical requirements for 2D verification Aperture Aperture expresses the radius of the synthetic aperture that will be applied to the captured symbol image by the Verifier s software Radius values are in units of 1 10th of one pixel ISO IEC 15415 Setup 50 1 0 16 0 mils Wavelength 660 Angle 45 Reflectance Max 85 Reflectance Min 10 Wavelength Wavelength is the LED illumination wavelength that will be directed at the candidate symbol during verification Wavelength values are in nanometers nm ISO IEC 15415 Setup Aperture 25 Wavelength een 400 700 nm Angle 45 Reflectance Max 85 Reflectance Min 10 Angle Angle is the degree angle at which the candidate symbol will be illuminated in the lighting chamber during verification ISOJIEC 15415 Setup Aperture 25 Wavelength 660 SECM o0 ceges aafiectance Max Reflectance Min i Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 3 21 ISO IEC 15415 Verification Setup by ESP Reflectance Max Reflectance Max represents the maximum reflectance value percent of the symbol used to calibrate the Verifier ISOJIEC 15415 Setup Apertu
188. cle Active The same object moving out of the detector Object 5 beam causes another change in the trigger detector state ending the read cycle g Trigger Level Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 6 9 Trigger External Edge Usage This mode is highly recommended in any application where conveying speed is constant or if spacing object size or timeouts are consistent Definition External Trigger Edge as with Level allows the read cycle active state to begin when a trigger change of state from an external sensing device is received However the passing of an object out of sensor range does not end the read cycle The read cycle ends with a good read output or depending on End of Read Cycle setting a timeout or new trigger occurs Serial Cmd lt K200 3 gt Important Level and Edge apply to the active logic state Active Off lo or Active On lon that exists while the object is in a read cycle between the rising edge and falling edge Rising edge is the trigger signal associated with the appearance of an object Falling edge is the trigger signal associated with the subsequent disappearance of the object Initiate Read Cycle m p Object 1 moving in front of the detector Active a beam causes a change in the trigger state Bi initiating the read cycle 5 B ae Opject Associated waveforms assume dete chor External Trigger State is set to Initiate Second Read Cycle Active On
189. ctive when the service timer has expired This condition will only be held for one service timer tick Serial Cmd lt K790 over temp service unit external camera disconnect gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled External Camera Disconnect Note This feature cannot be used if in a Continuous Read mode Definition Sets the output to toggle to active if the external camera goes off line Serial Cmd lt K790 over temp service unit external camera disconnect gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 8 47 Output 2 Parameters Output 2 Parameters Note Output 2 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1 Output 2 Parameters Output On Symbol Quality Output State Normally Open Pulse Width 5 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Symbol Quality ISO 15415 Symbol Quality 4591324 Diagnostics F Output On Output 2 Output 2 Parameters Mismatch or Noread Output State Mismatch or Noread Pulse Width Good Read Match Output Mode Mismatch Noread Trend Analysis Symbol Quality Diagnostic Warning In Read Cycle SerialCmd lt K811 output on output state pulse width output mode gt See Output On Output 1 for command structure and options Output State Output 2 Output 2 Parameters Output On Mismatch or Noread Output State Normally Open x Pulse Width Normally Open Output Mode Normally Closed Serial Cmd
190. d No Save lt A gt Saves ESP settings to current memory Save to Reader Send No Save Receive Reader Settings Send and Save lt Z gt Lock Reader Send and Save Activates all changes Default Current Menu Settings in current memory Default all ESP Settings and saves settings for power on Send and Save as Customer Defaults lt Zc gt Saves your own default settings for quick retrieval with a lt Zre gt command This option will be visible only if you have checked Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults in the ESP Preferences dialog Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 2 13 Send Receive Options Defaulting When you select Default Current Menu Settings or Default all Settings you are only defaulting the ESP settings Advanced Options Send Current View This is the same as Save to Reader gt Send No Save except that only the commands in the Save to Reader gt current configuration tree are sent Receive Reader Settings Default Current Menu Settings Default all Setti Send Current Command efault all Settings This is the same as Send Current Send Current View View except that it saves only Send Current Command the command that is currently Add Exception selected Remove Exception Add Remove Exception After you perform a Receive Reader Settings command and you click on the Add Exception option you may see a list of serial commands These are commands that may be in your Verifier s fir
191. d for labeling small items that need large capacity Definition A variant of PDF417 a very efficient and compact stacked symbology that can encode up to 250 alphanumeric characters or 366 numeric characters per symbol SerialCmd lt K485 status usused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status MicroPDF417 Serial Cmd lt K485 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length MicroPDF417 Usage Used to increase data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Definition When enabled the Micro PDF symbol must contain the same number of characters as the symbol length setting before it can be considered a good read The reader will ignore any symbol not having the specified length Serial Cmd lt K485 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 10 Options 1 to 2710 Note Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect 7 26 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Symbologies Composite When set to Enabled or Required will attempt to decode the composite component of a linear symbol The linear symbol can be RSS14 RSS Expanded RSS Limited UCC EAN 128 UPC A EAN 13 EAN 8 and UPC E Usage Allows reading by both linear and 2D readers Definition Co
192. d to follow up with a lt Z gt or Save to Reader Send and Save command b Only available in ESP if enabled under the Options pulldown menu Resets Resets lt A gt commands affect only the current settings active memory and are not saved for power on Saved for Power On Power on parameters lt Z gt commands are saved to NOVRAM and recalled and loaded into current parameters when power is cycled or the lt Arp gt command is issued Defaults Defaults are Microscan firmware settings or saved customer settings that can be recalled either by software or hardware reset Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 14 17 Defaulting Saving Resetting Customer Default Parameters Customer default parameters Saved by lt Zc gt are the same set of parameters as power on parameters but are saved in a different isolated section of NOVRAM This allows a user to essentially create a backup set of parameters that can be recalled in the event that the current parameters or power on parameters have been accidentally changed or no longer desired It is important to note that a hardware default does not affect customer default parameters For example a user that has inadvertently changed communication settings and saved them with a lt Z gt command may not know the correct settings or doesn t have the capability to communicate at those settings By first doing an EZ button or hardware default to restore the known Microscan defaults the user can then re
193. ddress Mode setting is Static which disables DHCP 1 Send a Receive Reader Settings command 2 Under Network in ESP s Communications menu double click on IP Address Mode and change Static to DHCP Network Ethernet IP Address 123 234 1 26 Subnet 255 255 0 0 Gateway 123 234 1 1 IP Address Mode DHCP Primary TCP Port 2001 Video TCP Port 2002 3 Right click on the Communications menu and send Save to Reader gt Send no Save 4 Send a Receive Reader Settings command 5 Notice that the network will have assigned new numbers to the IP Address Subnet and Gateway If the numbers have not changed contact your IT department 6 Go to Step 3 Communicating in Ethernet 16 6 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Ethernet Step 3 Communicating in Ethernet By now either the Verifier should be configured with an IP Address or the host computer should be configured to use the Verifier s default IP Address Now ESP needs to be configured 1 Select Settings from ESP s Connect dropdown menu 2 Click the TCP IP tab Connection Settings RS 232 TCP IP IP Address 127 30 Primary TCP Port 2001 Video TCP Port 2002 4 crea 3 Type the Verifier s IP Address as it is shown on the Communications menu 4 Click Connect 5 After a few seconds ESP should display CONNECTED at the bottom of the window Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 16 7 Ethernet Application Step 4 Ethernet Appli
194. ded with Verifier 4 Illumination Power Supply Included with Verifier 5 Light Control Cable Included with Verifier 6 Quadrus EZ Stand not shown Included with Verifier 7 Monitor Kit 98 000096 01 8 Object Detector 99 000017 01 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Quick Start Step 2 Connect the System Video OUT to Monitor To Host 9 Hardware Configuration Caution Be sure that all cables are connected BEFORE applying power to the system Always power down BEFORE disconnecting any cables Connecting to a Host by RS 232 1 Connect the Verifier to the IB 150 Kit 2 Connect the IB 150 Kit host cable to the host 3 Connect the Lighting Power Supply to the lighting chamber 4 Connect the main power supply and cycle power to the Verifier Note When wiring the IB 150 Kit to a host with a 25 pin host connector cross pins 2 and 3 When wiring the interface box to a host with a 9 pin host connector do NOT cross pins 2 and 3 Side View of IB 150 showing Host Connecting to a Host by TCP IP 25 pin Socket Connection See Chapter 16 Ethernet Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 1 3 Install ESP Step 3 Install ESP Easy Setup Program ESP is Microscan s proprietary setup and testing application The purpose of ESP is to provide a quick a
195. ders Operator Joe Operator Any Label Any Data Reference data Verifier firmware version Verifier serial number report creation date ESP version company name and operator name 3 96 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual E 4 Unique Item Identifiers Contents Overview of IUID and Ulli cceccecesessssscceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeceseeseseseceesseauaeaeeeeeeeeaueeeceeeeeseseceeseseneneeeenss 4 2 NAOI EE TEETE E EA E AE EE A E ee E 4 3 WIRMOGE Fea cist Sct Le eek a SE ON AEE Lech tet ee Od Lakh 4 4 Error MOSSAGING see cece crete eiit kis Percent deat a agencies ete eee 4 6 Valid Data Qualifier Formats icc cccc d osccsecds cveet tech coke cecddvasuecbucviectastectencvidveccusevect cassudbobesdveueavaes 4 8 WIPER SING 2 5 cides cesar ceees ovens cette Marrcevies sv unect tase cas accent eng etude aeuetaddh ands Tacdt euentadtesthaet ede aa ates 4 9 This section explains the structure and purpose of Item Unique Identification IUID and Unique Item Identifiers Ulls and how to configure the Quadrus Verifier to read Ulls Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 4 1 Overview of IUID and Ull Overview of IUID and UII The Department of Defense DoD now requires Item Unique Identification IUID for all products sold to the DoD by private vendors A Unique Item Identifier UII is like a Social Security number for each part The UII must be encoded in a Data Matrix ECC 200 symbol that conforms to the data structur
196. dimension 1 dimension 2 dimen sion tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 8 10 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Symbol Size Mode 2D Symbology Qualification Note if Symbol Size 1 is larger than Symbol Size 2 it will be automatically reversed in the algorithm Definition Specifies the outputs resulting from the results of searches for Symbol Size 1 and Symbol Size 2 Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimen sion tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Bad No Symbol Output 2 Object Qualification 3 Enable Both Disabled Decoded messages are output but no attempt to qualify symbols or output Bad or No Symbol messages is undertaken Bad Symbol No Symbol Output Checks first for decodes If no symbol is decoded checks for symbol size If both Symbol Size 1 and Symbol Size 2 requirement are met a Bad Symbol message is output If both are not met outputs a No Symbol message Object Qualification Checks first for matches to symbol size If qualified attempts to decode If no decodes are found within the specified read cycle parameters outputs a No Read message Enable Both Same as Object Qualification except that if no objects qualify then a No Symbol message is outpu
197. does not have a matching qualified symbol a No Read message will be output in place of the symbol assuming the No Read message is enabled For example if there is not a symbol that meets filter 3 s requirements then a No Read message will be output in the third output position Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 15 9 Output Filter Configuration Filter Number Definition Serial Cmd Options This is the filter index number that represents the position of the symbol in the data output at the end of the read cycle This index number should be entered along with the following filter settings for the predetermined symbol position lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt 1 to 10 Symbology Type Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 15 10 Specifies the symbology type allowed to occupy this location in multi symbol output Note To filter or order a symbol the symbol must meet all the requirements of the selected filter index lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt Any type 0 Any type 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 2 Code 39 3 Code 128 4 Codabar 5 UPC 6 PDF417 7 EAN 128 8 Code 93 9 PharmaCode 10 RSS 11 MicroPDF417 12 Composite 13 BC412 14 Data Matrix 15 QR Code Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Output Format Length Definition Spec
198. e string Serial Cmd lt K741 output index length hex string gt Options 1 to 100 Length Definition Specifies the length of the user defined character string that will be inserted This function is limited to 4 characters per output index so multiple indexes must be entered in order to insert longer character sequences For example if you wish to insert a 10 character sequence in user defined output you would need three commands with consecutive index numbers where the first two character sequence lengths were 4 and the third was 2 Serial Cmd lt K741 output index length hex string gt Default 0 disabled end of format cell array Options 1 to 4 Hex String Definition Specifies a character string that represents ASCII characters to be inserted in the database entry Two hex characters are required for every ASCII character to be inserted in the user defined output string These two characters comprise the hex base 16 value of the ASCII character For example if you wanted to enter the three character sequence Hi you would enter 3 for the length of the string and a hex sequence of 486921 for the ASCII sequence to be inserted 48 H 69 i 21 Important Each pair of hex characters represents one ASCII character Hex character pairs range from 00 to FF Since you are limited to 4 ASCII characters per insertion per database entry you are likewise limited to 8 hex characters per insertion per database entry Ser
199. e defined in the DoD s Guide for Uniquely Identifying Items UII Constructs Ulls come in two forms called Construct 1 and Construct 2 The following is an example of Construct 2 Construct 1 is identical except that it doesn t include a part number Construct 2 is composed of three basic elements Issuing Agency Code 2 Part Number 1 Enterprise Identifier EID entifier PID UN ABCD 98 76 123 AC and controlled by a specific issuing agency e g Dun and Bradstreet GS1 etc 3 Serial Number Encoding a Ull The information encoded in a UII mark includes a compliance indicator data qualifiers and data element separators These elements are not part of the final concatenated UII When UII Only is enabled in the Quadrus Verifier the characters that are not part of the final concatenated UII are removed from the decoded symbol data Only characters that comprise the UII are passed on to the host Otherwise the symbol is rejected Compliance Format Enterprise Part Serial Message Trailer Indicator Header Identifier Number Number Character D gt RS DD GS DUNABCD GS PNO98 76 GS SEQ123 AC RS EOT Format Trailer Data Element Data Element Data Element Format Trailer Character Separator Separator Separato
200. e is a percentage and is shown in the output string as a three digit value from 000 to 100 For example 045 45 Output Example symbol_data P 004 003 045 P 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Cell Fill Worst Case Value highlighted below Average Value Cell Fill Definition Average Value is a percentage and is shown in the output string as a three digit value from 000 to 100 For example 057 57 Output Example symbol_data P 004 003 057 P 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Cell Fill Average Value highlighted below Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 55 AS9132 Serial Output Worst Case and Average Values Cell Fill Output Example symbol_data P 004 003 045 057 P 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Grade Cell Fill Definition Grades take into account both the worst case and average values A passing grade is represented by P and a failing grade is represented by F Cell Fill Worst Case Value and Average Value highlighted below Output weak Example Cell Fill Grade highlighted below symbol_data P 004 003 F P 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Grade and Worst Case Value Cell Fill Output Example symbol_data P 004 003 F 045 P 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Cell Fill Grade and Worst Case Value highlighted below Grade and Average Value Cell Fill Output Example symbol_data P 004 003 F 057 P 0
201. eaeeeneesiaeesaeeeeaeeas A 19 Appendix G Object Detector ee eecceesceescecseeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeeaeeeseeeaeeeaeeseaeseaeessaeeeaeeseeseaeeseeeeaeesas A 20 Appendix H Operational Tips ccscecdseuceihndietdlasie nasties eneederateien A 21 Appendix Embedded MemnuS 0 cecccescsceeseeceeeecceseseeeeeseneneneneeeeaneesnseeeesensseseeetenseaeeneneensaces A 22 Appendix J Interface Standards ccccceesececeseeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeaeeseaeecaeeseeeeaeeseaeseeeeseeseaeeeeetes A 23 Appendix K Glossary Of Terms ccccceccessesseeceseeeseeceaeeeaeeceaeeeaeeeaeeeseeseaeseaeessaeseaeeesaeseaeeseeeteaees A 24 Quaarus Verifier User s Manual A 1 General Specifications Appendix A General Specifications Mechanical Height 9 88 251 mm Width 5 05 128 mm Depth 4 75 121 mm Weight 60 oz 1 700 g Environmental Operating Temperature 0 to 43 C 32 to 109 F If mounted on non metal surface maximum operating temperature is 40 C 104 F Storage Temperature 50 to 75 C 58 to 167 F Humidity Up to 90 non condensing Emissions mmunity ITE Disturbances IEC 55022 1998 radiated and conducted Class A General Immunity IEC 55024 1998 residential Heavy Industrial Immunity IEC 61000 6 2 1999 LED Radiation IEC 60825 1 Light Source Type High output LEDs External 45 30 660 nM Light Collection CCD array 656 x 496 pixels Video Output Signal System EIA RS 17
202. eater cable lengths are required and or where noise interference is an issue Definition Host 422 if enabled allows communication through the 422 I O lines When Host 422 is enabled RS 232 is disabled When Host 422 is disabled RS 232 is enabled Serial Cmd lt K102 host 422 gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 5 8 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Communications RS 232 Auxiliary Port The auxiliary port offers an alternative port that can be configured to communicate in RS 232 in several modes including Daisy Chain Auxiliary Port Connections As with the host port parameters the auxiliary port settings baud rate parity stop bits and data bits must be identical with those of the auxiliary device Note Aux port connections are not available when Ethernet is enabled Usage An auxiliary port connects the reader to a remote display or to other readers that can display or transfer data Definition These commands set the communication parameters with the auxiliary port which can be used to configure menus send data to the host display data transmissions originating from the host and relay data from other readers set in tandem daisy chained Baud Rate Aux Port Usage Can be used to transfer data faster or match an auxiliary device Definition The rate at which the reader and host transfer data back and forth Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain ID
203. eceeneeeeneeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeseeeeeaeeeeeeeaeesaeenaeesaeseaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 8 6 No Read Message sii tiie i a Mei ee a a ee 8 7 Bad No Symbol Qualification seistsiss5 etc dead Eara aaa ag eet saved had a a a ata eian 8 9 Read Duration QUIUE si csazis ees A a a a a a E a ee a sale ee aai Ea 8 16 OVI olaia ao E7 COIE EAEE EAA AATAS A EET 8 17 EITI 1e DETE EAE ETEA AAA E AEAEE 8 20 AoE ROIT 010i EEEE TEE E T TA e E ies 8 22 Image OuUDUt re a a a a AE aE AIE E Ea E E RNA 8 24 mage Capt NO eaa a aare ar r a AA Aa a aea eea Aae aate AAE RAE AAE EAEE ERA 8 26 Synchronous Triggers Ses cece eea A T a aa a Ea e a EaR 8 28 EZ TE ONA EEEE AE A TT AT E E E S 8 30 EZ Button Modes iert aa earo aah Eai a aan aa aa E a a ai a a e aS 8 32 Mpun i aeaa aa aa AER Ae a aae sad aera aaaea aaa ea ESE 8 34 Q tput T Parameters iiine a a a a EE E weak 8 35 Q tp t 2 Parametet Senisi a eevee ieee E A E E ae est 8 48 Ou tp t 3 Parameters vii eed ele delve aie E aed eae cee ea 8 52 Configuring EZ Trax Output ici iseen ir sa a E a EE Eaa e ETEN a neti 8 56 This section includes instructions on setting up conditions for changing input output electrical transitions for control of internal and external devices A discrete I O in out signal is an electrical transition from one voltage level to another so that digital switching can occur Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 1 I O Parameters by ESP I O Parameters by ESP fruit FL 0 Click this
204. ecode grade symbol contrast fixed pattern damage grade axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation grade unused error correction print growth value pixels per element value gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Value Synthetic Aperture Value highlighted below symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 0 11 3 0 43 3 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 23 ISO IEC 15415 Serial Output Wavelength Value Definition When enabled appends the LED illumination Wavelength Value to the verification output string Wavelength Value expresses the peak wavelength of LED light output measured in nanometers nm SerialCmd lt K756 grade aperture value wavelength value light angle value decode grade symbol contrast fixed pattern damage grade axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation grade unused error correction print growth value pixels per element value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Value Output Example Wavelength Value highlighted below symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 0 11 3 0 43 3 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 Light Angle Value Definition Defines the angle of incidence of LED illumination When enabled appends the LED Light Angle Value in degrees to the verification output string Serial Cmd lt K756 grade aperture value wavelength value light angle value decode grade symbol contrast fixed pattern damage grade axial non uniformity g
205. econdary Reader ID Dark Field Illumination Data Data Bits Aux Port Data Bits Host Port Data Element Separator Data Initiated from the Aux Port Data Initiated from the Host Data Initiated from the Verifier Data Matrix Data Matrix Symbol Comparison Data Matrix Symbology Data Qualifier Database Index Decode Decode ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Decode Direction Pharmacode Decode Grade Decode Rate Default Default all Settings Default Current Menu Settings Default Macros Default on Power On Default on Power On EZ Button Default Settings Defaulting Defaulting Saving Resetting Defining a Carriage Return as a Character Defining a Space as a Character Delete Master Symbol Data Delimited Depth of Field Detailed No Read Message Device Control Device Control by ESP Device Control By Serial Command DHCP Client DI Format 06 Diagnostics Diagnostics Output 1 Diagnostics Output 2 Diagnostics Output 3 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Index E Diagnostics by ESP Diagnostics Serial Commands Differences from Default Differences from Other Protocols Diffused Lighting Digital Imaging Digital Signal Processor Digital to Analog Converter Dimension 1 2D Symbology Qualification Dimension 2 2D Symbology Qualification Dimension Mode 2D Symbology Qualification Dimension Tolerance 2D Symbology Qualification Direct Part Mark Disable Reader Disclaimer Disconnect Message Disconnec
206. ed to any other character and you wish to re define the separator as a comma you will need to use ESP or the embedded menu Usage As required by the application Definition Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status sep arator character supplemental type gt Default Comma Options Any ASCII character Note Whenever Separator Character is defined as a comma sending a lt K473 s gt command will return the current settings including the separator character comma which appears after the separator status comma Supplemental Type UPC EAN Usage As required by symbology used in application Definition Allows the user to select 2 character or 5 character supplements or both Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status sep arator character supplemental type gt Default Both Options 0 Both 1 2 char only 2 5 char only Both Either 2 character or 5 character supplementals will be considered valid 2 Characters Only Only two character supplementals will be considered valid 5 Characters Only Only five character supplementals will be considered valid 7 18 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Symbologies Pharmacode Usage Used mostly with packaging for the pharmaceuticals industry Definition Encodes up to five different numbers each with its own color
207. efault Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 120 Definition ECC 120 is a legacy symbol and NOT part of the ISO IEC 15415 standard Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled ECC 130 Definition ECC 130 is a legacy symbol and NOT part of the ISO IEC 15415 standard Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 7 5 QR Code QR Code Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 7 6 Widely implemented in the automotive industry in Japan and throughout their worldwide supply chain The QR Code is capable of handling numeric alphanumeric byte data as well as Japanese kanji and kana characters Up to 7 366 characters numeric data can be encoded using this symbol Therefore less space is required to encode the same amount of data in the QR Code than ina conventional symbol helping to reduce the size of a symbol and lower the paper costs Three position detection patterns in the symbol make omnidirectional ultra fast reading possible QR Code has error correction capability Data can be frequently be restored even if a part of the symbol has become dirty or been d
208. efers to the deviation larger or smaller of actual element size from intended element size due to printing problems When a symbol is printed the ink may bleed when it comes in contact with the substrate causing an Overprint If there is not enough ink or if there is some other problem with printing equipment the result may be an Underprint Overprint Underprint Pixels Per Element Pixels Per Element refers to the number of pixels in each individual symbol element 10 pixels This magnified symbol detail contains 4 elements each with a width of 10 pixels 3 6 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification AS9132 Evaluation Parameters Dot Center Offset Cell Fill ae A symbol s Dot Center Offset value indicates the deviation of actual dot centers from theoretical or ideal dot centers Ideal dot XX Actual dot center center The difference between the ideal and actual dot centers is the Dot Center Offset value Cell Fill is the percentage of the ideal cell size that the module or element fills The example at left shows dot peen elements that overfill the ideal cell size The elements of the dots exceed the cell boundaries Dot Ovality is the extent to which round elements deviate from a perfect circle The example at left shows a symbol that would receive an unfavorable Dot Ovality evaluation D Module If D d gt 20 of nominal module size the
209. efinition Sets the minimum number of bars to qualify linear symbols Serial Cmd lt K717 minimum number of bars minimum number of qualified scans start stop status gt Default 0 Options 0 to 255 0 is disabled Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 9 Bad Symbol No Symbol Qualification Minimum Number of Qualified Scan Lines Definition Sets the minimum number of scans that have the required number of bars set in Minimum Number of Bars Serial Cmd lt K717 minimum number of bars minimum number of qualified scans start and stop status gt Default 0 Options 0 to 11 0 is disabled Start Stop Status Definition When enabled both Start and Stop characters need to be present to qualify as a decodable symbol In the case of PDF417 only a Stop or Stop needs to be present Note This parameter does not apply to UPC Pharmacode RSS and Micro PDF 41 7 Serial Cmd lt K717 minimum number of bars minimum number of qualified scans start and stop status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2D Symbology Qualification Note in the cases where Symbol Size Status Dimension Status or Orientation Status is enabled the reader will always check the finder pattern regardless of Finder Pattern Status setting Finder Pattern Status Definition Checks for the presence of finder pattern Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode
210. ement The number of pixels making up each symbol element Port Logical circuit for data entry and exit One or more ports may be included within a single connector Print Growth The extent to which dark or light symbol elements fill their module boundaries Processing Time The time used by a vision system to receive analyze and interpret image information Often expressed as parts per minute Progressive Scan A non interlaced scan that doubles the number of visible picture lines per field by displaying all picture lines at once Protocol tThe rules for communication between devices providing a means to control the orderly flow of information between linked devices Quiet Zone A clear space surrounding a symbol required for symbol readability RAM Random Access Memory for storage and retrieval of data Read Cycle A pre defined period of time during which the Verifier will accept symbol input Reference Decode Algorithm A decoding algorithm that can be found in a specific symbology specification Reference Gray Scale Image A plot of the reflectance values in x and y coordinates across a two dimensional image Reflectance Calibration The process of determining the optimal conditions for symbol verification in terms of reflected light from the substrate Region An area of an image Also called a Region of Interest for image processing operations RS 170 The Electronic Industries Association EIA stand
211. ent Symbol Data Symbol data Captured symbol image Firmware Version Verifier Serial Number This report was created on Saturday February 04 2006 at 21 30 46 Company XYZ Corp Operator J Doe Requirement Per Element Results gt One element gt 20 96 60 lt size lt 105 95 avg fo lt 20 3 avg lt 20 5 avg Fail if 2 of Element Fail 0 failed 0 failed 0 failed lt 7 Degrees 0 90 degree Ecc200 ECC200 PASS N A PASS ravo PASS PASS PASS 16x167 10 2 123 Data for non graded parameters Symbol Image Image scaled to 480x360 Verifier firmware version Verifier serial number report creation date ESP version company name and operator name Note See Preferences Tab for information about how to autofit PDF reports to a single page Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 87 Verification by ESP Save AS9132 Verification Report as an HTML File Default Report Type HTML Files htm X CSY Files csv Rich Text Edit Files rtf If you have already chosen HTML format in the Preferences dialog the report will be saved as an HTML file AS 9132A Verification Repo Marking Method DOT PEEN Element Shape round Requirement Fail if 2 of Parameters Per Element Results Element Fail Pass Fail Quiet Zone gt
212. entry lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt 0 any index 0 to 10 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Output Format Ordered Output Filter Definition Number of Filters refers to the number of active output filters 0 disables all output filters Any non zero numeral will enable filtering to be performed using the filter indexes covered by this value For example if the number of filters is 1 then only filter index 1 will be applied If the number of filters is 2 then only filter index 1 and filter index 2 will be applied etc Serial Cmd lt K745 number of filters gt Default 0 Options 0 to 10 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 15 13 Ordered Output Filter 15 14 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual eee 16 Ethernet Contents Stepi Setup Hass nei che sie nee a nit tt eed ee i te cette 16 2 step 2 Preliminaty Steps 2 205 ao ua age nai he ie ee en a 16 3 Step 3 Communicating in Ethernet cceccecceesseeseeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeecsaeeeseeeeaeeeaeeeseeseaeteeessaeenaeesaaes 16 7 Step 4 Ethernet Application nri nicitoriii cael Le 16 8 While it is possible to connect the Quadrus Verifier directly to your host computer by Ethernet TCP IP typical usage is in a networked environment with either a switch or router Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 16 1 Setup Step 1 Setup For Ethernet setup you will need 1 A Quadrus Verifier 2 An Ethernet US
213. er ends the read cycle but the next read cycle does not begin until the occurrence of the next rising edge trigger Timeout or New Trigger Usage Useful in applications that require an alternative way to end the read cycle For example if an assembly line should stop completely or the intervals between objects are highly irregular Definition Timeout or New Trigger is identical to Timeout except that a timeout ora new trigger whichever occurs first ends the read cycle Last Frame Usage Useful in applications in which the number of captures needed can be defined but the timeout duration varies Definition Last Frame only applies to Rapid Capture mode Last Frame or New Trigger Usage Useful in applications in which line speeds are irregular and a new labeled object could appear before the last frame in a Rapid Capture sequence Definition New Trigger or Last Frame is identical to New Trigger except that a new trigger or last frame whichever occurs first ends the read cycle Read Cycle Timeout Definition Read Cycle Timeout is the duration of the read cycle Serial Cmd lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout gt Default 100 x 10mS Options 0 to 65535 6 16 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Read Cycle Active Camera Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options External and Dual options are useful where in applications where the reader cannot be located near the symbol or where both the interna
214. er matched impedance that the standard CAT 5 cable provides thus allowing higher emission levels which exceed Class A CE limits and possible further signal degradation Quadrus Verifier User s Manual A 9 Connectivity Accessories Terminal Strip Interface Kit Custom terminal strip wiring can be done through this interface which can either connect directly to the Verifier or indirectly by way of the aux port Note This kit includes a gender changer The gender changer is only used for direct connection between the interface and the Verifier O 1s0H z 2 2 z o D fa 3 8 AUX PORT To Quadrus Verifier 0S 1 8 O YIMOd 4399141 Note Inside terminal assembly can be flipped over as required by application 25 Steps for wiring 3 e eeeeeeeveeee O EREEREER EKEKE E 1 Remove two screws from plug 1 top case at these locations 2 Pry at this point to separate VA cases 3 Connect external wires to UIII trina comectons as marked CLL eoec2 Rii09 8765 43 2 1 e CEE EEEE EEE E E 25 24 23 14 Qeeeaq 21 20 19 18 17 Reese C nunnu 2 222 16 A 10 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Appendices Appendix D Serial Configuration Commands Communications Host Port Connections lt K100 b
215. er of symbols multisymbol separator gt 1 1 to6 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 6 5 Multisymbol Multisymbol Separator Usage Used to delimit or separate data fields with a user defined character Definition Any valid ASCII character inserted between each symbol read when Multisymbol is set to any number greater than 1 Serial Cmd lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Note If Multisymbol Separator has been changed to any other character than the default comma and you wish to re define the separator as a comma use ESP or the embedded menus Default comma Options Any available ASCII character except lt or gt if used as delimiters Note If a NULL is entered for the multisymbol separator the multisymbol separator output will be disabled Note If No Read messages are disabled and there are No Reads occurring separators will only be inserted between symbol data outputs 6 6 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Read Cycle Trigger Definition The type of trigger event that will initiate the read cycle Note When perofming calibration or read rate testing the current trigger setting will be disregarded Trigger Mode Serial Cmd lt K200 trigger mode trigger filter duration gt Default External Edge Options 0 Continuous Read 1 Continuous Read 1 Output 2 External Level 3 External Edge 4 Serial Data 5 Serial Data and External Edge Continuous Read Usage Continuous Read is usefu
216. er s Manual Introduction Microscan Limited Warranty Statement and Exclusions What Is Covered Microscan Systems Inc warrants to the original purchaser that products manufactured by it will be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one year from the date of shipment This warranty is specifically limited to at Microscan s sole option repair or replacement with a functionally equivalent unit and return without charge for service or return freight What Is Excluded This limited warranty specifically excludes the following 1 Any products or parts that have been subject to misuse neglect accident unauthorized repair improper installation or abnormal conditions or opera tions 2 Any products or parts that have been transferred by the original purchaser 3 Customer mis adjustment of settings contrary to the procedure described in the Microscan Systems Inc owners manual 4 Upgrading software versions at customer request unless required to meet specifications in effect at the time of purchase 5 Units returned and found to have no failure will be excluded 6 Claims for damage in transit are to be directed to the freight carrier upon receipt Any use of the product is at purchaser s own risk This limited warranty is the only warranty provided by Microscan Systems Inc regarding the product Except for the limited warranty above the product is provided as is To the maximu
217. erial Cmd lt K841 dot center offset cell fill dot ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone gt See AS9132 Symbol Quality Output 1 for command structure and options 8 50 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Diagnostics Output 2 Note Output On under Output 2 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Output 2 Parameters Output On Diagnostic Warning Se Diagnostics Over Temperature Disabled Disabled v Service Unit Disabled gt Disabled External Camera Disconnect Disabled Enabled Serial Cmd lt K791 over temp service unit external camera disconnect gt See Diagnostics Output 1 for command structure and options Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 51 Output 3 Parameters Output 3 Parameters Note The Quadrus Verifier does not have an Output 3 option by default If your application requires an Output 3 contact your Microscan sales representative for more information Output 3 has the same parameters and default settings as Output 1 and Output 2 Output 3 Parameters Output On Symbol Quality Output State Normally Open Pulse Width 5 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Symbol Quality ISO 15415 Symbol Quality 4591324 Diagnostic Settings SerialCmd lt K812 output on active state oulse width output mode gt Output On Output 3 Output 3 Parameters r Mismatch or Noread Output State Mismatch or
218. ermine read rates or perform miscellaneous operations on reader hardware Serial utility commands are not prefaced with a K and a numeric code Nor do they require an initialization command lt A gt and lt Z gt They can be entered from within any terminal program or from within ESP in the Terminal window or the window adjacent to the Utilities menu Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 14 1 Serial Utility Commands Serial Utility Commands Read Rate lt C gt Enter Decode Rate Test lt Cp gt Enter Percent Rate Test lt J gt Exit Decode Rate and Percent Rate Test Counter Request lt N gt No Read Counter and Clear lt O gt No Read Counter Reset lt T gt Trigger Counter lt U gt Trigger Counter Reset lt V gt Good Read Match Counter lt W gt Good Read Match Counter Reset lt X gt Mismatch Counter lt Y gt Mismatch Counter Reset Master Database lt E gt Enable Master Symbol lt F gt Disable Master Symbol lt G gt Store next Symbol read to Database lt M gt Request Master Symbol Information Part Number and lt gt Display Software Code Part Numbers Checksum lt a gt Display Application Code Part Number lt b gt Display Boot Code Part Number lt d gt Display DSP Part Number lt f gt Display FPGA Part Number lt gt Display all 3 Checksums of Flash memory lt la gt Display Ap
219. ervals throughout a full 360 rotation The overall symbol grade is based on an arithmetic mean of the results from the five reads Starting Multiple Image Verification Step 1 Place symbol with Step 2 Rotate 72 degrees Step 3 Rotate 72 degrees Step 4 Rotate 72 degrees Step 5 Rotate 72 degrees 4 6 05 7666 REFERENCE DECODE SYMBOL CONTRAST FIXED PATTERN DAMAGE AXIAL NON UNIFORMITY GRID NON UNIFORMITY MODULATION UNUSED ECC FINAL GRADES OVERALL GRADE NON GRADED PARAMETERS PRINT GROWTH 45 degree rotation then initiate trigger then initiate trigger then initiate trigger then initiate trigger then initiate trigger 15415 VERIFICATION REP SYMBOL TYPE ECC266 SYMBOL SIZE 16x18 ELEMENT SIZE 6 619 PIXELS ELEMENT 18 6 SYMBOL DATA 3 48 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification AS9132 JES 131 Marking Method Element Shape Definition The shape of the symbol s printed dot peen or Etch markings Each symbol element represents one bit 0 or 1 of binary data Symbol elements can be either round or square provided that they are consistent in size and spacing throughout the symbol Choice of Element Shape setting should be based on the actual element shape used in the symbol being verified Serial Cmd lt K711 element shape marking method JES 131 gt Default Round Options 0 Round 1 Square Marking Method Definition The marking method u
220. es htm X CSY Files csv If you have already chosen HTML format in the Preferences dialog the report will Rich Text Edit Files rtf be saved as an HTML file MICROSCAN PUETE Bar Code Scanners 2D imagers Parameters Results Grade Reference Decode PASS 4 A Cell Contrast 80 4 A Fixed Pattern Damage B lt 4 A Axial Non Uniformity Verification 0 07 3 B results and Grid Non Uniformity grades 0 22 4 A Call Modulation 4 A Unused ECC 100 4 A Minimum Reflectance 100 4 A Final Grade 3 B DPM 3 0 04 660 45Q Non Graded Parameters a Data for Print Growth 0 06 Symbol Size 16x16 non graded Symbol Type ecc200 Element Size 8 5 Pixels 0 009 parameters Symbol Data Symbol data Aperture 0 004 Wavelength 660 nm Lighting 45Q Firmware Version 3 676201 12 j wae yanar se Monier 0420303 PEAS Reference data Verifier firmware version nesday Novem X a 27 pas h j Microscan PEP Version 3 4 1 6 Verifier serial number report creation date Company AAA Acme Readers ESP version company name and operator Operator Joe Operator name Any Label Any Data 3 94 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Save AIM DPM Verification Report as a CSV File Default Report Type csv Files cs v X CS Files csv Rich Text Edit Files rtf If you have already chosen
221. es Check Digit and Check Digit Output status e For Code 39 only Full ASCII needs to be enabled to see modifiers 4 5 and 7 Modifier Check Digit KT Full ascii ahea R 0 Disabled N A No 1 Enabled Enabled No 3 Enabled Disabled No 4 Disabled N A Yes 5 Enabled Enabled Yes 7 Enabled Disabled Yes Example JA5 indicates a Code 39 symbol with Check Digit and Check Digit Output enabled and Full ASCII conversion performed Explanation of Modifiers for Other Symbologies e For Code 128 a 1 indicates ECC EAN 1 28 otherwise the modifier is a 0 For QR Code a 0 indicates Model 1 a 1 indicates Model 2 e For all other codes the modifier is 0 Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 7 29 Background Color Background Color Usage If the background is darker than the symbol then enable black background Typically the background is white but on PCBs for example they can be black Definition Allows the user to choose which symbol background white or black the reader can read SerialCmd lt K451 background color gt Default White Options 0 White 1 Black 7 30 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Eee 8 0 Parameters Contents O Patameters by ESP rrekoa inte a E a or ee 8 2 I O Parameters Serial COMMANAS eccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaaeeeaeeeaeeseaeesaeesaeesaeeseaeeeieeeeaeeeaees 8 3 Symbol Dat Outputs 22hie4 nth nih Ae eA ass ee 8 4 When to Output Symbol Data 0 ce eecec
222. eteeseeeeneeeneees 3 42 ISO IEC 15415 Verification by Serial Command eeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 44 AS9132 JES 131 Marking Method ceccecceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeereaes 3 49 AS9132 JES 131 Marking Method by ESP 0 0 0 eeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 51 AS9132 Setial Outputss 205 eed poviie hn Maas als eel didnt 3 53 AS9132 Output by ES Pirna ao a A ea 3 62 AS9132 Verification by Serial Command ceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeteeeneees 3 67 AIM DPM Verification by Serial COmMMANG ccceeceeeeteeeeeteeeeeeteeees 3 68 Verification by ESPiwa nci uses oho aaa akin aalsdi detain 3 70 iv Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Introduction Chapter 4 Unique Item Identifiers Overview of IUID and Ull nn eee cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeteaeeseeeenaees 4 2 Non Ull Characters sennae enren ranae a aE anaE 4 3 Ul Mode Features iriennerien aiaiai aa ea aap eeeeieceebeccennsandee ce 4 4 Error Messaging its c s ei aia ee aol nda en ee 4 6 Valid Data Qualifier Formats ccceceeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeneeseaeeneetaees 4 8 UI Parsings iiss E ei en nia eh ae 4 9 Chapter 5 Communications Communications by ESP ission iioii ina a a aaa a aa aii 5 2 Communications Serial COMMANAS eccecceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeneeteeteeetes 5 3 RS 232 422 Host Port ssssie nace aa ela eel ee 5 4 RS 232 Auxiliary Pomiss scteestvereeittiahs a urate aa Te a ae hanes 5 9 Network EPEE AET T A A AET 5 18 Een E E E A AA 5 21 Eao a E AE E
223. f ABC will be highlighted in the Terminal window 3 Click the Find button to the right of the text field to locate additional instances of ABC Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 13 3 Send Send The Send function allows you to enter serial commands and then send them to the Verifier For example you need to perform a single capture verification routine on a symbol 1 Type the single capture command lt V1 gt into the Send box os B amp E DATA Configuration Camera Terminal Utilities Output Format Send j lt Vi gt 2 Press Enter Single capture verification will occur and a report will be generated in the Terminal window 3 Click the Send button to the left of the text field to initiate additional single capture verification routines 13 4 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Terminal Macros Macros can be stored in a macro selection bar edited in a separate window and executed by clicking on the macro name Default Macros Add Macro woh Row t Number Checksum Disable Scanning Enable Scanning Exit Read Cycle Click on subsequent For Help press F1 j arrows to Edit macros Click on Next Click on the first arrow here to see Row to see Add Macro or Default Macros the next row of When you default macros the entire macros macros set is restored to original commands When you click on the macro name the macro is executed in the Termin
224. fter a connect condition with connect message enabled Note If the external camera is configured in Interlaced mode instead of Progressive this will be detected as a Disconnect condition Serial Cmd lt K410 disconnect msg siatus disconnect message connect msg status connect message gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disconnect Message Serial Cmd lt K410 disconnect msg status disconnect message connect msg status connect message gt Default EX_CAM_OFF Options Any 1 to 10 ASCII characters except NULL lt or gt Connect Status Definition When enabled a message is sent when the system detects that the external camera is connected Conditions On power on if enabled and the external camera is connected the connect message will be output The message will not be output again unless power is cycled or a connect condition occurs after a disconnect condition with connect message enabled Note If the external camera is configured in Interlaced mode instead of Progressive this will not be detected as a connect condition Serial Cmd lt K410 disconnect msg status disconnect message connect msg status connect message gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 10 4 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Diagnostics Connect Message Serial Cmd lt K410 disconnect msg status disconnect message connect msg status connect message gt Default
225. fter report options are chosen determine where the report will be stored on the host hard drive in the Save As dialog Once you have specified a file name and clicked Save ESP will begin transferring report data to the chosen directory location When the data transfer is complete the verification report will appear in the chosen location on your hard drive Open the folder and click on the report file You can choose PDF HTML RTF or CSV format for report output ISO IEC 15415 Single Capture Verification Report ISO IEC 15415 Verification Report Parameters Results Grade R ASS 4A Verification Kis a results and i des Axial Non Uniformity 00i A A gra Grid Non Unifarmity 0 03 4 A Modulator A A Jressed ECC 100 aA Symbol data Final Grade 4A A Symbol Data Non Graded Parameters si ei Data for non graded parameters C pt red bol Reference data Verifier firmware version aa ured Sy moo gt Verifier serial number report creation age date ESP version company name and operator name gth 660 qm Angla 45 degrees 3S on Tuesday December 13 2005 at 12 06 01 Operator J Doa Note PDF version shown here 1 14 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Quick Start ISO IEC 15415 Multi Capture Verification Report Symbol Image Image scaled to
226. g Mode lt K513 processing mode gt Multiple Symbols in Fast Linear Mode lt K518 number of symbols gt Image Processing Timeout lt K245 image processing timeout gt Hollow Mode lt K517 hollow status gt Mirrored Image lt K514 mirrored image gt Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 11 3 Video Video In the Camera menu you can locate and capture images just as in EZ Mode when first starting ESP Locate Activates the target pattern and the video view in ESP to help you center the symbol in the field of view Calibrate If you haven t already calibrated the symbol 1 Click the Locate button and center the target pattern over the symbol 2 Click the Calibrate button to optimize read rate The Verifier will search through various IP image processing settings to determine the best configuration for verifying symbols A successful calibration will display the calibrated symbol image a message Calibrated successfully 3 Click Close on the Calibration dialog The symbol s data and related features will be presented below the image display window Calibrate by Serial Command Send lt CAL gt to begin calibration 11 4 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Camera Setup Capture and Decode After calibration click the Capture and Decode button Video Evaluation ROI IP Database Dynamic Setup Calibrate I Fast M Auto Syne with Reader Capture and Decode button Capture and Decode Test Stop
227. g Settings Set Trigger Mode lt K200 gt to External Edge Trigger mde sternal Edge Trigger Filter Duration Continuous Read External Trigger State Continuous Read 1 Output External Level External Edge Serial Data Serial Data and Edge Set Capture Mode lt K241 gt to Rapid Capture Rapid Capture Rapid Capture Once these Read Cycle parameters are set you will be ready to connect to EZ Trax Capture Mode For more detailed information about using EZ Trax refer to the Help menu in EZ Trax software or the EZ Trax Quick Start Guide available on the Microscan Tools CD Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 6 31 Setting Up the Verifier for EZ Trax 6 32 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual E 7 Sy mbologies Contents Symbologies by ESP cseceecceeseeceeceeseeeeseeeseensaeecaaeesaeeeaaesseceaeeceaeseaeeseeeeaeeeseeeesaeseeeseaeesaneeees 7 2 Symbologies Serial Commands cceceeeceeeneeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeceaeeeeeesaeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeaeesieeeeeeeeaees 7 3 Datta Matrix e arenie aei aaaea aaa oa a E araara A aA ae janes tusudedvsc dea O EEEE EENE 7 4 QR Code neono a ie a ee ed ed 7 6 Code BO cies ee r ee ee tid 7 7 Code 128 sissies Seabed Pein Ae ae eG ee 7 10 BGA 2 ieor ae etd RE ea 7 11 Interleaved 2 Of Sanres mee E N A E E N E 7 13 UPC EAN gst Sec Shee re a A E E Pee Liebe 7 16 Plhatitmacode 4 2 ue ea eR E A 7 19 RSS Expanded sisne eean E O i ea Rew i A 7 21 RSS LiMtEO
228. ge scaled to 480x360 Captured symbol image Aperture 0 000 Wavelength 660 nm Angle 45 degrees Firmware Version 35 676201 E2 Verifier Serial Number This report was created on Wednesday February 01 2006 at 14 57 02 Software Version 3 2 1 0 Company XYZ Corp Operator J Doe 3 76 Reference data Verifier firmware version Verifier serial number report creation date ESP version company name and operator name ate Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Save Single Capture Verification Report as a CSV File Default Report Type csv Files cs v v If you have already chosen CSV format in the Preferences dialog the report will be saved as a CSV file CSV output is in a spreadsheet format with all parameters listed in a horizontal orientation Columns A I e Symbol Data Reference Decode Grade e Symbol Contrast e Fixed Pattern Damage e Axial Non Uniformity Columns J P e Grid Non Uniformity e Modulation e Unused ECC e Final Grade Columns Q W Print Growth Symbol Type Pixels Per Element Aperture Wavelength Angle Columns X AC Firmware Version e Verifier Serial Number Date Time ESP Version Company Operator i File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Osea e6 hY IBA S x 4 R32 2 f A B C D E F G H l 1 Sym_DataRef_Dec Sym_Con Fixed_Pat_Dam Axial_Nu 2 123 PASS 4 A 81 4 A
229. gger character that starts the read cycle and is not enclosed by delimiters such as lt and gt lt K229 start character gt NULL 00 disabled Two hex digits representing an ASCII character except lt gt XON and XOFF Stop Character Non Delimited Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 6 14 It is useful in applications where different characters are required to start and end a read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that ends the read cycle and is not enclosed by delimiters such as lt and gt lt K230 stop character gt NULL 00 disabled Two hex digits representing an ASCII character except lt gt XON and XOFF Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Read Cycle End of Read Cycle Definition The read cycle is the time during which the reader will attempt to capture and decode a symbol A read cycle can be ended by a timeout a new trigger or by the last frame in a capture sequence or a combination of the above End of Read Cycle Mode Note When operating in Continuous Read or Continuous Read 1 Output the reader is always in the read cycle Serial Cmd lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout gt Default Last Frame Options 0 Timeout 1 New Trigger 2 Timeout or New Trigger 3 Last Frame 4 Last Frame or New Trigger Timeout Usage Typically used with Serial Data or Edge Trigger and Continuous One Output Effective in highly controlled applicati
230. gt RSS Limited lt K483 status gt RSS 14 lt K482 status gt PDF417 lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol Micro PDF417 length unused codeword collection gt lt K485 status usused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Composite lt K453 mode separator status separator gt Narrow Margins lt K450 narrow margins symbology identifier status gt Symbology ID Background Color lt K451 background color gt Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 7 3 Data Matrix Data Matrix The Quadrus Verifier is certified for verification of Data Matrix ECC 200 symbols per the ISO IEC 15415 and AS9132 standards Usage Useful when information needs to be packed into a small area and or when symbols need to be applied directly to the substrate with etching dot peen or other methods Definition Data Matrix is a type of Matrix symbology and has subsets ECC 000 200 ECC 200 symbols have an even number of rows and an even number of columns Most of the symbols are square with sizes from 10 x 10 to 144 x 144 Some symbols however are rectangular with sizes from 8 x 18 to 16 x 48 All ECC 200 symbols can be recognized by the upper right corner module being light binary 0 ECC 200 Definition When enabled will decode ECC 200 symbols Serial Cmd lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC 100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC
231. gt RSS 14 lt K482 status gt PDF417 lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection gt Micro PDF417 lt K485 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Composite Narrow Margins Symbology ID lt K453 mode separator status separator gt lt K450 narrow margins symbology identifier status gt Background Color lt K451 background color gt Unique Item Identifiers UII IO Parameters lt K455 status errstatus gt Symbol Data Output lt K705 symbol data output status when to output gt No Read Message lt K714 no read message status no read message gt Bad Symbol Message lt K715 unused message gt No Symbol Message lt K716 unused message gt 1D Stacked Symbology Qualification lt K717 minimum number of bars minimum number of qualified scans start stop status gt 2D Symbology Qualification lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Read Duration Output lt K706 status separator gt LED Indicators lt K750 green flash mode target pattern status green flash duration gt Beeper lt K702 beeper status gt LED Configuration lt K737 LED mode ISO IEC 15415 grade DPM grade gt Serial Verificatio
232. haracter When enabled the Verifier will read UPC version A and UPC version E only lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status sep arator character supplemental type gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled EAN Status UPC EAN Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 7 16 EAN is the European version of the UPC symbology and is used in European market applications Note UPC must be enabled for EAN to take effect EAN is a subset of UPC When enabled the Verifier will read UPC version A UPC version E EAN 13 and EAN 8 It also appends a leading zero to UPC version A symbol information and transmits 13 digits If transmitting 13 digits when reading UPC version A symbols is not desired disable EAN Note The extra character identifies the country of origin lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Symbologies Supplementals Status UPC EAN Usage Reads Supplementals typically used in publications and documentation Definition A supplemental is a 2 or 5 digit symbol appended to the main symbol When set to Enabled or Required the Verifier reads supplemental bar code data that has been appended to the standard UPC or EAN codes Serial Cmd lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplement
233. hat will transpire before the service message is output Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default 300 5 minutes Options 1 to 65535 Resolution Definition Records time in seconds or minutes Serial Cmd lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Default Seconds Options 0 Seconds 1 Minutes Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 10 7 Service Message 10 8 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual E 17 Camera Setup Contents Gamera Setup by ESP vt sscsractisec aE A a R tata a E a E E aaa 11 2 Camera Setup Serial COMMANAS ccceecceesceeeeeeeneeceeeeeaeeeseeseaeeeaeecaeenaeeesaeeeaeeseaeseaeetseeeeaeeteas 11 3 VideO wih atte in een Yin aii dance an aed een ny 11 4 Evaluation sssk hatin Ait eee i O A E 11 6 Region of Interest ROI 05 gest ah eas ee Se ead ee NA 11 10 IP Database iiss AS ee ee ee ee 11 13 Dynamic Setup wide ce ee nee ee ee ees 11 14 CaMe lancet died ae enna etd eee eel ve ied 11 16 lll mination Source na eid i en Ml a ee lee 11 17 THreShOlding iaitendiite decid AiO han eae a ae i a e R 11 18 Image Processing Settings micri enio n EEE EE E E EEE N 11 19 FHOMOW MOG eis EE E ESE EEEE EEE EEE ened SL Lagden cele bev deeded 11 21 Mirrored image Aea hae Ae ee es ee a eatlaehae 11 22 This section explains the physical controls of the internal camera image acquisition database settings and image diagnostics Note Camera Setup only applies to the Quadru
234. hcode by ESP MINN ay To open the entire contents of the tree control hold down the Alt Ea ii key and single click the To close the entire contents of the tree control hold down the Alt Matchcode key and single click the Click this button to bring up the Matchcode menu Parameters Matchcode Matchcode Type Disabled Sequential Matching Increment Match Start Position 0 Match Length 1 Wild Card Sequence on Noread Enabled Sequence on Mismatch Disabled Sequence Step 1 New Master Pin Disabled To open nested options p gt Match Replace Disabled single click the Disabled Disabled To change a setting double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options 9 2 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Matchcode Matchcode Serial Commands Matchcode Type lt K223 type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on no read sequence on mismatch gt Sequence Step lt K228 sequence step gt Match Replace lt K735 status replacement string gt Mismatch Replace lt K736 status replacement string gt New Master Pin lt K225 status gt Number of Master Symbols lt K224 number of master symbols gt Enter Master Symbol Data lt K231 master symbol number data gt Read Next Symbol as Master Symbol lt Gmaster symbol number gt Request Master Symbol Data
235. he Region of Interest image will only be shown in triggered video mode When in live video mode the entire image from the image sensor will be shown 2 If external camera is in use the command will range check for the camera and will allow a larger row and column size then the sensor has The overall operation of the Window of Interest will not be effected if a larger row or column size is selected 3 The Region of Interest can be disabled by setting all values to 0 or setting the Region of Interest area to equal the image sensor area Region of Interest Top Left Height Width ooo a Caution Region of Interest will shrink the field of view and therefore could cause symbols to be missed in dynamic applications 11 10 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Camera Setup Region of Interest by ESP 1 From the Camera menu click the ROI tab to bring up Region of Interest If you haven t already captured an image click the Capture and Decode button to decode the present image If successful the Good Read indicator on the ROI tab will be green and the symbol will appear in the pane below Note You can resize the image by clicking and dragging the ESP window from the lower right corner This is useful where very small symbols are being read 2 Click and drag your cursor over the symbol that you want to isolate for reading Notice that the surrounding area goes black You can use the handles on the image area that you have just drawn to
236. he Verification view EP ESP Untitled DER Fie Model Options Connect Help gt ey App Mode Autoconnect Send Recy _ Switch Model Report Settings Preferences Welcome to Easy Setup Program ISOAEC 15415 AS91324 Verification AIM DPM Quality Guideline 1 The first step before grading a symbol is to place the calibrated symbol in the center of the field of view FOV The reference decode algorithm generates an Locate Calibrate initial threshold based on what is located in the center of the FOV Save Report Humination intemal finer and outer ings z 2 Click Locate to begin This view allows the user to center the symbol before calibrating For Help press Fl Quadrus Verifier 1 Quadrus Verifier A Point to Point COMI 1115 2K The Quadrus Verifier comes with a reference card that features a Verifier Calibration Symbol and two numbers the minimum and maximum reflectance values for ISO IEC 15415 and AIM DPM Reflectance Calibration Keep this card in a safe place It is the Verifier s most critical setup tool Use the symbol provided at the top of the Verifier Calibration Symbol card to perform Reflectance Calibration Place the symbol at the center of the field of view Be sure the plane of the symbol is as close to perpendicular as possible relative to the Verifier s orientation VERIFIER CALIBRATION SYMBOL R MAX XX R MIN XX
237. he environment of a vision system and that is generated from outside sources This light unless used for actual field of view illumination will be treated as background noise by the vision system Analog A smooth continuous voltage or current signal From the word analogous meaning similar to Analog Gain Adjustment AGC Adjustment of signal strength that seeks to maintain a constant level regardless of the range of the candidate symbol Analog to Digital Converter ADC A device that converts an analog voltage or current signal to a discrete series of digitally encoded numbers signal for processing Angle of Distortion The deviation from a 90 degree relation between a 2D symbol s rows and columns Architecture For a vision system the hardware organization designed for high speed image analysis AS9132 The Aerospace Standard for direct part marking DPM using Data Matrix symbols ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit All vision system elements including firmware can be integrated onto one ASIC Aspect Ratio The ratio between the height and width of a sensor or display It is found by dividing the vertical number of pixels height by the horizontal number of pixels width Auxiliary Port An alternate port that can be configured to communicate in RS 232 in several modes including Daisy Chain Axial Non Uniformity Uneven scaling of a 2D symbol s grid Baud Rate Bits per second or the number
238. he first Good Read image and the first No Read image will be output immediately following the read cycle output postamble 8 24 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Communications Port Image Output Definition The communications port to which the image will be sent Serial Cmd lt K739 image output mode com port file format JPEG quality gt Default Host Options 0 Host 1 Aux 2 Network File Format Image Output Definition File format of the output image Serial Cmd lt K739 image output mode com port file format JPEG quality gt Default JPEG Options 0 Bitmap 1 JPEG 2 Binary Bitmap Outputs the image in a bitmap format JPEG Outputs the image in a JPEG format Binary Outputs the image in a raw binary format JPEG Quality Image Output Definition Determines the relative quality of the JPEG image sent with 100 being the highest quality Serial Cmd lt K739 image output mode com port file format JPEG quality gt Default 90 Options 1 to 100 where 100 is the highest quality Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 25 Image Captioning Image Captioning Usage Useful in verifying data output visually in real time Definition Overlays text onto the specified image The text displayed is dependent on the captioning mode that is enabled The text captioning is overlaid onto the image frame that is output to the video port and will be displayed on the uploaded image for that image frame
239. hed processing receiving an image from the previous read cycle the trigger will be ignored This is done to ensure that ESP remains in sync with the reader 11 14 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Camera Setup Calculator The Calculator is a convenient tool to help visualize and control the spacing of rapid captures To use the calculator 1 From the Dynamic window click Show Calculator The Calculator window will appear with the number of captures shown Calculator Scale 0 00 Pixels per inch Ci Application Information p Number of Captures 1 ID _ Delay in seconds Transport Speed 0 0 in sec Results 1 0 000000 Lens Type Lens Type v Overlap N A Focal Distance 14 000 in Total Coverage 0 000 in Standard Metric Field of View 0 000 in 2 Enter the line speed under Transport Speed 3 Select Lens Type and Focal Distance 4 You can now enter in delays individually before each capture Delay 1 is the same at the Delay Sec entered in the Dynamic window You can change the delay before the first capture by moving the sliding horizon bar in the Dynamic window and clicking Show Calculator You can also click on any of the delays including the first and directly type in the delay time into any of the delays The spacing of the captures C1 through Cn represents the number of captures that will fall within the reader s FOV during the captures taken in the rapid capture burst Quaaru
240. hietind neds dena Bide ti ee eek races 3 70 This section describes the verification process including specification requirements software configuration step by step procedures and report output Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 1 Verification Serial Commands Verification Serial Commands ISO IEC 15415 Verification Setup lt K531 aperture wavelength angle reflectance maximum reflectance minimum gt AIM DPM Verification Setup lt K532 minimum element size maximum element size wavelength lighting gt General Verification Serial Output lt K708 separator character unused 0 ISO grade type symbol type symbol dimension size gt AS9132 JES 131 Marking Method lt K711 element shape marking method JES 131 gt AS9132 Serial Output lt K712 dot center offset percentage failed offset cell fill percentage failed cell fill dot ovality percentage failed ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet Zone grade pixels per element value gt ISO IEC 15415 Serial Output lt K756 grade aperture value wavelength value light angle value decode grade symbo contrast fixed pattern damage grade axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation grade unused error correction print growth value pixels per element value gt Verification Operational Commands ISO IEC 15415 Reflectance Calibration lt VER gt ISO IEC 15415 Single Capture Verification lt V1 gt ISO IEC 15415 Mul
241. ht Control Light Control 23 Input 1 Input 1 Input 1 24 New master New master New master 25 New master New master New master A 8 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Appendices Ethernet USB Interface USB and standard Ethernet RJ45 connections can be made through the Ethernet USB Interface which plugs directly into the host port of the Quadrus Verifier The Ethernet USB Interface has a second 25 pin port to pass through all but the RS 422 485 connections USB Connector Ethernet socket socket To Quadrus Verifier 3 2 14 l pA h d 8 1 O O E O a O E E E E Category 5 cabling less E ocecceoooooop 4 than 50 m in length is recommended 35 Host Connector plug Ethernet USB Pin Ethernet Port Pin USB Port 1 Ethernet TX 1 5VDC 2 Ethernet TX 2 Data 3 Ethernet RX 3 Data 4 NC 4 GND 5 NC 6 Ethernet RX 7 NG Host 8 NG Pin Host Port 13 NC 14 NC 16 NC 19 NC a All other pins are as shown on the Verifier port Ethernet USB Notes e Protection components are installed within the interface to address Ethernet susceptibility to line transients and electrostatic discharge ESD that can cause communication dropouts and connection termination e The matching cable does not provide the prop
242. iagnostic Warnings Output 1 lt K790 over temp service unit external camera disconnect gt ISO IEC 15415 Verification Output 1 lt K830 grade decode symbol contrast fixed pattern damage axial non unifor mity grid non uniformity modulation unused error correction print growth value gt AS9132 Verification Output 1 lt K840 dot center offset cell fill dot ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone gt Output 2 Parameters lt K811 output on active state pulse width output mode gt Trend Analysis Output 2 lt K781 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt Diagnostic Warnings Output 2 lt K791 over temp service unit external camera disconnect gt ISO IEC 15415 Verification Output 2 lt K831 grade decode symbol contrast fixed pattern damage axial non unifor mity grid non uniformity modulation unused error correction print growth value gt AS9132 Verification Output 2 lt K841 dot center offset cell fill dot ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone gt Note The Quadrus Verifier does not have an Output 3 option by default If your application requires an Output 3 contact your Microscan sales representative for more information Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Symbol Data Output Symbol Data Output Note Symbol Data Output relates to data and should not to be confused with Outputs 1 2 and 3 listed in the Outputs Parameters
243. ial Cmd lt K741 output index length hex string gt Default NULL 00 Options 00 to FF As many as 4 bytes or hex pairs Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 15 7 Format Insert 15 8 Format Insert by ESP Symbol Parse Insert x Step Insert Data Extract Range SP SP Insert SOH STX ETX E0T ENOJ ACK BEL BS HT LF vT FE cnf so si s1 et Dc2 Dc3 Dea Nak SYN ETB CAN EM sup Esc _Fs s Rs us sP Click Delete to remove characters Add Step Remove Step Clear All Parsing Cancel Sample Symbol Parse Original ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRS TUYWv201 23456789 Dutput the Insertion Calculator shown above OK Cancel The Format Insert process is very similar to the Format Extract process except that Insert allows you to enter characters using g Symbol Parse Pae amoi Send andSave_ Insert Hide Parse Table Extract Build Sequence Test Step InsetData ExtractRange Insert SP SP Extract 3 5 Notice that Extract and Insert share the same Parse Table Add Step Remove Step Clear AII Parsing Sample Symbol Parse Sample Symbol Parse Original micro Original ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPGRSTUVWxY201 23456789 Output cro lt 4 Output CDE Cancel Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Output Format Output Filter Configuration Definition Output filtering is a meth
244. ic and alphabetical grade 85 668 PARAMETER RESULTS REFERENCE DECODE SYMBOL CONTRAST FIXED PATTERN DAMAGE AXIAL NON UNIFORMITY GRID NON UNIFORMITY MODULATION UNUSED ECC FINAL GRADE NON GRADED PARAMETERS PRINT GROWTH SYMBOL TYPE ECC208 SYMBOL SIZE 16x18 ELEMENT SIZE 6 619 PIXELS ELEMENT 18 5 SYMBOL DATA kd ISO IEC 15415 Multi Capture Verification Results The ISO IEC Multi Capture parameters are the same as those for ISO IEC Single Capture but Multi Capture results are determined only after the symbol is read at five 72 intervals throughout a full 360 rotation The overall symbol grade is based on an arithmetic mean of the results from the five reads REFERENCE DECODE SYMBOL CONTRAST i FIXED PATTERN DAMAGE i AXIAL NON UNIFORMITY GRID NON UNIFORMITY MODULATION UNUSED ECC FINAL GRADES OQUERALL GRADE PRINT GROWTH SYMBOL TYPE ECC268 SYMBOL SIZE 16x18 ELEMENT SIZE 6 619 PIXELS ELEMENT 18 6 SYMBOL DATA 1 12 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Quick Start AS9132 Verification Results The AS9132 results show data concerning marking method element shape quiet zone contrast cell fill cell size dot ovality dot shape dot center offset dot spacing angle of distortion symbology type matrix size and pixels per element Symbol assessment is on a pass fail basis AS9132A Verification Report MARKING METHOD LASER ELECTO CHEM ETCH ELEMENT SHAPE SQ
245. ical requirements for 2D verification Minimum Element Size Definition Serial Cmd Default Options The minimum expected element size of the candidate symbol in 1 1000 of an inch or the symbol s mil size The minimum and maximum element size values define the range for calibration Note A larger minimum to maximum range of element size may slow down the calibration phase of the symbol grading process Once the candidate symbol is identified the AIM DPM procedure will use and report the actual aperture size used for verification lt K532 minimum element size maximum element size wavelength lighting gt 10 7 to 50 Maximum Element Size Definition The maximum expected element size of the candidate symbol in 1 1000 of an inch or the symbol s mil size The minimum and maximum element size values define the range for calibration Note A larger minimum to maximum range of element size may slow down the calibration phase of the symbol grading process Once the candidate symbol is identified the AIM DPM procedure will use and report the actual aperture size used for verification Serial Cmd lt K532 minimum element size maximum element size wavelength lighting gt Default 15 Options 7 to 50 Wavelength Definition The wavelength of illumination in the lighting environment used for verification Important The operator must ensure that this setting matches that of the illumination source being used Serial Cmd
246. id Capture Mode Explanation of Modifiers for Code 39 Codabar and Interleaved 2 of 5 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Index F Explanation of Modifiers for Other Symbologies Export External Camera Disconnect External Camera Message External Camera Timeout External Edge External Level External Trigger State Extract Range EZ Button EZ Button Modes EZ Button Operation EZ Button Trigger Mode EZ Trax Output by ESP EZ Trax Output by Serial Command F Features of UII Mode File gt New File Format Image Output Fill Factor Filter Number Find Finder Pattern Status Firmware Firmware by ESP Firmware Update Firmware Verification Fixed Pattern Damage Fixed Pattern Damage AIM DPM Fixed Pattern Damage ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Fixed Pattern Damage ISO IEC 15415 Fixed Pattern Damage Grade Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length Fixed Symbol Length PDF417 Fixed Symbol Length Pharmacode Fixed Symbol Length RSS Expanded Fixed Symbol Length Status BC412 Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 128 Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 39 BC412 Code 128 Code 39 MicroPDF417 a ee a es oe 8 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual G Fixed Symbol Length Status MicroPDF417 Fixed Symbol Length Status PDF417 Fixed Symbol Length Status Pharmacode Fixed Symbol Length Status RSS Expanded Fixed Threshold Value Pharmacode F
247. id symbol Serial Cmd lt KA477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length min no of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Default 4 Options 4to 16 Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 7 19 Pharmacode Bar Width Status Pharmacode Definition Serial Cmd Default Options If set to Mixed it will autodiscriminate between narrow bars and wide bars If set to All Narrow all bars will be considered as narrow bars If set to All Wide all bars will be considered as wide bars If set to Fixed Threshold it will use the Fixed Threshold value to determine whether the bars are narrow or wide The Bar Width Status setting will be ignored when the reader is able to tell the difference between the narrow and the wide bars lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length min no of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Mixed 0 Mixed 1 All Narrow 2 All Wide 3 Fixed Threshold Decode Direction Pharmacode Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Specifies the direction that a symbol can be read lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length min no of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt Forward 0 Forward 1 Reverse Fixed Threshold Value Pharmacode Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 7 20 Used when Bar Width Status is set to Fixed Threshold Defines the minimum differe
248. ier User s Manual Camera Setup Hollow Mode Usage Used to determine which kind of data matrix elements will be processed Definition When set to Regular Elements the reader will decode data matrix symbols with solid elements but will not decode data matrix symbols with hollow elements When set to Hollow Elements the reader will decode data matrix symbols with outlined hollow elements but will not decode data matrix symbols with solid elements Serial Cmd lt K517 hollow mode status gt Default Regular Elements Options 0 Regular Elements 1 Hollow Elements The image below is an example of a Data Matrix symbol with hollow elements Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 11 21 Mirrored Image Mirrored Image Usage When the reader is getting a mirrored image for example with an attached right angled mirror enable this setting Definition When enabled outputs a mirrored image of the symbol Serial Cmd lt K514 mirrored image gt Default Regular Image Options 0 Regular Image 1 Mirrored Image Regular Image When Regular Image is enabled images will be processed as they appear upon capture Mirrored Image When Mirrored Image is enabled images will be processed as a reverse of the captured image 11 22 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Eee 12 P Database Contents P Database by E OP a eT aE aE a AE sesecins dade aie telat bia hoe 12 2 IP Dat ab ase Seria COMMANA Sa sirra dra e TE A E A a ai 12 3 Overview
249. ifiers Unlatch Output Unused ECC Unused Error Correction Unused Error Correction AIM DPM Unused Error Correction ISO IEC 15415 Unused Error Correction Capacity Unused Error Correction Capacity ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Unused Error Correction Grade Unused Error Correction Grade and Value Unused Error Correction Value UPC EAN User Defined Address User Defined Example User Defined Multidrop User Defined Point to Point Using DHCP to Configure the Verifier Using ESP Using Static Presentation Using the Verifier s Default IP Address Utilities Utility and Configuration Command Rules V Valid Data Qualifier Formats Valid Data Qualifiers and Concatenated Ulls Value Angle of Distortion Value Axial Non Uniformity Value Grid Non Uniformity Value Symbol Contrast Verification Verification by ESP Verification Operational Commands Verification Report Tab Verification Serial Commands Verification Settings Tab Verification Standards Verifier Verifier Calibration Symbol Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Index 25 W Verifier Dimensions Verify Symbol Video Video Output Video Output Status Video TCP Port View W Warning and Caution Summary Warning Message Warranty Statement Watchdog Timer Wavelength Wavelength Value When to Output Symbol Data Width Column Width Wild Card Character Wildcard Worst Case and Average Values Cell Fill Worst Case and Average Values Dot Center
250. ifies the length of the decoded symbol allowed to occupy this location in multi symbol output Note To filter or order a symbol the symbol must meet all requirements of the selected filter index Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt Default 0 Options 0 to 64 Wildcard Definition This is the character to be used in the data output field when performing a data filter comparison The wildcard character represents the end of matching and allows for variable lengths of symbol output Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt Default Z 2A hex Options Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters Example 2A 00 disabled Placeholder Definition The placeholder character requires a character to be present but does not compare the data value Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt Default 2 3F hex Options Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters Example 3F 00 disabled Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 15 11 Output Filter Configuration Data Definition Serial Cmd Default Options This is the data string to be used when comparing symbol data for output filtering and ordering This data string may also contain wildcard and p
251. ight pixels will be displayed below the image When you center your cursor over the dashed line it becomes a double arrow cross This will allow you to move this line anywhere in the window You can also use your keyboard arrows to move this line incrementally in any direction As with the histogram the line scan compares light and dark pixels but in a spacial distribution On the Y axis of the graph 0 is black and 255 is white the X axis represents the horizontal axis of the symbol as described by the line scan When you click anywhere on the graph a vertical red line appears at that point and its position and value in terms of black to white are updated in the Pixel Info table to the left of the graph in this case 237 In addition a horizontal dashed red line is displayed that indicates the average value good_287_0 60 ms Evaluate Save C Histogram Line Scan r 4 White 255 Pixel Info Average N A Origin 0 0 Position NZA ae peas eet ae pn Value N A Black 0 hd Hatta ta P age tate afl Hi Line Scan Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 11 9 Region of Interest ROI Region of Interest ROI You can narrow the active image area field of view by defining a specific area or region of interest This is especially useful for increasing decode speed improving threshold and selecting the desired symbol from multiple symbols the FOV Notes 1 When using video output t
252. il dot ovality oercentage failed ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone grade pixels per element value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Grade Output Example Quiet Zone Grade highlighted below symbol_data P 004 003 F 045 057 P 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Pixels Per Element Value Definition The number of pixels in each symbol element The higher the Pixels Per Element count the more readable the symbol When enabled this feature outputs the pixels per element value SerialCmd lt K712 dot center offset percentage failed offset cell fill percentage failed cell fil dot ovality oercentage failed ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet Zone grade pixels per element value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Value Output er Example Pixels Per Element Value highlighted below symbol_data P 004 003 F 045 057 P 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 61 AS9132 Output by ESP AS9132 Output by ESP Dot Center Offset Measures the deviation of actual dot centers from theoretical or ideal dot centers Ideal dot centers are based upon a prior grid mapping calculation It is not assumed that the cells are evenly placed and they are adjusted if they are skewed Important Dot Center Offset is available only if Element Shape is set to Round 4591324 Parameters Element Shape Marking Method JE
253. iled Ovality When enabled reports the percentage of dots that failed Dot Ovality evaluation 4591324 Parameters Element Shape Round Marking Method Inkjet Dot Peen JES 131 Disabled Dot Center Offset Disabled Percentage Failed Offset Disabled Cell Fill Disabled Percentage Failed Cell Fill Disabled Dot Ovality Disabled Percentage Failed Ovality Angle of Distortion Disabled Symbol Contrast Enabled Quiet Zone Grade Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled 3 64 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Angle of Distortion Measures the symbol s deviation from a 90 relation between row and column To receive a passing grade the symbol s Angle of Distortion must not exceed 7 4591324 Parameters Element Shape Round Marking Method Inkjet Dot Peen JES 131 Disabled Dot Center Offset Disabled Percentage Failed Offset Disabled Cell Fill Disabled Percentage Failed Cell Fill Disabled Dot Ovality Disabled Percentage Failed Ovality Disabled Angle of Distortion Disabled Symbol Contrast Disabled Quiet Zone Grade Pixels Per Element Symbol Contrast Measures the difference in the light and dark values of the symbol s elements To receive a passing grade the difference in value between the mark dark value and the substrate light value must be 20 or greater Important Symbol Contrast output is only available when Marking Method is set to Laser or Chemical Etch 4591324 P
254. ilities Serial Cmd lt K742 symbol number status gt Options 1to 10 1 Formatted output status for symbol 1 2 Formatted output status for symbol 2 10 Formatted output status for symbol 10 Status Definition Status refers to the user defined formatting of a selected symbol position in the read cycle result Note that there is also a global formatting enable command that must be set for the formatting to be applied Serial Cmd lt K742 symbol number status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Assign parameters to specified symbol Format Assign by ESP A BrT Use the Set Number of Symbols spin box to Set Number of Symbols 5 2 lt g determine the number of symbols to be included in the output phrase Output Phrase Symbol Preamble Symbol 1 Separator Symbol 2 Symbol 3 Symbol 4 Symbol 5 Postamble V Enable IV Parse IV Parse V Parse Parse Parse M Enable Then check the Parse boxes beneath the symbols that you wish to format for user defined output 15 4 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Output Format Format Extract Output Index Definition Serial Cmd Options Output Index refers to the database entry you wish to modify with this command A formatted output is built by extracting data from a symbol s original data output and or inserting user defined characters It may be helpful to think of individual indexes as positions i
255. ing between light and dark elements Determines how the Verifier will distinguish light from dark pixels This value is used for the Fixed Mode only When Adaptive Mode is set this value is ignored lt K512 threshold mode threshold value gt 128 0 to 255 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Camera Setup Image Processing Settings Image Processing Settings control the amount of processing that occurs before an image is displayed E Image Processing Settings Processing Mode Standard Multiple Symbols in Fast Linear Mode 0 Image Processing Timeout 0 Hollow Mode Disabled Processing Mode Usage Standard mode should decode over 90 of symbologies Mode 1 is useful for QR code and narrow margined symbols Mode 2 and Mode 3 are intended for multiple symbols in the same FOV Mode 3 can also be used for narrow margined symbols and large QR code with large position detection patterns Mode 4 applies to Data Matrix only and is used in rare cases to improve readability Mode 5 is used to increase decode rates of linear symbols that are presented in the picket fence direction Reference Decode Algorithm is used for symbol verification Definition Processing modes can affect processing time and image quality Typically Standard mode should perform quickly and adequately in most cases where the Verifier is being used as a reader Serial Cmd lt K513 processing mode gt Default Reference Decode Algorithm Options 0 Stand
256. inition Outputs a No Read message followed by an additional message an Image Processing Results Code indicating the reason a symbol failed to decode For example in the following output No Read d_1 E_2 d and E are symbology ids for Datamatrix and UPC respectively The message means that Datamatrix and UPC are enabled and other symbologies are not and that both failed to decode The reason for the failing Datamatrix is 1 and the reason for the failing UPC is 2 The first part of these numbers preceding the dot is the relevant number and interpreted here 2D Symbologies 1 Failed to locate symbol no finder pattern 2 Failed to locate four corners or failed to qualify user defined dimension in pixels 3 Failed to locate clocks or failed to qualify user defined orientation 0 359 degree 4 Failed to validate clocks or failed to qualify user defined symbol size clock element count 5 Failed to decode symbol Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 7 No Read Message Linear Symbologies 1 Failed user defined minimum number of bars 2 Failed to decode start stop character doesn t apply to UPC RSS MicropPDF417 and Pharmacode 3 Failed user defined minimum number of scan lines that qualify for the minimum number of bars 4 Failed to decode 5 Failed to decode UPC supplemental No Read Message Definition Any combination of ASCII characters can be defined as the No Read message Serial Cmd lt K714 no
257. ion if exceeded the OVERFLOW message will be output in place of the duration Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Read Duration Output Separator Definition User defined character that separates the symbol information from the Read Duration Output Serial Cmd lt K706 status separator gt Default Space character Options Any ASCII character 8 16 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Output Indicators The Quadrus Verifier has a beeper and LED arrays arranged as follows Target Pattern Usage Assists users in positioning and locating symbols in the center of the reader s FOV Definition The user can control when the targeting system is ON or OFF and save this condition for power on Serial Cmd lt K750 green flash mode target pattern status green flash duration gt Default Always OFF Options 0 Always OFF 1 ON when NOT in the read cycle 2 ON when in the read cycle 3 Always ON Important The targeting system actuated by the EZ button or operational command overrides this setting Always OFF The target pattern will remain OFF at all times unless overridden by the EZ button or operational command On When NOT In Read Cycle The target pattern is always ON except during the read cycle If the EZ button or operational command overrides this setting the target pattern will remain on at all times On When in the Read Cycle The target pattern will remain OFF except during the read cycle
258. ion is set to 3 the first 2 characters read in the symbol will be ignored and only the 3rd and subsequent characters to the right will be compared up to the number of characters specified by Match Length Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on no read sequence on mismatch gt Default 0 Options 0 to 2710 Note Match Start Position must be set to 1 or greater to enable this feature A 0 setting will disable this feature Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 9 7 Match Length Match Length Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 9 8 For example if Match Length is set to 6 in a 10 character symbol and Match Start Position is set for 2 only the 2nd through 7th characters from left to right will be compared Defines the length of the character string that will be compared with that of the master symbol when Match Start Position is set to 1 or greater when Match Start Position is set to 0 no comparison will occur lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on no read sequence on mismatch gt 1 1 to 2710 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Matchcode Wild Card Character Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options For example with Wild Card Character defined as the default asterisk defining CR 34 as the master symbol will result in matches f
259. is placed in the Verifier s field of view its position should be considered its default position 0 ISO IEC 15415 requires that the symbol s orientation for the first capture be 45 This means 45 from the default symbol position 0 e When the candidate symbol is in position initiate the Multi Capture Verification command lt V2 gt The first rotation prompt shown below will appear Step 1 45 Rotation Starting Multiple Image Verification Step 1 Place symbol with 45 degree rotation then initiate trigger Default Position 0 45 Step 2 117 Rotation Default Position 0 117 3 46 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Step 3 189 Rotation Step 3 Rotate 72 degrees then initiate trigger Default Position 0 189 Step 4 261 Rotation Step 4 Rotate 72 degrees then initiate trigger Default Position 0 261 Step 5 333 Rotation Step 5 Rotate 72 degrees then initiate trigger Default Position 0 333 Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 3 47 ISO IEC 15415 Verification by Serial Command Multi Capture Verification Report After the final rotation and trigger the Verifier will output the ISO IEC 15415 Multi Capture Verification Report shown below The ISO IEC 15415 Multi Capture parameters are the same as those for ISO IEC 15415 Single Capture but multi capture results are determined only after the symbol is read at five 72 int
260. isabled 1 Bad no symbol output 2 Object qualification 3 Enable both Disabled Decoded messages are output but no attempt to qualify symbols or output Bad or No Symbol messages is undertaken Bad No Symbol Output Checks first for decodes If no symbol is decoded checks for symbol orientation If Orientation Value is satisfied a Bad Symbol message is output If not satisfied outputs a No Symbol message 8 14 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Object Qualification Checks first for matches to symbol Orientation Value If qualified attempts to decode If no decodes are found within the specified read cycle parameters outputs a No Read message Enable Both Same as Object Qualification except that if Orientation Value is satisfied but the symbol is not decoded then a Bad Symbol message is output if not satisfied outputs a Bad Symbol message Orientation Value Usage Instructs the reader to ignore symbols not in the specified orientation Definition Sets the orientation of the symbol in degrees clockwise from the default 0 orientation For Data Matrix symbols sets the finder L pattern with the adjacent being and example of the default 0 aspadeenal i i inder pattern __p orientation Data Matrix For QR Code sets the locator pattern three squares with the adjacent being an example of the default 0 orientation A Three s uare pfa The other position settings will finde
261. ismatch Counter Sending lt X gt displays the number of decoded symbols since the last reset that do not match the master symbol Mismatch Counter Reset Sending lt Y gt sets the Mismatch Counter to zero Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 14 5 Device Control Device Control Device Control by ESP Outputs Output 1 Pulse Output 2 Pulse Output 3 Pulse Extras Disable Reader LED Light Control May be configured in the same way as Enable Reader Output 1 and Output 2 if the Verifier is being used as a reader and if the LED Light Control hardware is not connected Device Control By Serial Command Output 1 Pulse Sending lt L1 gt pulses activates the link between Output 1 and Output 1 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 1 status Output 2 Pulse Sending lt L2 gt pulses activates the link between Output 2 and Output 2 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 2 status Output 3 Pulse Important Output 3 is used for the LED Light Control in the Verifier s default hardware configuration However if the Verifier is being used as a reader and the LED Light Control is not connected Output 3 can be configured in the same way as Output 1 and Output 2 Sending lt L3 gt activates the link between Output 3 and Output 3 of the host connector regardless of Master Symbol or Output 3 status Disable Reader Sending lt I gt wi
262. istogram is a graphical presentation of the numeric count of the occurrence of each intensity gray level in an image The horizontal axis is the values of gray levels and the vertical axis is the number of pixels for each gray level Note Since histograms are performed in the Verifier the results will be save regardless of whether the image was captured as a BMP or JPEG 1 From the Evaluation window click the Histogram button The current image is transferred into the histogram operation This may take a moment since all relevant pixels are being evaluated intensively 2 When the Histogram window opens you might need to expand the window and or adjust the scroll bars in order to bring the image into view 3 To generate a histogram click and drag your mouse pointer diagonally across the symbol or a portion of it An area of interest box is a dashed blue line that can be selected and moved by placing a cursor inside the box or resized by clicking and dragging the handles good_254_0 60 ms Evaluate Histogram Enable Autothreshold Line Scan Send Threshold r Histogram Results Mazx Light 192 Min Dark 16 Median 68 Mean 67 High Peak 0 Low Peak 34 Variance 646 Number of Pixels Histogram Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 11 7 Evaluation Threshold Histogram Enable Autothreshold is checked by default To manually adjust the threshold 1 Uncheck the Enable Autothreshold
263. itled DDAR File Model Options Connect View Terminal Help J Terminal Le screen Verification Autoconnect Switch Model 3 HI E om Configuration Camera Terminal Utilities Output Format 7 amp e A Co PE Paste Type text here to find in ang gave Terminal window Type serial commands Scroll down to recall here or directly in the previous commands terminal below Clear screen Click on Macro arrow to Add Macro Remove Macro list a on this bar Macro or Edit Macro Click on Macro to run y Next Row Enable Live Video Triggered Video Output 150 15415 Verification I50 15415 Multi Capture Verification For Help press F1 lQuadrus Verifier 1 Quadrus Verifier EEG 7 The Terminal screen allows you to enter serial commands from the macro box by copying and pasting or directly from your keyboard The Terminal screen also displays symbol data or other information from the Verifier You can also right click in the Terminal screen to bring up a menu of further options 13 2 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Terminal Find The Find function allows you to enter text strings to be searched for in the Terminal window For example a series of symbols have been scanned into the Terminal view and you want to determine if a particular symbol whose data begins with ABC has been read 1 Type ABC into the Find box P E Find jasc 2 Press Enter The first instance o
264. ity Quiet Zone AS9132 Quiet Zone Grade R RAM 18 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual R Rapid Capture Mode Rapid Capture Mode Examples Rapid Capture Mode Single Camera Read Cycle Read Cycle by ESP Read Cycle Results Image Captioning Read Cycle Serial Commands Read Cycle Setup Read Cycle Timeout Read Duration Output Read Duration Output Mode Read Duration Output Separator Read Next Symbol as Master Symbol Read Rate Read Rate by ESP Read Rate by Serial Command Reader Setup Receive After Connect Receive Settings from the Reader Receiving Reference Decode Algorithm Reference Gray Scale Image Reflectance Calibration Reflectance Max Reflectance Maximum Reflectance Min Reflectance Minimum Region Region of Interest ROI Region of Interest by ESP Region of Interest by Serial Command Regular Image Reload Last File Replacement String Request All Database Settings Request All Master Symbol Data Request Checksum Request Checksum by ESP Request Checksum by Serial Command Request Master Symbol Data Request New Master Status Request Part Number Request Part Number by ESP Request Part Number by Serial Command Request Selected Database Settings Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Index 19 S Reset Counts Resets Resolution Response Timeout RS 170 RS 232 Interface Standard RS 232 Protocol RSS Expanded RSS Limited RSS 14 Rules for Output Filter Configuration S Safety
265. ix D Serial Configuration Commands ccceeceeeeeseeeeeeeee A 11 Appendix E ASCII Table ccc ceecseceenceeseeeeneeeeeeseeeseeseeeeeneeseeeeeetaes A 17 Appendix F Data Matrix Symbology ecceeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeneeteeeeeaeeeaees A 19 Appendix G Object Detector ee eeceeceeseeeeeeeeereeneeseaeeeaeessaeeeeeeneetaaes A 20 Appendix H Operational Tips ecceeeceeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeneeeeeetenees A 21 Appendix Embedded Menus eecceesceeesereeeesneeeeeneeeeenreeenaneeeneneeees A 22 Appendix J Interface Standards 0 0 ceeeeceeeseeeeeteneeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeens A 23 Appendix K Glossary Of Terms c ccesceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeaees A 24 Index viii Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Introduction About the Quadrus Verifier The key features of the Quadrus Verifier are e ISO IEC 15415 AS9132 and AIM DPM verification options e Self contained factory calibrated optics and lighting for fast easy integration into a variety of manufacturing processes ISO IEC 15426 certification for Data Matrix verification e ESP Software for configuration and testing About This Manual This manual provides complete information on setting up installing and configuring the Quadrus Verifier The sections are presented in the order in which the Verifier might be set up and made ready for industrial operation Note The terms AS9132 and AS9132 are used interchangeably throughout this documentatio
266. k Digit Output Status Code 39 Check Digit Output Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Check Digit Status Code 39 Check Digit Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Check Required Hardware Cleaning the Quadrus Verifier Clear CMOS Code 128 Code 39 Codeword Collection PDF417 Comm Port EZ Trax Output by ESP Comm Port EZ Trax Output by Serial Command Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Index D Command Processing Mode Aux Port Mode Communicating in Ethernet Communication Protocol Commands Communications Communications by ESP Communications Port Image Output Communications Protocols Communications Serial Commands Compliance Indicator Composite Concatenating Configuration Commands Concentrator Configuring EZ Trax Output Configuring EZ Trax Output by ESP Connect Message Connect Status Connect the System Connecting to a Host by TCP IP Connectivity Accessories Connector Construct 1 Construct 2 Continuous Capture Continuous Capture Mode Continuous Capture Mode Examples Continuous Read Continuous Read 1 Output Control Characters Control Hex Output Copy Counter Counters Counters by ESP Counters by Serial Command Counts Read Only Custom Default Saves Customer Default Parameters D Daisy Chain Daisy Chain Aux Port Mode Daisy Chain Autoconfigure Daisy Chain ID Daisy Chain ID Status 4 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual D Daisy Chain Reader ID Daisy Chain Reader Number Daisy Chain Remote S
267. l ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality parameters except Print Growth feature the alphanumeric grade options shown below If the decoded symbol s grade falls below the selected threshold grade Sg Symbol Quality ISO 15415 Grade Output Disabled the output will activate Decode Disabled Symbol Contrast Disabled Fixed Pattern Damage Disabled Disable F E Axial Non uniformity Disabled Disahiad Grid Non uniformity Disabled Modulation Disabled Unused ECC Disabled Print Growth Disabled Serial Cmd lt K831 grade decode symbol contrast fixed pattern damage axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation unused error correction capacity print growth value gt See ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Output 1 for command structure and options AS9132 Symbol Quality Output 2 Note Output On under Output 2 Parameters must be set to Symbol Quality for this output to function Output 2 Parameters Symbol Quality All AS9132 Symbol Quality parameters feature the dropdown menu shown below When set to Enabled a failing grade will activate output Note The Symbol Contrast parameter Sig Symbol Quality 4591324 Dot Center Offset Disabled only takes effect when Marking Method is f set to Laser or Chemical Etch lt K711 1 gt Cell Fill Disabled Dot Ovality Disabled Angle of Distortion Disabled Disabled z Symbol Contrast Disabled p Disabled Quiet Zone Disabled Enabled S
268. l and external cameras are required for products such as circuit boards that might have two symbols in different locations The Quadrus Verifier has its own internal camera complete with illumination and led sensor circuitry for capturing static or moving symbols at various camera settings including shutter contrast etc The Quadrus Verifier can also accept images from a remote external camera using the RS 170 communications protocol lt K240 active camera gt Internal 0 Internal Camera 1 External Camera 2 Dual Camera Important The Quadrus Verifier does not control the timing of external cameras Captures from external cameras are streamed into the Quadrus Verifier To be sure to receive a complete first capture allow an extra 33mS delay before the first external capture Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 6 17 Capture Mode Capture Mode Definition Capture Mode relates to the way that multiple captures are processed by the Quadrus Verifier Serial Cmd lt K241 capture mode number of captures rapid capture mode gt Default Rapid Capture Options 0 Rapid Capture 1 Continuous Capture Number of Captures Usage Used to increase the opportunities for good reads and to extend the field of view in dynamic applications Definition Sets the total number of captures that are processed during a read cycle in the Rapid Capture mode when Switching Mode is set to Number of Captures Serial Cmd lt K241 capture
269. l character Con trol characters entered on the command line are displayed in the menu as mnemonic characters Note Serial Data or Serial Data or Edge triggering mode must be enabled for Serial Trigger Character to take effect Start and Stop Trigger Characters Non Delimited Usage Definition It is useful in applications where different characters are required to start and end a read cycle A non delimited trigger character is one that either starts or ends the read cycle and is NOT enclosed by delimiters such as lt and gt Both Start and Stop non delimited characters can be defined and will function according to the trigger event as follows When defining Start and Stop trigger characters the following rules apply In External Edge the reader looks only for the start trigger character and ignores any end trigger character that may be defined In External Level the start trigger character begins the read cycle and end trigger character ends it Note that even after a symbol has been decoded and the symbol data transmitted the reader remains in External Level trigger read cycle until a Stop character is received In Serial Data and Edge trigger mode command either a start trigger character or a hardware trigger can start an edge trigger read cycle Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 6 13 Serial Trigger Start Character Non Delimited Definition Serial Cmd Default Options A single ASCII host serial tri
270. l in testing symbol readability or reader functions It is not recommended for normal operations Definition In Continuous Read trigger input options are disabled the reader is always in the read cycle and it will attempt to decode and transmit every capture When To Output and No Read options have no affect on Continuous Read Serial Cmd lt K200 0 gt Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 6 7 Trigger Continuous Read 1 Output Usage Definition Serial Cmd Continuous Read 1 Output can be useful in applications where it is not feasible to use a trigger and all succeeding symbols contain different information It is also effective in applications where the objects are presented by hand In Continuous Read 1 Output the reader self triggers whenever it decodes a new symbol or a timeout occurs lf End Of Read Cycle is set to Timeout and the symbol doesn t change the output is repeated at the end of each timeout period For example if Timeout is set to one second the reader sends the symbol data immediately and repeats the output at intervals of one second for as long as the symbol continues to be captured If End Of Read Cycle is set to New Trigger the reader will send the current symbol data immediately but send it only once A new symbol appearing in the reader s range will be read and sent immediately provided it is not identical to the previous symbol read lt K200 1 gt Caution In automated environments Contin
271. l of each pixel can be stored in a host computer Digital Signal Processor DSP A VLSI chip designed for ultra high speed arithmetic processing Often embedded in a vision engine Direct Part Mark DPM A machine readable symbol applied to an individual part using such techniques as dot peen laser etch and chemical etch Discrete I O Inputs and outputs characterized by discrete signal transitions from one voltage level to another so that digital switching can occur DMA Direct Memory Access A capability provided by some computer bus architectures that allows data to be sent directly to memory from an attached device Dot Center Offset The deviation of the center of a directly marked dot element from the ideal dot center Quaarus Verifier User s Manual A 25 Glossary of Terms Dot Ovality The extent of oval distortion of directly marked 2D symbol elements DSP Digital Signal Processing See also Digital Signal Processor Dynamic Range The difference between the minimum and maximum thresholds of discernible images the amount of usable signal Edge Enhancement Image processing method to strengthen high spatial frequencies in an image Element The fundamental unit of data encodation in a linear or 2D symbol A single bar space square dot etc Embedded Memory Onboard memory device such as EPROM or flash End of Read Cycle The time or condition at which the reader stops expecting to receive symbol
272. l the external camera synchronizes with the reader Example 2 Time Between Captures 0 Active Camera Dual Capture Mode Rapid Number of captures 8 Number of internal camera captures 2 Number of external camera captures 3 Extra 33mS time delay y before 1st external capture Internal 1 2 6 7 External 3 4 5 8 Processing Note Since the total number of captures is greater than the combined number of captures of both cameras capture source will oscillate between the two cameras until the total number 8 has been met 6 26 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Read Cycle Continuous Capture Mode Examples Continuous Capture mode is more involved due to the double buffering The cameras will continue to switch for the duration of the read cycle in a double buffered format so that we start processing the first image while we are capturing the second The third image will then start when both the first one is completely processed and the second is completely transferred Example 3 Time Between Captures 0 Capture Mode Dual Camera Number of internal camera captures 5 Number of external camera captures 3 _ Extra 33mS time delay y before 1st external capture Internal 1 2 3 4 5 External 6 7 8 Processing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Example 4 Time Between Captures 0 Capture Mode Dual
273. laceholder characters to facilitate matching Remember that in order to filter or order symbol data it must meet all the requirements of the selected filter index Examples e Filter data 123 This will match data strings of 123 123456 and 123ABC but not 12 e Filter data 123 AB C This will be interpreted as 123 Filter data 123 This will match 1234 and 123A but not 123 12345 or 12340 Filter data 123A This will match 1234A and 123BA but not 123 1234C or 1234ABCD Filter data 123 A This will match 1234AB and 123BAT but not 1 234A or 123BATS Filter data 12 This will match 1234 123456 and 123ABC but not 12 or 123 Filter data 123 A This will match 1234A 123BA and 123BATS but not 1234 or 12340 lt K744 filter number symbology type length wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt 00 Any ASCII input in the form of a pair of hex characters Examples 41422A AB Data 00 NULL represents string matching disabled Database Index Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 15 12 The index of the database entry that decodes a given symbol must equal this setting for filtering to occur A setting of 0 allows any database index for this filter
274. led Percentage Failed Offset Disabled Disabled e Percentage Failed Cell Fill Disabled Dot Ovality Percentage Failed Ovality Angle of Distortion Symbol Contrast Grade and Worst Case Quiet Zone Grade Grade and Average Pixels Per Element Grade and Both Percentage Failed Cell Fill When enabled reports the percentage of elements that failed Cell Fill evaluation 4591324 Parameters Element Shape Round Marking Method Inkjet Dot Peen JES 131 Disabled Dot Center Offset Disabled Percentage Failed Offset Disabled Cell Fill Disabled Percentage Failed Cell Fill Dot Ovality Disabled Percentage Failed Ovality Angle of Distortion Disabled Symbol Contrast Disabled Quiet Zone Grade Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 63 AS9132 Output by ESP Dot Ovality Measures the extent to which round elements deviate from a perfect circle For a symbol to achieve a passing grade Dot Ovality must not exceed 20 and no more than 2 of the symbol s dots can exceed 20 ovaility 4591324 Parameters Element Shape Round Marking Method Inkjet Dot Peen JES 131 Disabled Dot Center Offset Disabled Percentage Failed Offset Disabled Cell Fill Disabled Percentage Failed Cell Fill Disabled Disabled s gt Percentage Failed Ovality Disabled Angle of Distortion Symbol Contrast Quiet Zone Grade Pixels Per Element Grade and Worst Case Grade and Average Grade and Both Percentage Fa
275. lications 2 If the IP database is being used in a Continuous Capture mode the capture sequence is sequential and no longer double buffered Thus a capture cannot occur until the previous frame has been processed and up to a 16ms delay can be introduced between image captures 3 In a Continuous trigger Continuous Capture or read rate mode the decode speed should not be affected while using the synchronous trigger mode since a double buffer format is used for image capturing The only time a slow down should be noticed in these modes is when the decode time is less than the capture time Capture time 16ms Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 29 EZ Button EZ Button The EZ button has four positions selectable by the length of time that the button is held down and indicated by one two three and four beeps in succession Each position can be programmed for any of eight options Definition Serves as a master switch to enable disable the EZ button status SerialCmd lt K770 global status default on power on load IP database save for power on gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 Trigger Disabled When set to Disabled the EZ button is disabled Enabled When selected the EZ button is enabled and the function of each button position is selected by the EZ Button Mode command Trigger Mode EZ Button When selected the EZ button acts as a trigger for the reader to start and end read cycles All other b
276. ll turn the reader OFF end the current read cycle and not allow the reader to enter a read cycle until turned ON This feature is useful during extended periods of time when no symbols are being scanned or the reader is being configured Disabling the reader will not affect any downloaded commands to the reader Enable Reader Sending lt H gt will turn the reader ON and allow it to enter read cycles 14 6 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Differences from Default Clicking the Differences from Default button will cause ESP to check all stored configuration settings and compare them to default settings All settings that are different than default will appear in the left column shown below and descriptions of those settings will appear in the right column Utilities Click this button for a list of ESP configuration settings that are different than default settings Click Generate Barcode to bring up the Bar Code Dialog Then create configuration symbols containing the configuration commands of your choice lt K200 4 gt lt K201h 52 gt lt K220 1000 gt lt K470 0 gt lt K525 435 gt lt K529 1 0 2 gt lt K541 30 gt lt K714h 5a5ab5aia gt lt K 715h 5a5a5a5a gt lt K 716h 5a5a5a5a gt i i Read Rate Counters Device Control Differences Master Database Firmware Differences from Default Generate Barcode Mode Serial Data Character Delimited Fi Read Cycle Timeout
277. llowing database settings are not applied while in Rapid Capture mode Threshold mode Fixed Threshold Value Processing Mode Background Color and Narrow Margins In Rapid Capture mode when the reader enters the read cycle it uses index 0 settings of the IP Database for the first image capture For each successive capture the database index is incremented and the new settings are applied to the new capture A new capture is acquired for each database configuration When the last active database index is filled and there are more captures to take the index will start back at 0 Continuous Capture Mode When IP Database is enabled whenever Database Size is not equal to 0 Continuous Capture no longer works in a double buffered format When the read cycle begins the reader enters the IP Database at index 0 for the first image capture The reader will capture and decode the image increment the database index and apply the new configuration If the new configuration does not change camera settings then a new image is not acquired and the reader will try to decode the current captured image with the new image processing settings If the camera settings have changed from the previous settings then a new capture is required When the end of the active database configuration has been reached the index will start back at 0 Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 12 5 IP Database Window in ESP IP Database Window in ESP When you click on the IP Datab
278. log as you would for ISO IEC 15415 to set a min and max value that match those on the a reference card and then click Calibrate Reflectance Maximum 85 a 0 100 C A591324 Calibration Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 1 9 Set Verification Parameters Step 9 Set Verification Parameters Once the Verifier is calibrated you will need to set the parameters for your chosen verification process To set these parameters click the Settings tab in the Verification view Configure each setting as appropriate for your application before you begin verification Parameters Symbol Verification Data Matrix General Separator Data Matrix symbol 150 Grade Type Alpha verification settings Symbol Type Disabled Symbol Dimension Size Disabled 4591324 Parameters Element Shape Round a hae a Choose report output characteristics using Dot Center Offset Disabled the Preferences dialog shown below Percentage Failed Offset Disabled Cell Fill Disabled Report Settings Preferences Percentage Failed Cell Fill Disabled Dot Ovality Disabled Fields for report Percentage Failed Ovality Disabled Angle of Distortion Disabled Operator Name J Doe Symbol Contrast Disabled Quiet Zone Grade Disabled Company Name YZ Corp Disabled defined ISOJIEC 15415 Parameters j Grade Output Value Aperture Disabled Saved Options Wavelength Disabled eet Light Angle Disabled MV Show Repor
279. lt Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Digit Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Usage It is typically not used but can be enabled for additional security in applications where the host requires redundant check digit verification Definition An error correcting routine in which the check digit character is added Serial Cmd lt K472 status check digit status check digit output symbol length 1 sym bol length 2 gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Digit Output Status Interleaved 2 of 5 Definition When enabled a check digit character is sent along with the bar symbol data for added data security Serial Cmd lt K472 status check digit status check digit output symbol length 1 sym bol length 2 gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 7 13 Interleaved 2 of 5 Symbol Length 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options With I 2 5 two symbol lengths can be defined When using only one symbol length in an application setting Symbol Length 2 to 0 zero to ensure data integrity is recommended Allows user to define the symbol length Because 2 5 is a continuous symbology it is prone to substitution errors Hence a symbol length must be defined and a bar code symbol must contain an even number of digits Note If a start stop or check digits are used they are not included in the symbol length count
280. lt K231 gt for all or lt K231 master symbol number gt Delete Master Symbol Data Quadrus Verifier User s Manual lt K231 master symbol number gt Overview of Matchcode Overview of Matchcode Definition With Matchcode you can store master symbol data in the reader s memory compare this data against the read symbols and define how symbol data and or discrete signal output will be directed A master symbol database can be set up for up to 10 master symbols Note Matchcode will function with multiple symbols However if Matchcode Type is set to Sequential or if Triggering Mode is set to Continuous Read 1 Output Number of Symbols will default back to 1 if set to any number greater than 1 Usage Matchcode is used in applications to sort route or verify data based on matching the specific symbol in a variety of ways as defined in this section For example a manufacturer might sort a product based on dates that are embedded in the symbol apse for Entering and Using Master Symbols Set Triggering Mode to External or Serial 2 Chose the method of symbol comparison that fits your application 3 Define the output you want to achieve with your matchcode setup a Symbol data output b Discrete output 4 Select the number of master symbols you want to create 5 Decide which of 4 ways you want enter your master symbol s a Use ESP to send master symbol data directly b Send a serial command with symbol data
281. m extent permitted by law this express warranty excludes all other warranties express or implied including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and Technical support questions may be directed to help desk microscan com Register your product with Microscan www microscan com register fitness for a particular purpose Microscan Systems Inc does not warrant that the functions contained in the product will meet any requirements or needs purchaser may have or that the product will operate error free or in an uninterrupted fashion or that any defects or errors in the product will be corrected or that the product is compatible with any particular machinery Limitation of Liability In no event shall Microscan Systems Inc be liable to you or any third party for any special incidental or consequential damages including without limitation indirect special punitive or exemplary damages for loss of business loss of profits business interruption or loss of business information whether in contract tort or otherwise even if Microscan Systems Inc has been advised of the possibility of such damages Microscan Systems Inc s aggregate liability with respect to its obligations under this warranty or otherwise with respect to the product and documentation or otherwise shall not exceed the amount paid by you for the product and documentation Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or conseque
282. mands For detailed information about how to use the EZ Trax user interface for configuration refer to the Help menu in EZ Trax software or the EZ Trax Quick Start Guide available on the Microscan Tools CD Configuring EZ Trax Output by ESP To configure EZ Trax using ESP first click the I O button in App Mode to display the I O Parameters tree control FLL TLL I O 8 56 p Parameters ESP Values I O Parameters Symbol Data Output Good Read Noread Message Enabled Bad No Symbol Qualification Read Duration Output Disabled Output Object Info Disabled Output Indicators Serial verification video Output Live real time Image Output Disabled SREZ Trax Output Disabled Comm Port Host Image Mode Disabled Image Format Compressed JPEG Quality 30 Object Info Output Disabled Image Captioning Disabled Synchronous Trigger Disabled EZ Button Enabled Input 1 Disabled Unique Item Identifier UII Disabled Output 1 Parameters Output 2 Parameters Output 3 Parameters E E Quadrus Verifier User s Manual EZ Trax Output Enabled z Disabled Comm Port Image Mode Image Format JPEG Quality Object Info Output Comm Port EZ Trax Output Image Mode Image Format JPEG Quality Object Info Output Image Mode EZ Trax Output Comm Port Image Format JPEG Quality Object Info Output Image Format EZ Trax Output Comm Port Image Mode JPE
283. mber of characters that the reader will recognize this does not include start and stop and check digit characters The reader ignores any symbology not having the specified length lt K470 status check digit status check digit output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt 10 1 to 128 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Symbologies Full ASCII Set Code 39 Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Must be enabled when reading characters outside the standard character set 0 9 A Z etc User must know in advance whether or not to use Full ASCII Set option Since Full ASCII Set requires two code words to encode one character it is less efficient Standard Code 39 encodes 43 characters zero through nine capital A through capital Z minus symbol plus symbol forward slash space decimal point dollar sign and percent symbol When Full ASCII Set is enabled the reader can read the full ASCII character set from 0 to 255 lt K470 status check digit status check digit output large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 7 9 Code 128 Code 128 Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Code 128 is a smaller symbology useful in applications with tight spots and high security needs A very dense alphanumeric sy
284. mbines 2D and linear width modulated symbology on the same symbol where different messages can be read by each reader type Serial Cmd lt K453 mode separator status separator gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Required Enabled If set to Enabled it only decodes the linear component it will output only the linear component Required If set to Required it must decode both the linear and the composite components otherwise it outputs a No Read Separator Status Composite Usage Allows user to distinguish between the main and Supplemental symbols Definition This separator separates the linear symbol and the composite component Serial Cmd lt K453 mode separator status separator gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Separator Character Composite Note If Separator Character has been changed to any other character and you wish to re define the separator as a comma you will need to use ESP or the embedded menu Usage As required by the application Definition Allows the user to change the separator character from a comma to a new character Serial Cmd lt K453 mode separator status separator gt Default comma Options Any ASCII character Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 7 27 Narrow Margins Narrow Margins Note Narrow Margins is only used for linear symbology types Do not use with PDF Usage Used when the leading and trailing edges of the symbols are smaller th
285. mbology It encodes all 128 ASCII characters it is continuous has variable length and uses multiple element widths measured edge to edge lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status Code 128 Definition Serial Cmd Default Options When enabled the reader will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length would be considered a valid symbol lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Code 128 Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted It specifies the exact number of characters that the reader will recognize this does not include start and stop and check digit characters The reader ignores any symbol not having the specified length lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt 10 1 to 128 Note Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect 7 10 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Symbologies BC412 Usage It is widely used in the semi conductor manufacturing and is particularly useful where speed accuracy and ease of printing are required Definition BC412 Binary Code 412 a proprietary IBM symbol
286. medium speed Lens A transparent piece of material with curved surfaces which cause light rays to converge or to diverge Machine Vision The automatic acquisition and analysis of images to obtain desired data for the control of a specific application Modulation A measurement of the uniformity of light and dark elements within a symbol Multidrop A communications protocol for networking two or more readers or other devices with a concentrator or controller and characterized by the use of individual device addresses and the RS 485 standard Quaarus Verifier User s Manual A 27 Glossary of Terms Noise The same as static in a telephone line or snow in a television picture noise is any unwanted electrical signal that interferes with the image being read and transferred by the reader Normally Closed A discrete output state that is only active when open Normally Open A discrete output state that is only active when closed Output A channel or communications line Data or discrete signals that are transmitted or displayed by a device Parity An error detection routine in which one data bit in each character is set to 1 or 0 so that the total number of bits in the data field is even or odd Picket Fence Symbol Orientation A linear symbol orientation in which the bars are perpendicular to the symbol s direction of travel Pixel The basic unit of image composition in a digitized image array Pixels Per El
287. mode is selected but the reader is not in Continuous Read the Green Flash will revert to Good Read mode To use Static Presentation 1 Enable Continuous Read 2 Select the number of symbols 3 Enable Static Presentation in Green Flash Mode 4 Select the read time in Green Flash Duration Note Green Flash Duration values only take effect in Static Presentation Mode Match Green Flash Green flash LEDs will flash for less than 1 second when a match condition is met If multisymbol is enabled then green flash LEDs will illuminate only if all symbols qualify as a match If matchcode is disabled then this mode will activate the LED s on a good read Mismatch Green Flash Same as On Match except it illuminates on a mismatch 8 18 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Green Flash Duration Usage A visual verification that a good read has occurred Definition When a good read occurs the Green flash LED s will illuminate and stay on for the time set for the Green Flash Duration value Serial Cmd lt K750 green flash mode target pattern status green flash duration gt Default 100 1 second Options 0 to 65535 in 10mS increments Note Green Flash Duration values only take effect in Static Presentation Mode Beeper Usage An audible verification that either a good read or a No Read has occurred Definition A beep is emitted either after each good read or No Read Serial Cmd lt K702 beeper status gt Default Good
288. mode number of captures rapid capture mode gt Default 1 Options O0to5 Note When processing in Rapid Capture mode and Dual Capture mode the number of captures set for each camera will be limited by the number of captures set here For example if Number Of Captures is set to 4 and the individual camera captures are set for 2 and 3 respectively the last capture will be omitted Rapid Capture Mode Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 6 18 Rapid Capture is useful in fast moving applications in which symbols are only in the field of view a short time or precise timing between captures is relevant or when dual camera mode is enabled A single capture with Last Frame ending the read cycle is the same as single shot In Rapid Capture decoding occurs independent of and simultaneous with capturing thus allowing precise timing or no delay at all between captures The downside is that the number of captures is limited to 8 so that processing buffers are not overloaded lt K241 capture mode number of captures rapid capture mode gt Timed Capture 0 Timed Capture 1 Triggered Capture Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Read Cycle Timed Capture Usage Timed Rapid Capture is useful in fast moving applications in which symbols are only in the field of view a short time and precise timing is required Definition In Timed Rapid Capture decoding occurs independent of and simultaneous with capturing thus all
289. mware but not included in or different from your current version of ESP You can edit these commands by double clicking on them and changing them as needed It is important to note that these commands will be saved to your Verifier whenever you send a Save to Reader command or an lt A gt or a lt Z gt command Also if there is a corresponding ESP menu item the ESP Value column for that item will be blank following a Receive Reader Settings command 1 From the Send Recv button or by right clicking from within the configuration trees 2 14 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual eee 3 Verification Contents Verification Serial COMMAMNAS ccccesceeeeeeeneeeeceeeeeeeseeeeaeeeaeecaeeeaeesseeseaeeeseeseaeseaeeseaeeneeseaeesseee 3 2 Verification Operational COMMANAS cecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaeeseeeeaeeseeseaeeeeeseaeetieeeeeeeeaeees 3 2 Overview of Verifications mutoni aie te ected eed dane et ed ee 3 3 ISO IEC 15415 Evaluation Parameters cceecceesceeseeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeseeeeeaeeenaeeeaeeseeeeeeesneeeeaeesneetaas 3 5 AS9132 Evaluation Parameters 0 cccceececesecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeecsaeeeaeeeaeeseaeeeeeesaesesaeeeeeseaeeseaeenaeesaaes 3 7 AIM DPM Evaluation Parameters ecceeesceeeeeeeeeneeeeseaeeeeeaeeecnaeeeseaeeeeeeeeseaeeeensaeeeesaeeeseeeees 3 10 General Verification Serial OUtQUt eceeccececeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeseeesaeteaeeseeseaeetieeeeaeenaes 3 12 General Verification
290. n AS9132 is the name of a specification and the suffix A denotes the current published version of the specification Highlighting Serial commands and default settings are highlighted in rust bold Cross references and web links are highlighted in blue bold References to menu items are highlighted in Bold Initial Caps Host Communications There are four ways to configure and test the Quadrus Verifier 1 Several configuration commands can be executed from the EZ Button without connection to a host 2 Microscan s Windows based ESP the preferred method which offers point and click ease of use and visual responses to user adjustments 3 Serial commands such as lt K100 1 gt can be sent from a terminal program They can also be sent from a PLC or from ESP s Terminal 4 Embedded onboard menus are accessed from a terminal window with a lt D gt command Quaarus Verifier User s Manual ix Statement of Agency Compliance Statement of Agency Compliance CE The Quadrus Verifier has been tested for compliance with CE Conformit Europ enne standards and guidelines and has been found to conform to applicable CE standards specifically the following requirements e ITE Disturbances IEC 55022 1998 radiated and conducted Class A e General Immunity IEC 55024 1998 residential e Heavy Industrial Immunity IEC 61000 6 2 1999 e LED Radiation IEC 60825 1 x Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Introduction
291. n lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Video Output lt K760 video output status triggered mode capture number gt Image Output lt K739 image output mode comm port file format JPEG quality gt Image Captioning lt K762 mode gt Synchronous Trigger lt K761 synchronous trigger mode gt EZ Button lt K770 global status default on power on load IP database save for power on gt EZ Button Modes lt K771 position 1 mode position 2 mode position 3 mode position 4 mode gt Input 1 lt K730 input mode active state gt Output 1 Parameters lt K810 output on active state pulse width output mode gt Trend Analysis Output 1 lt K780 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on gt Diagnostic Warnings to Output 1 lt K790 over temp service unit external camera disconnect gt ISO IEC 15415 Verification Output 1 lt K830 grade decode symbol contrast fixed pattern damage axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation unused error correction print growth value gt AS9132 Verification Output 1 lt K840 dot center offset cell fill dot ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone gt Output 2 Parameters lt K811 output on active state pulse width output mode gt Trend Analysis Output 2 A 12 lt K781 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt Q
292. n 2 5 will be variable Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Symbologies Guard Bar Interleaved 2 of 5 Note Whenever Guard Bar is enabled the presence of guard bars is required for decoding to take place Usage It is useful when 2 of 5 multisymbols are enabled to prevent false data output This typically occurs with highly tilted or skewed symbols Definition A guard bar is a heavy bar at least 2 times the width of the wide bar surrounding the printed 2 of 5 symbol and helping to prevent false reads Serial Cmd lt K472 status check digit status check digit output status symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 7 15 UPC EAN UPC EAN Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Used primarily in POS application in the retail industry It is commonly used with Microscan readers in applications in combination with Matchcode when there is a need to verify that the right product is being placed in the right packaging UPC Universal Product Code is a fixed length numeric continuous symbology UPC can have two or five digit supplemental bar code data following the normal code The U P C Version A U P C A symbol is used to encode a 12 digit number The first digit is the number system character the next five are the manufacturer number the next five are the product number and the last digit is the checksum c
293. n dot ovality is out of spec with AS9132 requirements Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 7 AS9132 Evaluation Parameters Angle of Distortion Ideal 90 Row Column 15 The Angle of Distortion is the symbol s deviation from a 90 relation between row and column 105 15 Deviation from Ideal Row Column Symbol Contrast Quiet Zone 3 8 Symbol Contrast is the value difference between light and dark symbol elements and between the quiet zone and perimeter elements This example shows a low contrast symbol The dark elements etched and the light elements the substrate s surface are too close in value which undermines readability The Quiet Zone is an unmarked space of at least one element in width surrounding the symbol required for symbol readability The red box in the example represents the outer perimeter of the minimum Quiet Zone requirement The Quiet Zone can be any amount greater than one element in width but any Quiet Zone width less than one element will make the symbol difficult or impossible to read Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Pixels Per Element Pixels Per Element refers to the number of pixels in each individual symbol element 11 pixels Verification This magnified symbol detail contains 4 elements each with a width of 11 pixels Quadrus Verifier User s Manual AIM DPM Evaluation Parameters AIM DPM Evaluation Parameters Cell Contr
294. n the final formatted output you wish to build Starting with index 1 enter either an extract or insert command to begin building your desired output string Then with the next index number enter either an extract or insert command to continue building the output string Continue this process until you are finished building the string lt K740 output index start location length gt 1 to 100 Start Location Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Length Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Defines the location within the symbol data where the character extraction will begin The first character extracted will also be the first character in the sequence displayed in user defined output lt K740 output index start location length gt 0 1 to n maximum number of characters in the symbol data Defines the length in consecutive characters that will be extracted and placed in user defined output lt K740 output index start location length gt 0 disabled end of format cell array 1 to n maximum number of characters in the symbol data Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 15 5 Format Assign Format Extract by ESP Parse Symbols Receive Quality Parameters Hide Parse Table Symbol Parse il Test ne Rislelins Say Step Insert Data Extract Range ail Step Insert Data Extract Range Extract T A The Extract Range Extract 2 4 P function corresponds to the Start Lo
295. nce in pixels that will distinguish a narrow bar from a wide bar lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length min no of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt 10 1 to 65535 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Symbologies RSS Expanded Usage Used to encode primary and supplementary data in retail point of sale and other applications Definition RSS Expanded is a variable length symbology that can encode supplementary information in addition to the 14 digit EAN UCC item identification number and is capable of encoding up to 74 numeric or 41 alphabetic characters Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled non stacked 2 Enabled stacked and non stacked Where appropriate use 1 non stacked instead of 2 stacked and non stacked Fixed Symbol Length Status RSS Expanded Definition When enabled the reader will check the symbol length against the symbol length field minus the embedded check digit If disabled any length would be considered a valid symbol Serial Cmd lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length RSS Expanded Usage Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Definition Specifies the
296. nd easy way to set up and configure Microscan products When the Quadrus Verifier is connected to a host computer Windows Vista XP or 2000 ESP can be used to set up communication with a host configure various firmware settings and control verification processes If installing from a Microscan Tools CD 1 Insert the Microscan Tools CD in your computer s CD drive 2 Choose ESP Software from the main menu 3 Select the Current Version of ESP and follow the file download prompts If downloading from the web 1 Go to http www microscan com downloadcenter 2 Create a new myMicroscan member account or if you are already a member enter your user name and password 3 Click the Download Software link and extract the latest version of ESP to a directory of your choice Note where your ESP exe file is stored on your hard drive 4 At the end of the installation process the following icon will appear on your desktop 5 Click the ESP icon to start the program System Requirements for ESP 166 MHz Pentium processor recommended e Windows Vista XP or 2000 operating system e Internet Explorer 5 0 or higher e 64 MB minimum RAM 40 MB minimum disk space 1 4 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Quick Start Step 4 Select Model When you start ESP the following menu will appear Select a Model ober Quads EZ Quadrus Verifier Quadrus MINI MS Q e AE MS 3CCD MS 3 Laser Bae MS 890 MS 860 MS 820
297. nd grid non uniformity cell modulation unused error correction capacity and minimum reflectance Direct part marking can be achieved by a variety of means including ink jet dot peen laser etch and chemical etch AIM DPM is called out in MIL STD 130N as the preferred guide for ensuring symbol quality and reliability MIL STD 130N MIL STD 130N is a standard for implementing ID automation processes to track United States Department of Defense property The DoD s primary means of parts traceability is the IUID initiative IUID which stands for Item Unique Identification is a system of establishing unique item identifiers Ulls by assigning a machine readable character string or number to an item a single hardware component or grouping of subassemblies thereby distinguishing it from other items Tracing items in this way requires the use of reliable symbols whether in the form of printed labels or marks applied directly to parts MIL STD 130N calls out AIM DPM as the preferred standard for ensuring symbol quality and reliability Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 3 Overview of Verification ISO IEC 15426 2 Verifier Certification ISO IEC 15426 2 is a verifier conformance standard that is referenced in the introduction to the ISO IEC 15415 specification Conformance to ISO IEC 15426 2 is required for certification as a true Data Matrix verifier Why is Verifier re calibration important Like any measurement device the Qu
298. nds to a status request lt gt with a two character hex value such as lt 22 gt To determine status 1 Look up the binary conversion in the table below For example the first hex 2 would be 0 0 1 0 in binary as read from binary digits 3 through 0 the second hex 2 is also 00 1 0 as read from binary digits 7 through 4 2 Next enter your binary values from the table below in the Binary column next to the appropriate bit Binary Bit Binary Verifier Status Hex Bit Digits 0 0 Command error detected Value POHA 1 1 Command received 2 0 Communication error detected 9 7 4 o 9 3 0 Flash sector unprotect failure 2 ololilo 4 0 Host Aux port buffer overflow 3 0 0 1 1 a 4 0 1 0 0 5 1 Verifier is in a read cycle 5 oliloli 6 0 1 10 3 Under Binary interpret 1s as true and Os as not true For 7 o l1l1l1 example bit 1 has a 1 in the Binary column indicating s 1 0 o 3 Command Received Bit 5 is also a 1 indicating that the A l 0 Verifier is in a read cycle C 1lilolo D 1 1 0 1 E 1 1 1 0 lt K gt All Status Request F HENN This is the fastest way to learn the Verifier s current configuration Sending this request will return the current settings of all commands starting with the lowest K command value and ending with the highest K command value lt K gt All Descriptor Status Request This request will return all current descriptors for
299. ne Save Report 4 The first step before grading a symbol symbol of ae Locate Catbrete Hi This view allows the ti user to center the symbol Ss before calibrating Quarus Verfier i Quadivs ventcr OMEN Fort to Port Com 115 2 7 ISO IEC 15415 Verification Reflectance Calibration Please input the reflectance values located on the card and click Calibrate Reflectance UAE SIE ee IE For ISO IEC 15415 Reflectance Calibration use Minimum 1040 100 the spin boxes in the Reflectance Calibration dialog Maximum 85 0 100 to set a min and max value that match those on the reference card and then click Calibrate Reflectance AIM 7 DPM Report Guidelines Reflectance Calibration A591324 Calibration Calibrate Reflectance Cancel AS9132 Verification 59132A Calibration For AS9132 calibration select the corresponding Calibrate Reflectance radio button and click Calibrate Reflectance A green border ae will appear around the symbol AIM DPM Verification after calibration Reflectance Calibration Please input the reflectance values located on the card and click Calibrate Reflectance ISOAEC 15415 Reflectance Calibration AIM DPM Report Guidelines Reflectance Calibration Minimum f10 4 0 100 For AIM DPM Reflectance Calibration use the spin boxes in the Reflectance Calibration dia
300. need to set up your Quadrus Verifier for use with EZ Trax software see Setting Up the Verifier for EZ Trax Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Read Cycle Multisymbol Usage Definition Conditions Multisymbol is commonly used in shipping applications where a shipping symbol contains individual symbols for part number quantity etc This feature allows one trigger to pick up all the symbols Multisymbol allows the user to define up to 6 symbols that can be readina single read cycle The following conditions apply 1 Each symbol must be different to be read 2 The maximum number of characters in a read cycle is 32 520 for all symbols 3 The maximum number of characters the reader can transmit is calculated by Preamble maximum number of symbols aux id symbology id maximum symbol length number of insertion cells x cell length separator postamble LRC 37 425 4 All No Read messages are posted at the end of the data string 5 If more than one symbol is within the field of view at the same time symbol data may not be displayed in the order of appearance 6 If Matchcode Type is set to Sequential or if Trigger is set to Continuous Read 1 Output Number of Symbols will default to 1 if set to any number greater than 1 Number of Symbols Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Number of Symbols is the number of different symbols that can be read in a single read cycle lt K222 numb
301. ngs Export converts the active ESP configuration settings to an ASCII text file 2 4 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Using ESP Model In Model you can select any of the models shown in ESP s model menu When you choose another model your current connection to your present model will be terminated To connect to another model select New Model choose a new New Model model from the menu and click OK Darasa Quadrus Verifier gt Select a Model obere Quads EZ Quadrus Verifier Quadrus MINI MS Q Quadrus 8 MS 3CCD MS 3 Laser BRE OU MINI 3 MS 890 MS 860 MS 820 MS Connect 5100 Description Quadrus Verifier 1 Show legacy products MS 880 MS 850 amp MS 710 IV Show this dialog at startup caresi Note All the models you have enabled by selecting will continue to appear in the Model menu and that the same menu is repeated when clicking the Switch Model icon Caa Switch Model When you save your ESP file you will be saving the settings of all the models defined in a single ESP file Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 2 5 Menu Toolbar Options The Options menu allows you to save memos and set up ESP z Preferences Note Preferences will be saved and loaded into ESP when Preferences ESP is opened next whether or not you save the ESP file Document Memo Model Memo Preferences General Tab ESP Preferences General Terminal Bar Code Options Advanced On
302. nications Read Cycle Symbologies I O Parameters Symbol Quality Matchcode and Diagnostics a Camera setup interface a Terminal interface a Utilities interface and an Output Format interface ESP can be used to configure the Quadrus Verifier in three different ways Tree Controls Each configuration menu contains a list of all option settings that pertain to that specific element of Verifier operation For example the Communications menu shows a Host Port Connections option and then a list of the sub options Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits and Data Bits Each of these sub options is configurable by using dropdown menus Graphic User Interfaces Settings can be configured using such point and click tools as radio buttons zoom in zoom out sliders spin boxes check boxes and drag and drop functions Terminal ESP s Terminal interface allows you to send serial configuration and utility commands directly to the Verifier by typing them in the provided text field For ESP system requirements see System Requirements for ESP in Quick Start Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 2 1 Verification Verification In the Verification view you are presented with the Locate and Calibrate options After connecting to the Verifier Verification is the first view you will see You will be provided with on screen instructions that will help you with symbol positioning location and calibration Enter App Mode to access configuration trees and other
303. niformity Grid Non uniformity Modulation Unused ECC Disabled Print Growth Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 35 ISO IEC 15415 Output by ESP Fixed Pattern Damage Assesses damage to the symbol s finder pattern and clock pattern When enabled includes the symbol s Fixed Pattern Damage Grade in the verification report ISO 15415 Parameters Grade Output Disabled Aperture Disabled Wavelength Disabled Light Angle Disabled Decode Disabled Symbol Contrast Disabled Fixed Pattern Damage Disabled v Axial Non uniformity Disabled Grid Non uniformity Modulation Disabled Unused ECC Disabled Print Growth Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled Axial Non Uniformity Measures deviation along the symbol s major axes When enabled includes the symbol s Axial Non Uniformity grade and or value in the verification report 150 15415 Parameters 3 36 Grade Output Disabled Aperture Disabled Wavelength Disabled Light Angle Disabled Decode Disabled Symbol Contrast Disabled Fixed Pattern Damage Disabled Axial Non uniformity Grid Non uniformity Modulation Unused ECC Print Growth Pixels Per Element Disabled Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Grid Non Uniformity Measures cell deviation from the theoretical or ideal grid intersections as determined by the reference decode algorithm When enabled includes the symbol s Grid Non Uniformi
304. nly one symbol length will be accepted Definition When enabled the PDF symbol must contain the same number of characters as the symbol length setting before it can be considered a good read The reader will ignore any symbol not having the specified length Serial Cmd lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection gt Default 10 Options 1 to 2710 Note Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect 7 24 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Symbologies Codeword Collection PDF417 Usage Multiple Codeword Collection is useful in applications where portions of subsequent images can be read and pieced together so that no opportunity or time is lost to assemble codewords for decoding Definition When set to Multiple PDF codewords is collected from multiple images and assembled throughout the read cycle until the read cycle ends or the symbol is fully decoded It is important to note that when this feature is enabled only one PDF symbol should be presented to the reader per read cycle Serial Cmd lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection gt Default Single Image Options 0 Single Image 1 Multiple Image Note Fixed Symbol Length Status must be enabled for Fixed Symbol Length to take effect Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 7 25 MicroPDF417 MicroPDF417 Usage Use
305. ns 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 7 11 BC412 Fixed Symbol Length BC412 Usage Fixed Symbol Length helps prevent truncations and increases data integrity by ensuring that only one symbol length will be accepted Definition Specifies the exact number of characters that the reader will recognize this does not include start and stop and check digit characters The reader ignores any symbology not having the specified length Serial Cmd lt K481 status check digit output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default 10 Options 1 to 64 7 12 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Symbologies Interleaved 2 of 5 Usage It is has been popular because it is the most dense symbology for printing numeric characters less than 10 characters in length however Microscan does not recommend this symbology for any new applications because of inherent problems such as truncation Definition A dense continuous self checking numeric symbology Characters are paired together so that each character has five elements two wide and three narrow representing numbers 0 through 9 with the bars representing the first character and the interleaved spaces representing the second character A check digit is highly recommended Important You must set Symbol Length in order to decode 2 5 symbols Serial Cmd lt K472 status check digit status check digit outout symbol length 1 sym bol length 2 gt Defau
306. ns Enter data for 1 to 10 symbols any combination of ASCII text up to the maximum indicated in Maximum Characters for Master Symbol For example to enter data for master symbol 5 after making certain that Master Symbol Database Size is enabled for 5 or more symbols see Master Symbol Database Size table send lt K231 9 data gt Caution If no data is entered the existing data will be deleted ESP 1 Open the Utilities menu 2 Set the number of master symbols you want to create in Master Symbol Database Size 3 Double click on each symbol number you want to set up and copy or type your data in the popup dialog and click OK Master Symbol Database Size V Matchcode Type Read Symbol into Selected Index 5 Receive Reader s Database Send Database to Reader Master Symbol Data Master 3 Symbol Data Enter master symbol data here Cancel 4 When all your data has been entered click Send Database to the Reader 14 10 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Utilities Request Master Symbol Data Definition Returns master symbol data for any enabled master symbols from 1 to 10 For example to request master symbol 5 enter lt K231 5 gt The reader transmits master symbol 5 data in brackets in the following format lt 5 data gt If no master symbol data is available the output will be lt 5 gt Serial Cmd lt K231 master symbol number gt Caution Be sure to add the or you will delete the master
307. ntial damages or limitations on an implied warranty so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which may vary from state to state Tel 425 226 5700 Fax 425 226 8250 helpdesk microscan com Quaarus Verifier User s Manual iii Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Quick Start Step 1 Check Required Hardware scccesscessceeseeeeeeeeseeeeeseneesseeeeeeeeaes 1 2 Step 2 Connect the SYSteM ecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneesteeeeeesaes 1 3 step 3ilnstall ESP uri ceeded dele Shee hed weeded isle whee 1 4 Step 4 Select Model 00 0 0 ecceeeceeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeteaeeeaeeeeaeeeseeeeeeseeeseaeeeeetaas 1 5 Step 5 Select Communications Protocol c cccescceceeeeeeesteeeesneeeeeees 1 6 Step 6 Position Verifier and Symbol ecccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 1 7 Step 7 Locate Symbol ae rra aaraa e a aa a a 1 8 Step 8 Calibrate Reflectance eecceesceeeeessceeeneeeeeeteeeteeeeeeeeseeeseeeeaees 1 9 Step 9 Set Verification Parameters cceceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaees 1 10 Step 10 Verify Symbol ooo eee esse eeeeeneeteeeeeeeeseeseaeeeneeteaeeteeeteaees 1 11 Step 11 Generate and Save Verification Report ceceeeeeeeeeees 1 14 Chapter 2 Using ESP MONIC ATION aiea areae a aada aa a EA Da EE EEEa Eai 2 2 Application Mod rn iieri nai see raae re aada ana raae aaa ea pa ate
308. nused ECC Value 12 4 Pixels Per Element Value Print Growth Value ECC200 Symbol Type Pixels Per Element Value 018x018 Symbol Dimensions Symbol Type Symbol Dimensions s Manual 3 15 General Verification Serial Output Symbol Dimension Size Definition Serial Cmd Default Options ISO IEC 15415 Output Example When enabled states the dimensions row value x column value of the mark being evaluated in the verification report output lt K708 separator character unused 0 ISO grade type symbo type symbol dimension size gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Symbol Dimensions highlighted below symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 0 11 3 0 43 3 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 AS9132 Output Example Symbol Dimensions highlighted below symbol_data P 004 003 F 045 057 P 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ISO IEC 15415 Output 2 C 005 660 45 4 A 4 A 075 3 B 1 D 0 11 3 B 0 43 3 B 2 C 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 3 16 ECC200 018x018 AS9132 Command Field Output Command Field Grade P Dot Center Offset Grade Aperture Value 004 Dot Center Offset Worst Case Value Wavelength Value 003 Dot Center Offset Average Value Light Angle Value F Cell Fill Grade Decode Grade 045 Cell Fill Worst Case Value Symbol Contrast Grade 057 Cell Fill Average Value Symbol Contrast Value P Dot Ovality Grade Fixed Pattern Damage Grade 002 Dot Ovality Worst Case Value Axial Non Uniformity Grade
309. o 4 Pace Spots Wit 25 Deger Ratsion Ben bawe Toe mine 55 Tet rat he Default Position 0 rat be Default Position 0 Default Position 0 a i se Default Position 0 rat he Default Position 0 When you see the first rotation prompt trigger the first capture The prompts that follow tet mS ps 117 333 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Multi Capture Verification Report Verification After the final rotation and trigger the Verifier will output the ISO IEC 15415 Multi Capture Verification Report shown below The ISO IEC Multi Capture parameters are the same as those for ISO IEC Single Capture but Multi Capture results are determined only after the symbol is read at five 72 intervals throughout a full 360 rotation The overall symbol grade is based on an arithmetic mean of the results from the five reads Starting Multiple Image Verification Step 1 Place symbol with 45 degree rotation then initiate trigger Step 2 Rotate 72 degrees then initiate trigger Step 3 Rotate 72 degrees then initiate trigger Step 4 Rotate 72 degrees then initiate trigger Step 5 Rotate 72 degrees then initiate trigger 4 6 05 7666 ISO IEC 15415 VERIFICATION REP REFERENCE DECODE SYMBOL CONTRAST FIXED PATTERN DAMAGE AXIAL NON UNIFORMITY GRID NON UNIFORMITY MODULATION UNUSED ECC FINAL GRADES OUERALL GRADE NON GRADED PARAMETERS
310. o status serial command beep status control hex output gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Serial Command Beep Status Usage Definition Function Serial Cmd Default Options 8 20 Used to audibly verify the acceptance and validity of a command Causes the reader to beep once whenever a K command is entered to indicate that the command was accepted and processed If an invalid command is entered the reader beeps 5 times to indicate an invalid entry However this does not necessarily mean that all data fields have been entered incorrectly Only one bad field needs to be found in order to activate the 5 beep response lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Control Hex Output Usage Useful for viewing settings with binary characters when using serial command on a terminal Definition Determines the response to an Serial Command Echo or status request command When set to Control two characters are transmitted to represent a non displayable character For example a carriage return will be shown as the two characters 4M When set to Hex the output is the hex character Serial Cmd lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Default Control Options 0 Conirol 1 Hex Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 8 21 Video Output
311. ocal Distance Focal Plane Focus Force Connect Format Assign Format Assign by ESP Format Assign Status Format Extract Format Extract by ESP Format Extract Length Format Header Format Insert Format Insert by ESP Format Insert Length Four Beeps Position 4 FPGA Frame Frame Grabber From Host Front End System Full ASCII Set Code 39 Full Duplex Aux Port Mode Fully Optoisolated Input Fully Optoisolated Output G Gain Gateway Address General Specifications General Tab General Verification Output by ESP General Verification Serial Output Generate Generate and Save Verification Report Generic Waveform Characteristics Global Threshold Glossary of Terms Good Read Good Read Green Flash Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Index H Good Read Match Counter or Good Read Counter Good Read Match Counter Reset Grade Grade Angle of Distortion Grade Axial Non Uniformity Grade Cell Fill Grade Dot Center Offset Grade Dot Ovality Grade Grid Non Uniformity Grade ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Grade Symbol Contrast Grade and Average Value Cell Fill Grade and Average Value Dot Center Offset Grade and Average Value Dot Ovality Grade and Value Angle of Distortion Grade and Value Axial Non Uniformity Grade and Value Grid Non Uniformity Grade and Value Symbol Contrast Grade and Worst Case Value Cell Fill Grade and Worst Case Value Dot Center Offset
312. ocument specific information here Model Memo Model Memo Similar to Document Memo the information you type in the Model Memo field will appear in a context sensitive text box whenever your cursor hovers over the Model Memo item on the Options menu Memos created in Model Memo are specific to the model enabled when the message was created Insert up to 250 characters to describe this model Type model specific information here Options Preferences Document Memo Model Memo 3 Type model specific information here Note Memos must be saved in a esp file if you want them to available in your next session If you do not save your current session any memos that you have entered during the session will be discarded and will be unavailable in your next session 2 10 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Using ESP View The View menu allows you to move quickly between interfaces without using the icon buttons on the App Mode toolbar It also allows you to access the Bar Code Dialog Bar Code Dialog In the Bar Code Dialog you can create symbols by typing the text you wish to encode This is a useful tool for creating configuration symbols allowing you to configure your Verifier by reading the symbols you create Bar Code Configuration Print Save As Bar Code Value Drag specific configuration values from the control tree directly into this field to encode new symbols eos
313. od of providing a set of good read qualifiers and also providing ordered output There is a filter for up to the first 10 positions in a multisymbol output The first filter corresponds to the first symbol output at the end of the read cycle Each filter has has settings for the following four parameters Symbology Type Symbol Length Data and Configuration Database Number Serial Cmd lt K744 filter number symbology type ength wildcard placeholder data unused database index gt Rules for Output Filter Configuration Output Configuration Rule 1 Each symbol that is decoded must match one of the filters before it can be saved to a read cycle record There is an exception to this rule however when the number of symbols required for a read cycle exceeds the number of active filters In such a case unfiltered symbols can be placed into unfiltered output positions For example if the number of symbols required is 6 but there are only 4 active filters the last 2 positions can be filled by any unfiltered qualified symbol Output Configuration Rule 2 The same filter setup can be used multiple times For example filters 1 2 and 3 can be set up to filter Data Matrix symbols and the output will occur in the order the symbols are decoded Output Configuration Rule 3 All qualified symbols will be sorted and output in the matching filter position If a symbol matches filter 3 it will be output as the third symbol If a filter
314. of IP Database Mienie e EE E E E ETE E ale 12 4 IP Database Windowin ESPs stiaron io teruna i E a e ieee 12 6 Number of Active Database SettingS ccccecceeecceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeaeeseaeesaeeseeeeeeeseaeeneretaaes 12 7 Image Processing Database viiciecAs ete aeeaie enter atin A chee lied 12 8 Image Processing Database by ESP cceeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeesaeeseeeeeaeesaeenaeeseeseaeeeaneraaee 12 10 Save Current Settings to Database 0 eececceececeeeeeneeeeeeteaeeeseeeeaeeeseesaeeseaeeseaeseaeseaeeseaeeeieetes 12 11 Load Current Settings from Database ceecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeaeesaeseaeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeteeeenas 12 12 Request Selected Database SettingS ccccesccesseeeseeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeseeeseaeeseeseaeeeeeseeeenieeeeeeeeaes 12 13 Request All Database SettingS cccccecceseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeeaeeseaeeteesnaeeseeeneeenaes 12 13 ESP s Image Processing Database allows the user to save up to 10 sets of multiple image processing settings Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 12 1 IP Database by ESP IP Database by ESP T Camera Click this button to bring up the Camera Setup tree control You will see these tabs to the left of the Camera Setup tree control Click the IP Database tab to bring up the database view Video Evaluation ROI IP Database Dynamic Setup Video Evaluation ROI IP Database Dynamic Set
315. ogy since 1988 is an alphanumeric symbol with a set of 35 characters each encoded by a set of 4 bars in 12 module positions All bars have a single width and it is the presence or absence of bars in each of the 12 module positions that make s it a binary code hence the prefix BC The symbology is bi directional and self clocking with a start and stop character Serial Cmd lt K481 status check digit output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Check Digit Output BC412 Usage Check digit Output added to the symbol provides additional security Definition When enabled the check digit character is read and compared along with the symbol data When disabled symbol data is sent without the check digit Note With Check Digit Output and an External or Serial trigger option enabled an invalid check digit calculation will cause a No Read message to be transmitted at the end of the read cycle Serial Cmd lt K481 status check digit output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length Status BC412 Definition When enabled the reader will check the symbol length against the symbol length field If disabled any length would be considered a valid symbol Serial Cmd lt K481 status check digit output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Default Disabled Optio
316. ol information is also included Serial Cmd lt K757 comm port image mode image format jpeg quality object info output gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 61 Configuring EZ Trax Output 8 62 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual es 9 MVMatchcode Contents Matchcode byESP ss nau esechiiandids te e a a det teeth sete neat eee Re 9 2 Matchcode Serial COMMANAS eeceeeceeeeeeeteeteneeeeeceaeeeeeeesaeeeaeeeeeseaeeseeeseaeeseeseaeesneseaeeeneeesaees 9 3 Overview of MatchCode esi a e eer ae aae sea sestecsateas antidesteeuseatias a A a eE N a a mata a 9 4 Matchcode Type ieiet e a ae e aaa e a aaa a aa Aa A aE aa cheeks 9 5 Sequential Matching a erie aaea a a ae aE a a a raa eaa e a aaae E Eana 9 6 Mateh Start POSIION caie r a a a a e Aea st a pacts aa a a i ai 9 7 Match Length z Arrea cee cebest cout enealachenecstg aaa a aara ae aa pee eaae S EARTE 9 8 Wild Card Character Greier aa a a a A a RT oka aenesies 9 9 Sequence On No REAd risina aaa aea e E a aR Eae Meade sd ESAn 9 10 Seduence Qn MismMate seirena teea ara a ae a E E A A a a E aa 9 11 SEQUENCE SIC EE ETETE TEATE AET TESS 9 12 Vente naate 1e ATTE AATA TA ETET 9 13 Mismatch Replace iinnoisene a we ed 9 14 New Master Piniectie cok din evi acid iin ne ee i ee E 9 15 This section explains the matchcode output functions and the master symbol database setup Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 9 1 Matchcode by ESP Matc
317. oll from the host before sending data lt K140 4 gt User Defined Point to Point Usage Useful for developing custom protocols in polled or unpolled mode Definition Allows the user to customize the point to point protocol Serial Cmd lt K140 6 RES address REQ EOT STX ETX ACK NAK from host gt User Defined Address Definition User Defined is considered to be in a polled mode only if an address has been assigned Serial Cmd lt K140 6 RES address REQ EOT STX ETX ACK NAK from host gt Default No address Options Any ASCII character except NULL lt or gt 5 6 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Communications User Defined Example Definition Example ACK NAK protocol can be configured using User Defined The reader will transmit data to the host when an ACK is received it will carry on with its business If a NAK or response timeout occurs the reader will re send the data to the host up to 3 more times before aborting Tip To use User Defined Point to Point first select Point to Point lt K140 0 gt and then User Defined lt K140 6 gt Example To select an unpolled ACK NAK User Defined protocol with LRC disabled send lt K140 0 gt lt K140 6 4F U gt lt K145 0 gt ACK and NAK will be displayed in the menu Serial Cmd lt K140 6 RES address REQ EOT STX ETX ACK NAK from host gt Default No assignment Options Any ASCII character except NULL Control characters can be used to define RES through NAK in se
318. ollowed by a comma without a space The following characters cannot be used NULL lt or gt All fields preceding a modified field must be included If there is no change in preceding fields then commas alone can be entered in these fields For example if only the last field in the following command is changing lt K100 4 1 0 0 gt can be entered as lt K100 0 gt All fields following a modified field can be omitted For example to change Baud Rate only send lt K100 3 gt Concatenating Configuration Commands Commands can be concatenated added together in a single string or data block For example lt K145 1 gt lt K220 1 gt lt K450 1 gt lt A gt enables LRC sets End of Read Cycle mode to New Trigger enables Narrow Margins and resets the data buffers without saving the changes for power on Quaarus Verifier User s Manual A 15 Serial Configuration Commands Serial Command Status Request To ensure that any command was received and accepted you can send the Show Verifier Status command lt gt The status of a specific serial command can be requested by entering the command followed by a question mark For example send lt K142 gt to request the status of Postamble Entering Special Characters in Serial Commands To enter control characters within a serial command hold down the control key while typing the desired character Example To enter a carriage return and line feed AM4J enter lt K141 1
319. ommand for quicker response it is recommended that TFTP be used TFTP Server A TFTP client can access the Verifier s image files the Verifier is a TFTP server Since TFTP does not support a directory structure the host application must know the Verifier s file naming convention or request an image list from the Verifier through the primary TCP IP port or RS 232 port with the lt op 9 gt command Limitations The largest data size per packet TCP MSS MTU the Verifier can receive and transmit is approximately 550 bytes Since TCP IP is used this will not prevent larger data transmissions but it will limit throughput An MTU of 550 may be somewhat limiting for some networks but this should not prevent successful operation 16 10 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Mee o pendices Appendix A General Specifications cccecceescseeeeeseeeeeeeaeeceeeeeaeesseeseaeeeanesaeeeaaeeeaeseseeseaeeeeetaaes A 2 Appendix B Electrical Specifications cceeceeecesesceeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeceaeesseeeaeeseaeessaeseaeseaeeseeeeeaeesieeeaes A 4 Appendix C Connectivity Accessories eccceceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeceeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeecaeessaeeeaeesseeeeaeeseeeenaes A 8 Appendix D Serial Configuration COMMANnAS eccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeteeseeeeeeeseaeeeeetea A 11 Appendix E ASCII Table minieren ne ald cen EE a EA E sie A 17 Appendix F Data Matrix SyMbOIlOQ ccecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeesaeessaeeeeeesaeee
320. ompany AS15 X fe Operator AJ AK 1 Report_Created 2 2 4 2006 21 12 amp AL Vers Company Operator XYZ Corp J Doe S AM Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 89 Verification by ESP Save AS9132 Verification Report as an RTF Default Report Type Rich Text Edit Files rtf X PDF Files pdf HTML Files htm 2 a If you have already chosen RTF format in CSV Files Bend aa the Preferences dialog the report will be Rich Text Edit Files rtf saved as an RTF file 4591323 Verification Report MARKING METHOD DOT PEEN ELEMENT SHAPE ROUND REQUIREMENT FAIL IF 2 OF PARAMETER PER ELEMENT RESULTS ELEMENTS FAIL PASS FAIL QUIET ZONE gt One element Piss CONTRAST gt 20 96 N A Verification CELL FILL SIZE 60 lt size lt 105 95 avg 0 failed PASS results and pass fail DOT OVALITY SHAPE lt 20 3 avg 0 failed Piss grades DOT CENTER OFFSET SPACING lt 20 Pass Non graded parameters ANGLE OF and symbol data DISTORTION lt 7 Degrees PASS SYMBOL TYPE Ecc200 Pass MATRIX SIZE 16x16 PIXELS ELEMENT 10 2 Note Image captures are output simultaneously with ameter DATAS 123 the RTF The format JPG or BMP is determined in the Preferences dialog Firmware Version Serial Number This report was created on Saturday February 04 2006 at 21 40 11 Company XYZ Corp Operator J
321. onfiguration settings for the selected database index Serial Cmd lt K250 database index gt Example lt K250 5 gt This command phrase returns the configuration settings for database index 5 Request All Database Settings Definition Returns configuration settings for all indexes in the database Serial Cmd lt K250 gt Example lt K250 gt This command phrase returns the configuration settings for all database indexes Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 12 13 Request All Database Settings 12 14 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual E 73 Terminal Contents Terminal Window ccccccccccccccccceccceeecsssceseseeesenaaeaeeeeeeeseeeeeceseusseeeeeeeeeesaeaeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeesesteaees 13 2 MUN EET TA AEE AA A E AE E casecccescessacesced EE A tae aeea ten icaees stung 13 3 PSS IN PEPEE EE E A I OE AN E A E 13 4 ilete ae REEE I E E AE A A T E E A OE S E sean 13 5 Terminal Window M NusS ccccccccceceeeseeeeeeeeeeenensaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesseseseesesecesesasaeaeeeeeeeeeeeesesesenes 13 6 This section describes the Terminal window and macro functions Note You can learn the current setting of any parameter by inserting a question mark after the number as in lt K100 gt To see all K commands send lt K gt Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 13 1 Terminal Window Terminal Window amp Terminal To use the Terminal interface click the Terminal button You will see this window ESP ESP Unt
322. ons when the maximum length of time between objects can be predicted It assures that a read cycle ends before the next bar coded object appears giving the system extra time to decode and transmit the data to the host Definition Timeout ends the read cycle causing the reader to stop reading symbols and send the symbol data or No Read message when the time set in Timeout elapses times out if When to Output is set to End of Read Cycle If in Continuous Read 1 Output a timeout initiates a new read cycle and allows the same symbol to be read again With either External Edge Serial Data or Serial Data and Edge enabled a timeout ends the read cycle and symbol data or a No Read message is sent to the host With External Level enabled the read cycle does not end until the falling edge trigger or a timeout occurs The next read cycle does not begin until the next rising edge trigger Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 6 15 End of Read Cycle New Trigger Usage New Trigger is an effective way to end a read cycle when objects move past the reader at irregular intervals not timing dependent Definition New Trigger ends the current read cycle and initiates a new one when a new trigger occurs New Trigger refers only to a rising edge trigger With either External Edge Serial or Serial or Edge enabled an edge or serial trigger ends a read cycle and initiates the next read cycle In the case of External Level a falling edge trigg
323. ons with the auxiliary port is always f in Point to Point protocol even if the host is in a vertier polled protocol mode Data initiated from the Host A e All host data is echoed to the auxiliary port in Host Port unpolled mode iw Verifier Serial Cmd lt K101 aux port mode baud rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain ID status daisy chain ID gt 1 Transparent Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 5 11 RS 232 Auxiliary Port Half Duplex Auxiliary Port Mode Usage Definition Serial Cmd 5 12 Useful when the user wants symbol data displayed on an auxiliary menu close to the reader In Half Duplex mode all auxiliary port data and symbol data is sent directly to the host Symbol data is displayed on the auxiliary port menu at the same time the data is sent to the host Data initiated from the Auxiliary Port Auxiliary port data to the host is ignored if the reader is in a polled mode Host Ay or Auxiliary port data or read data is sent to the host K r whenever it is received Auxiliary port data is not echoed Auxiliary port data to the host is always sent Verifier without a preamble or a postamble lt D gt is the only command that is accepted by the reader from the auxiliary port All other commands are passed through to the host Data initiated from the Verifier e Data is transmitted to
324. operate the Quadrus Verifier as a reader Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Quadrus Verifier User s Manual E 5 Communications Contents C mm nications Py ESPE raaa bok bd di nh ea a Re Aeneid ee et tee 5 2 Communications Serial COMMANAS cccssseceseeeeeeneeeecaeeeceseeeecaneeeecaeeeeseeeeseeeeeneaeeeseeeeseneeess 5 3 RS 232 422 HOSt POM ie riren ea aise eee ea at add wat 5 4 RS 232 Auxiliary Portivs vice Seid dies cen eee eit en a Agha Hate 5 9 NGtWoOrk is tate tae dated Mal dacs Aenatig eat lage danke tna ace intel Ala heeled Ol ees 5 18 Preamble dentre ch dees hued codes au e ea ended eara ra a aaaea aa etae a AK ee 5 21 POSIAMDIC oc228 Gedecd shvtiteeedvh ches a e ar a a a r aa ee eaaa Al eek 5 22 Response TIMe Out avita aeaa epe a a Eon Sa a etree ee 5 23 REEE E O E EAE E E E E E E alk eed eee 5 24 Aux P rt System Data Status v0 2 0 draining iia ane a aa eo hand eee keene 5 25 This section tells how to set up communications parameters with the host and an auxiliary terminal With Microscan s ESP configuration changes can be made in the ESP menus then sent and saved to your reader You can also send serial commands to the reader via ESP s Terminal window Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 5 1 Communications by ESP Communications by ESP ae App Mode Click this button to enter Application Mode a Communication Click this button to bring up the Communications tree
325. or Non Printable Characters Default Settings Find Next Find Previous Keyboard Macros F3 Shift F3 e Capture lets you append data in real time to a text file of your choice While in operation the text file cannot be opened You can select Pause to interrupt the capture flow or Stop to end the flow and open the file Save Current Text saves all text in the Terminal window to a text file of your choice 13 6 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual ees 14 Utilities Contents Serial Utility Commands sii sie dead Ss ee Pe 14 2 Read Rate sisiescesd E AES cd A Le 14 3 COUNTE S eend E n E EEA A needed eae LS 14 4 Device Contro lasne he etic HW LLG ee E E a E ENEE 14 6 Differences from Deta lt orina a e a E R E EREDE Ean 14 7 Master Data 5 Emir penenie e a Se At A ede 14 8 FITMWANG 2 25s e eects areas Fv sense ne e a cadena added eds Ms eee eek 14 13 Bar Code Configuration cecceesceeeeeeeneeeeeeseeecaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeaeesaeeseeeeeeeesieeseaeesieeeeeeeneeeeaeesine 14 16 Defaulting Saving ReESetting eccceeseeeeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeaeeseeeeaeeeeeeseaeeseeesnaeeteaeeneeeenatee 14 17 Status REQUCStS nornen neee a Gli aai aaa a aae a E a a Eaa Eaa 14 19 Other Operational COMMANAS ccecceeceeeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeseeeseaeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeeaeeeneeteaeeeieeeeaees 14 20 Utility commands are generally commands that are performed during reader operations to check read rates det
326. or CR134 CR234 but not CR2345 Entering the wild card at the end of the master symbol as in CR will result in matches for variable symbol lengths such as CR1 CR23 CR358 etc Wild Card Character allows a user to define a wild card character as part of the master symbol lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on no read sequence on mismatch gt asterisk Any valid ASCII character Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 9 9 Sequence On No Read Sequence On No Read Usage Sequence On No Read is useful when the reader needs to stay in sequence even if no decode occurs Definition When Sequence On No Read is Enabled and Matchcode is set to Sequential the reader sequences the master symbol on every match or No Read When disabled it does not sequence on a No Read Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on no read sequence on mismatch gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled An example of Sequence on No Read Enabled Master symbol Decoded symbol Master symbol after decode 001 001 002 002 002 003 003 No Read 004 sequenced on No Read 004 004 005 005 No Read 006 sequenced on No Read 006 No Read 007 sequenced on No Read 007 007 008 An example of Sequence on No Read Disabled Master symbol Decoded
327. ortion Disabled Symbol Contrast Disabled Quiet Zone Grade Pixels Per Element Disabled Disabled Value 3 66 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification AS9132 Verification by Serial Command Serial Cmd lt V3 gt AS9132 Verification Process e Place the candidate symbol as close to the center of the Verifier s field of view as possible e When the candidate symbol is in position initiate the AS9132 Verification command lt V3 gt The AS9132 Verification Report will appear detailing the symbol s adherence to AS9132 requirements AS9132 Verification Report The AS9132 results show data concerning marking method element shape quiet zone contrast cell fill cell size dot ovality dot shape dot center offset dot spacing angle of distortion symbol type matrix size element size and pixels per element Symbol assessment is on a pass fail basis MARKING METHOD DOT PEEN ELEMENT SHAPE ROUND REQU I REMENT FAIL IF 2 OF PARAMETER PER ELEMENT RESULTS ELEMENTS FAIL PASS FAIL QUIET ZONE gt One element PASS CONTRAST gt 28 36 z N A CELL FILL SIZE 60 lt size lt 105 105 z PASS DOT OVALITY SHAPE lt 207z 15 avg B z failed PASS DOT CENTER OFFSET SPACING lt 20 16 aug 1 z failed PASS ANGLE OF DISTORTION lt 7 Degrees 1 93 degree PASS SYMBOL TYPE ECC266 ECC266 PASS MATRIX SIZE 22x22 ELEMENT SIZE 6 611 PIXELS ELEMENT 16 5 SYMBOL DATA gt gt 6
328. ose the entire contents of the tree control hold down the Alt key and single click the Click this button to bring up the Read Cycle menu To open nested options single click the To change a setting double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options 6 2 Read Cycle Multisymbol Trigger Mode Trigger Filter Duration External Trigger State Serial Trigger End of Read Cycle Mode Read Cycle Timeout Active Camera H Capture Mode Number of Captures Rapid Capture Mode Capture Time Dual Camera Switching Store Noread Image Image Storage Type Image Storage Mode Parameters External Edge 313 Active Closed Timeout 100 Internal Camera Rapid Capture 1 Timed Capture Disabled First Image re Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Read Cycle Read Cycle Serial Commands Multisymbol lt K222 number of symbols multisymbol separator gt Trigger Mode Duration lt K200 trigger mode trigger filter duration gt External Trigger State lt K202 external trigger state gt Serial Trigger Character lt K201 serial trigger character gt Start Trigger Character lt K229 start character gt Stop Trigger Character lt K230 stop character gt End of Read Cycle lt K220 end of read cycle read cycle timeout gt Active Camera lt K240 active camera gt Capt
329. ou should verify the current firmware 4 Click in the Firmware Update text box and select the file type you want to download This will open a file locator box 5 Navigate to the appropriate file it will be a mot file and open the file Caution Do not interrupt power or disconnect the host cable while download is in progress Be sure that each download is complete before moving on to the next Important When updating firmware be sure that the application code and boot code versions are mutually compatible Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 14 13 Firmware Firmware Verification Request Part Number You can send a request to the Verifier for part numbers checksums boot code and application code By ESP You can access Part Numbers from the Utilities menu 1 Click the Firmware tab 2 From the pulldown selection box to the left of the Request Part No button make your selection 3 Select the code type to see its part number displayed in the text field to the right of the Request Part No button Firmware Verification App Code X Request Part No 35 634001 E7 2 App Code X Request Checksum 9070 By Serial Command e When you send lt gt a request for all product part numbers the Verifier returns lt b BOOT_P N gt lt a APP_P N gt lt p PROFILE_P N gt When you send lt a gt a request for the application code part number the Verifier returns lt a APP_P N gt When you send lt b gt
330. ount of information over 32 characters needs to be encoded within a symbol typically where the symbol is transported from one facility to another For example an automobile assembly line might use a single symbol with multiple fields of information that will be read at several stations along the way without reference to a database Definition A two dimensional multi row 3 to 90 continuous variable length symbology that has high data capacity for storing up to 2700 numeric characters 1800 printable ASCII characters or 1100 binary character per symbol Each symbol character consists of 4 bars and 4 spaces in a 17 module structure Serial Cmd lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Note Sending lt a1 gt will cause PDF417 data to be prefaced with information consisting of error correction level ECC Level n number of rows n Rows number of columns n Columns number of informative code words n Info Code Words and the number of data characters n Data Bytes This feature can be disabled by re sending lt a1 gt Fixed Symbol Length Status PDF417 Serial Cmd lt K476 status unused fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length unused codeword collection gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Fixed Symbol Length PDF417 Usage Used to increase data integrity by ensuring that o
331. ovided in the approximate center of the Verifier s field of view before entering the Reflectance Calibration command Place the Calibration Symbol as q close to the center of the Verifier s field of view as possible before initiating the Reflectance Calibration process IMPORTANT Keep this card in a safe place It must be saved and kept in good condition as it is the Verifier s most critical setup tool VERIFIER CALIBRATION SYMBOL R MAX XX R MIN XX File Model Options Connect View Terminal Help EEE gt apts You can use the Terminal in a oo ay ax ESP to send serial commands Verification Autoconnect Switch Model Configuration Commands can either be 9 B H rnd entered in the Send text field or directly in the terminal Important After the Verifier is calibrated you must allow 15 minutes of warmup time in Live Video Mode lt K760 2 gt before starting a verification process The LEDs must reach a steady output state for verification results to be valid FL FL 10 p Eke Live real time Trigger Image Mode Disabled Triggered Image Frame Live real time 3 44 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual ISO IEC 15415 Single Capture Verification Serial Cmd lt V1 gt Single Capture Verification Process Once the reflectance calibration process is complete place the candidate symbol as close to the center of
332. owing precise timing Diagram B or no delay Diagram A at all between captures Also consecutive captures are regarded as the same symbol if the output data is the same Start of Read Cycle No Time Delay Between Captures Diagram A re ie benno ei gt Time Before First Capture End of read cycle i iy ain Captures Di B ee Emel Ei ce heen End of lagran gt gt el gt read cycle Processing Rapid Capture Mode Single Camera Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 6 19 Capture Mode Calculating Number of Captures in a Rapid Capture Application 1 First calculate the distance between multiple captures For multiple captures in Rapid Capture mode you can calculate the distance Distanca traveled between between successive symbols by multiplying captures the line speed by the capture time TRAVEL DISTANCE Line Speed X 15mS Note For Dual Camera operations add 33mS ga ga to the overhead time for the first external capture gt Example E Bd A symbol moving at 10 ips inches per second past a CCD reader travels 0 010 mS 15mS 0 15 inches between captures 2 Next calculate number of captures Once the travel time is known you can 0 78 inches FOV easily calculate the number of captures ja gt you can expect to occur inside a FOV by E E subtracting the symbol size from the FOV l l and dividing the result by the tr
333. pe is set to Sequential Number of Symbols will default back to 1 if set to any number greater than 1 Allows the user to enter user defined wild card characters in the master symbol Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 9 5 Sequential Matching Sequential Matching Usage Useful in tracking product serial numbers that increment or decrement sequentially Definition With Sequential enabled Sequential Matching determines if a count is in ascending incremental or descending decremental order Serial Cmd lt K223 matchcode type sequential matching match start position match length wild card character sequence on no read sequence on mismatch gt Default Increment Options 0 Increment 1 Decrement 9 6 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Matchcode Match Start Position Usage Match Start Position is useful in defining specific portions of a symbol for comparisons For example if a symbol contains a part number manufacturing date and lot code info but the user is only interested in the part number information With Match Start Position the reader can be set to only sort on the part number and ignore the rest of the characters Definition Match Start Position determines the portions of symbols that will be matched by defining the first character in the symbol from left to right that will be compared with those of the master symbol when Matchcode Type is set to Enabled or Sequential Function For example if Match Start Posit
334. peration Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 12 11 Load Current Settings from Database Load Current Settings from Database Definition Allows the configuration settings contained in a selected database index to be loaded to current active configuration settings Serial Cmd lt K250 database index gt By ESP Video Evaluation RO IP Database Dynamic Setup Shutter Processing Narrow Background Threshold Fixed Mode Margins Color Mode Threshold Current 1000 550 Reference Disabled White Adaptive 128 1000 550 Standard Disabled White Adaptive 6 Standard Disabled i Adaptive 7 1000 550 Standard Disabled White Adaptive 8 1000 550 Standard Disabled White Adaptive 9 1000 550 Standard Disabled white Adaptive 10 1000 550 Standard Disabled White Adaptive lt gt Calibrate 5 Number of Active Indexes ieee eae Re deurrene i Receive Send Settings Load Current To Index Click Load Index to Current to download the configuration settings from a selected database index to the reader for use as the current active configuration settings This command essentially allows you to remove a single group of settings from the IP Database sequence and make those settings the reader s current configuration profile to be applied to the reader independent of the IP Database 12 12 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual IP Database Request Selected Database Settings Definition Returns c
335. ple of Object Detector Operation A 20 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Appendices Appendix H Operational Tips Cleaning The Quadrus Verifier has a hard coated window that should only be cleaned with 100 isopropyl alcohol Mounting If you use the Quadrus Verifier as a fixed mount reader do not insulate the stand mount The bottom of the Verifier is the hottest part of the unit and metal to metal contact is needed for heat dissipation Quaarus Verifier User s Manual A 21 Embedded Menus Appendix Embedded Menus In addition to ESP you can also use a communications menu such as HyperTerminal to establish communication with Microscan s embedded menus 1 With your host connected to the Quadrus Verifier set your host communications settings as follows 115 2K baud 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bits and None Parity 2 Set Flow Control to None 3 Make the communications port selection Usually COM 1 for Windows Operating Systems Upon connection send a lt D gt command to bring up the main menu MAIN MENU TOPICS COMMUNI CATIONS READ CYCLE 2D SYMBOLOGY LINEAR SYMBOLOGY 1 LINEAR SYMBOLOGY 2 1 0 CONDITION DATA OUTPUT 1 DATA OUTPUT 2 DATA FORMAT VERIFICATION DIAGNOSTICS DESCRIPTION HOST PROTOCOL amp HOST AUX PORT CONFIG TRIGGERING TIMEOUTS ETC 2 D CODE AND GLOBAL CODE PARAMETERS LINEAR CODE 1 PARAMETERS LINEAR CODE 2 PARAMETERS DISCRETE 170 BEEPER DATA MESSAGES ETC VIDEO OUTPUT
336. plication Code Checksum lt b gt Display Boot Code Checksum lt d gt Display DSP Code Checksum lt f gt Display FPGA Code Checksum Device Control lt L1 gt Programmable Output 1 lt L2 gt Programmable Output 2 lt L3 gt Programmable Output 3 Default Reset Save lt A gt Reset does not save for power on lt Ard gt Reset and recall Microscan defaults lt Arp gt Reset and recall power on parameters lt Arc gt Reset and recall customer default parameters lt Z gt Save current settings for power on lt Zc gt Save current settings as customer default parameters lt Zrd gt Recall Microscan default parameters and save lt Zre gt Recall customer default parameters and save Status Commands lt K gt All Configuration Commands Status lt gt Input Status lt gt Reader Status lt 1 gt Extended Reader Status Operational Commands lt VER gt ISO IEC 15415 Reflectance Calibration lt V1 gt ISO IEC 15415 Single Capture Verification lt V2 gt ISO IEC 15415 Multi Capture Verification lt V3 gt AS9132 Verification lt AIMDPM R max R min gt AIM DPM Reflectance Calibration lt V4 gt AIM DPM Verification 14 2 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Utilities Read Rate Read Rate by ESP You can access Read Rate from the Utilities menu To see the number of decodes per second click the Decodes sec radio button and click the Start button To see the percentage of decodes click the Percent radio button and Start button To
337. ponse to Histogram command lt op 14 gt The primary purpose of this port is for access to a dedicated video stream for ESP functions in particular Because the format of the binary frame data is quite different from the Verifier s other command responses and outputs sending this data on a dedicated independent TCP port facilitates easier ESP implementation Also end users who wish to implement their own applications may find this useful since it has a consistent data type and provides access to a port whose only traffic is that which the host application has initiated The Video TCP Port is read only from the host s perspective The Verifier does not receive any data or commands on this port The Verifier only processes commands from the primary Command TCP port Also the Verifier only responds to the video port if the video port has a connection to the host and a command is received that requires a binary frame response If the video port is unconnected the Verifier will respond to the primary port This allows hosts the option to operate via a single port Image File Transfers The Verifier s image files can be accessed with either binary frame commands lt op 4 gt and lt op 5 gt or TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol Binary Frames These are primarily intended for ESP s near real time video purposes Although it is possible to get a full size image from the Verifier using an lt op 4 gt or lt op 5 gt c
338. ptures taken by the internal camera before switching to the external camera Serial Cmd lt K243 switching mode number of internal captures number of external captures internal camera timeout external camera timeout gt Default 1 Options 1 to 8 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 6 25 Dual Camera Switching Number of External Camera Captures Usage Useful where two cameras can expect different symbols within a given read cycle Definition The number of captures taken by the external camera before switching to the external camera Serial Cmd lt K243 switching mode number of internal captures number of external captures internal camera timeout external camera timeout gt Default 1 Options 1 to 8 Rapid Capture Mode Examples Since examples 1 and 2 are in Rapid Capture mode the cameras will continue to switch until the Number Of Captures setting has been met Example 1 Time Between Captures 0 Active camera Dual Capture mode Rapid Number of captures 7 Number of internal camera captures 5 Number of external camera captures 3 Up to 33mS time delay before 1st external capture Internal 1 2 3 4 5 External 6 7 Processing Note The third capture for the external camera does not occur because the total number of captures 7 has been met Note In this mode the first capture from an external camera 6 is the above example could be delayed for up to 33mS unti
339. quirements Watchdog Timer A security device that detects system crashes and attempts to reset the reader Quaarus Verifier User s Manual A 29 Glossary of Terms A 30 Quaarus Verifier User s Manual Hyperlink Index A Absorption Active Camera Active Illumination Active State Input Add Remove Exception Additional Isolated Output Circuit Examples Advanced Options Advanced Tab Al Format 05 AIM DPM AIM DPM Evaluation Parameters AIM DPM Quality Guideline AIM DPM Reflectance Calibration AIM DPM Reflectance Calibration by ESP AIM DPM Verification by ESP AIM DPM Verification by Serial Command AIM DPM Verification Process AIM DPM Verification Report AIM DPM Verification Results AIM DPM Verification Setup AIM DPM Verification Setup by ESP All Descriptor Status Request All Range Status Request All Status Request Alpha ISO Grade Type Always Ask Before Auto Sync Occurs Ambient Light Analog Analog Gain Adjustment Analog to Digital Converter Angle Angle of Distortion Angle of Distortion AS9132 Symbol Quality Aperture Aperture Value Appendices Application Mode Architecture ARP AS9132 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual B AS9132 Calibration AS9132 Evaluation Parameters AS9132 Output by ESP AS9132 Serial Output AS9132 Symbol Quality Output 1 AS9132 Symbol Quality Output 2 AS9132 Symbol Quality Output 3 AS9132 Verification AS9132 Verification by Serial Command AS9132
340. r Character 4 2 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Unique Item Identifiers Non UIll Characters The table below identifies and describes all characters in a UII data string that are not part of the final concatenated UII sent to the host Non UII Characters in a Data String Compliance 7 oes Indicator Identifies to the Verifier that the data string contains a UII Format Describes the type of data qualifier used These qualifiers Header include Al format 05 DI format 06 and TEI format DD Trailer Character An ASCII character that separates the compliance indicator from the format header information and also appears at the end of the data string Data Element Separator An ASCII character used to separate data fields Message Trailer Character Data Qualifier Identifies the end of the message within the data string Defines each data element placed in the UII data string When a data string in any of the three available formats is read by the Verifier non UII characters are removed and the UII is sent to the host Al format 05 DI TEI format 06 format DD Verifier y UII Host Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 4 3 UII Mode Features UII Mode Features Ull Only Enabled Allows the Quadrus Verifier to read only UII data strings encoded in ECC 200 Data Matrix symbols and to send
341. r offset percentage failed offset cell fill percentage failed cell fill dot ovality percentage failed ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone grade pixels per element value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Grade Laser Chemical Etch Only 2 Value 3 Grade and Value Laser Chemical Etch Only Grade Definition A passing grade is represented by P and a failing grade is represented by F Output Example Symbol Contrast Grade highlighted below symbol_data P 004 003 F 045 057 P 002 001 F 08 20 P P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Value Definition Symbol Contrast Value is a percentage and is shown in the output string as a three digit value from 000 to 100 For example 034 34 Output aay Example Symbol Contrast Value highlighted below symbol_data P 004 003 F 045 057 P 002 001 F 08 20 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Grade and Value Output Example symbol_data P 004 003 F 045 057 P 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Symbol Contrast Grade and Value highlighted below 3 60 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Quiet Zone Grade Definition The Quiet Zone is a clear space of at least one module element surrounding the symbol required for symbol readability When enabled this feature outputs a pass P or fail F grade for Quiet Zone SerialCmd lt K712 dot center offset percentage failed offset cell fill percentage failed cell f
342. r on load ip database save for power on gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 31 EZ Button Modes EZ Button Modes Usage Useful for performing multiple repetitive tasks at the work site Definition Allows user to program each of EZ button s 4 positions from a selection of 8 modes Serial Cmd lt K771 position 1 mode position 2 mode position 3 mode position 4 mode gt Options Single Beep Two Beeps Three Beeps Four Beeps 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Read rate 1 Read rate 1 Read rate 1 Read rate 2 Calibrate 2 Calibrate 2 Calibrate 2 Calibrate 3 Save forpoweron 3 Save for poweron 3 Save for poweron 3 Save for power on 4 Unused 4 Unused 4 Unused 4 Unused 5 Load new master 5 Load new master 5 Load new master 5 Load new master 6 Unused 6 Unused 6 Unused 6 Unused 7 Target system 7 Target system 7 Target system 7 Target system 8 Live Video 8 Live Video 8 Live Video 8 Live Video 9 Bar Code Config 9 Bar Code Config 9 Bar Code Config 9 Bar Code Config Disabled When set to disabled the associated button position will have no function associated with it and the position will be skipped over Read Rate Read rate will be initiated when the associated button position is selected Read rate will perform decodes second and is the same
343. r patern li m rotate clockwise from the defaults QR Code Da shown above Am Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size status symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimen sion tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default 0 Options 0 to 359 Note A symbol s orientation can miss the precise Orientation Value by several degrees and still be qualified To be certain of the extent of the allowable tolerance you should experiment with symbols in various orientations In no case can they be more than 45 from the assigned orientation value and still be qualified Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 15 Read Duration Output Read Duration Output Usage Useful in evaluating actual read cycle timing results especially when initially setting up an application to determine maximum line speed that can be obtained based on the spacing between symbols Definition When enabled the duration of the read cycle in milliseconds is appended to the symbol data The read duration is the time from the beginning of the read cycle until data is output Read Duration Output Mode Serial Cmd lt K706 status separator gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Important To measure the entire read cycle when in External Level trigger mode set When to Output Symbol Data to End of Read Cycle This output can measure over 49 days worth of durat
344. rate parity stop bits data bits daisy chain ID sta tus daisy chain ID gt Default 1 Options Any one or two ASCII characters Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 5 15 RS 232 Auxiliary Port Daisy Chain Autoconfigure Usage For quick setup and configuration of the daisy chain network Definition Daisy Chain Autoconfigure is issued to the master reader in the daisy chain and the software responds as follows e Counts the number of secondary readers in the daisy chain e Assigns an internal ID number 1 n to each secondary reader where the first secondary reader is number 1 and its own ID being a 0 Propagates the communications settings and the relevant operating modes of the master reader to the host and auxiliary ports of each secondary reader Resets each secondary reader Ensures that each secondary reader has acquired the new settings Serial Cmd lt K150DAISY gt Note All secondary readers must be set to Serial for Daisy Chain to function When setting up a daisy chain operation perform the following steps 1 Set the master reader the reader connected to the host to Serial This sets all the readers in the daisy chain to Serial when the command is carried out Before Autoconfigure you must set the master reader to Serial S Host Primary Secondary Secondary Reader T el Reader al Reader S S S 2 Send lt K150DAISY gt command 3 If necessary set the master reader
345. ration cccecceceseeseesseeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeaeesneeseaeeeneensaes 14 16 Defaulting Saving Resetting eeeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeee 14 17 SAWS REUSE a Shas eaa aa a a Ea A 14 19 Other Operational Serial COMMANAS eceecceeeteeeeeeeeeeteteteneeeneetaaes 14 21 Chapter 15 Output Format Output Format Serial COMMANAS e cceeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeetas 15 2 Output Format Statuss asire kid ainda edi adie ESEE 15 3 Format ASSIQN pyesnin a Siete agen Mots Sapira g 15 4 Format Extract s 5 400 aii ee ee cee eee 15 5 Format Inserts caches aes aie teteesh ania ace ae pees 15 7 Output Filter Configuration 0 ceeeeseeseeteneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeenaeeeaeees 15 9 Ordered Output Filter eee eccceeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeseaeesaeeeaeeeeessaeeeaeensaes 15 13 Chapter 16 Ethernet Step ol Setups cesses Ache vere Aiea av UES aN a ieee Enee 16 2 Step 2 Preliminary Steps eeceeeceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseaeeeaeeeseetes 16 3 Step 3 Communicating in Ethernet eeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeas 16 7 Step 4 Ethernet Application eeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeneeeeneeeeeeeeatess 16 8 Appendices Appendix A General Specifications ccceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeseaeeeeeeeneeees A 2 Appendix B Electrical Specifications eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeneeees A 4 Appendix C Connectivity Accessories eeceeeeeceeeneeeteeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeerersas A 8 Append
346. re 25 Wavelength 660 Angle 45 Reflectance Max 0 100 Reflectance Min 10 Reflectance Min This setting represents the minimum reflectance value percent of the symbol used to calibrate the Verifier ISO IEC 15415 Setup 3 22 Aperture 25 Wavelength 660 Angle 45 Reflectance Max 85 Reflectance Min 0 100 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification ISO IEC 15415 Serial Output This command allows the user to determine which ISO IEC 15415 grades and or values will be represented in the verification output string Grade Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Output Example Note The grade type Alpha or Numeric is determined by the ISO Grade Type field in the General Verification Serial Output command lt K708 gt lt K756 grade aperture value wavelength value light angle value decode grade symbol contrast fixed pattern damage grade axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation grade unused error correction print growth value pixels per element value gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Grade Overall Grade highlighted below shown in numeric form symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 0 11 3 0 43 3 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 Aperture Value Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Output Example Expresses the Synthetic Aperture Value in the verification output string lt K756 grade aperture value wavelength value light angle value d
347. re the dropdown menu shown below When set to Enabled a failing grade will activate output Note The Symbol Contrast parameter Se Symbol Quality 4591324 only takes effect when Marking Method is Dot Center Offset Disabled set to Laser or Chemical Etch lt K711 1 gt Cell Fill Disabled Dot Ovality Disabled Angle of Distortion Disabled Disabled v Symbol Contrast Disabled 3 Disabled Quiet Zone Disabled Enabled Serial Cmd lt K842 dot center offset cell fill dot ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone gt See AS9132 Symbol Quality Output 1 for command structure and options 8 54 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Diagnostics Output 3 Note Output On under Output 3 Parameters must be set to Diagnostic Warning for this output to function Output 3 Parameters Output On Diagnostic Warning Over Temperature Disabled Disabled bad Service Unit Disabled gt Disabled External Camera Disconnect Disabled Enabled Serial Cmd lt K792 over temp service unit external camera disconnect gt See Diagnostics Output 1 for command structure and options Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 55 Configuring EZ Trax Output Configuring EZ Trax Output If you intend to use the Quadrus Verifier with EZ Trax Software you can configure the software in three different ways using the EZ Trax interface using the tree controls in ESP and using serial com
348. read cycle When enabled for Active Off loff the triggering device interrupts the current to the optoisolator to activate the read cycle SerialCmd lt K202 external trigger state gt Default Active On Options 0 Active Off 1 Active On Note External Level External Edge or Serial Data or Edge triggering mode must be enabled for External Trigger to take effect 6 12 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Read Cycle Serial Trigger Usage Definition Allows the user to define the trigger character and delimiters that start and stop the read cycle A serial trigger is considered an online host command and requires the same command format as all host commands that is to be entered within angle brackets delimiters lt and gt or in the case of non delimited triggers define individual start and stop characters Serial Trigger Character Delimited Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Allows the user to define the trigger character that initiates the read cycle A single ASCII host serial trigger character that initiates the read cycle A delimited trigger character is one that either starts or ends the read cycle and is enclosed by delimiters such as lt and gt lt K201 serial trigger character gt Spacebar corresponds to lt SP gt displayed in the embedded menu Any single ASCII character including control characters except NULL 00 an existing host command character or an on line protoco
349. reader to serial trigger mode program a new trigger to end the read cycle and exit the bar code configuration mode with the lt J gt To end all EZ button functions press the EZ button and quickly release 14 16 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Utilities Defaulting Saving Resetting Understanding and controlling your reader s active saved and default settings is critical to the operation of your reader Software Reset Save Recall Commands P Serial ESP first right click in Function Cmd any menu tree EZ Button Save to Reader Reset lt A gt Send No Save No Go a x Reset and recall Microscan 3 3 defaults lt Ard gt No No on Reset and recall power on 22 parameters lt Arp gt No No o Reset and recall customer default parameters oa No No Save current settings for lt Z gt Save to Reader No S power on Send and Save L Save to Reader g Save current settings as lt Zc gt Send and Save Customer No 5 customer default parameters Defaults pa Recall Microscan default parameters and save for lt Zrd gt No No 3 power on A Recall customer default Press and hold on parameters and save for lt Zrc gt No while powering on power on Reader a When you right click in a menu tree and select Default Current Menu Settings or Default All ESP Settings it is important to note that only ESP settings are defaulted To save these defaults to the reader itself you nee
350. resize the region of interest You can also click on the center of the region of interest and move it about 3 Test the new settings in Read Rate Mode Note to remove the region of interest click the Reset button or just click anywhere in the ROI pane Notice that all pixels not in the ROI are defined as black Because the Quadrus Verifier has much less processing to do in a smaller window read rates typically increase dramatically One possible downside is that the chance of missing a symbol increases with the smaller window Always verify that your ROI will be large enough to allow for any random movement of symbols in your FOV Region of Interest 0K Reset Capture and Decode Cancel Top 0 Height 0 4 Good Decode Left 0 width 0 Region of Interest View Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 11 11 Region of Interest ROI Region of Interest by Serial Command The exact size and position of the ROI within the image area can be defined numerically in terms of pixels Region of Interest Parameters shows where to locate the start position of the row and column pointers and how to measure the column depth and row width dimensions Top Row Pointer Definition Defines the row position of the upper left starting point of the window SerialCmd lt K516 top left height width gt Default 0 Options 0 to 496 Left Column Pointer Definition Defines the column position of
351. retation for other character sets No Yes optional Data encoded in Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Base 11 27 41 37 ASCII 8 bit Byte ASCII C40 text X12 EDIFACT and Base 256 A 19 Object Detector Appendix G Object Detector The Quadrus Verifier can be used as a fully functional reader in a wide variety of applications In a typical operation a reader will wait for symbol data only during a triggered read cycle A read cycle is initiated by a trigger and can be in the form of a serial command from the host internal trigger or a signal from an object detector external trigger When an object detector also called a sensor package detector etc is used it is set up so that its beam will be interrupted by the approaching object and the resulting pulse will be sent to the reader to begin the read cycle Typically a detector is positioned so that it will detect the presence of an object before its symbol can be read An object detector is mounted in almost any position relative to the object as long as 1 the object passes within range of the detector and 2 direct or reflected light from the detector does not interfere with the reader s reception As the item continues to move down the line its symbol moves into the reader s field of view and is decoded Object and Symbol Object and Symbol Object Detector Quadrus Verifier IB 150 Interface Kit To Host Exam
352. rial Output Average Value Dot Center Offset Definition Average Value is a percentage and is shown in the output string as a three digit value from 000 to 100 For example 003 3 Output oie Example Dot Center Offset Average Value highlighted below symbol_data 003 F 045 057 P 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Worst Case and Average Values Dot Center Offset Output Dot Center Offset Worst Case Value and Average Value highlighted Example below symbol_data 004 003 F 045 057 P 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Grade Dot Center Offset Definition Grades take into account both the worst case and average values A passing grade is represented by P and a failing grade is represented by F Output Example symbol_data P F 045 057 P 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Grade and Worst Case Value Dot Center Offset Dot Center Offset Grade highlighted below Output Example symbol_data P 004 F 045 057 P 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Dot Center Offset Grade and Worst Case Value highlighted below Grade and Average Value Dot Center Offset Output Example symbol_data P 003 F 045 057 P 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Dot Center Offset Grade and Average Value highlighted below Grade Worst Case and Average Values Dot Center Offset Output Dot Center Offset Grade Worst Case Value and Average Value highlighted E
353. rial commands From Host Definition This option allows the handshaking protocol to be initiated from the host if not configured in an unpolled mode Messages sent to the host will include the reader s defined protocol The status of From Host determines if messages sent from the host to the reader must include the defined protocol If From Host is disabled the defined protocol is not included If From Host is enabled the defined protocol must be included Serial Cmd lt K140 6 RES address REQ EOT STX ETX ACK NAK from host gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Multidrop Usage A concentrator can be used to connect up to 50 devices to a single host port connection Definition Multidrop allows up to 50 devices to be connected to a single RS 485 host with the reader assigned an unique address from 01 to 50 Multidrop Each address has its own separate poll and select address from 1C to 7F Addresses hex Options 01 through 50 Serial Cmd If selecting Multidrop K140 5 an address must be defined and appended to the command string Format lt K140 5 address gt When Multidrop is selected the protocol characters for RES REQ etc are assigned automatically Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 5 7 RS 232 422 Host Port User Defined Multidrop Usage This option is used when connecting to a concentrator or other device that does not match standard multidrop protocol If selecting User Defined Mul
354. rid non uniformity modulation grade unused error correction print growth value pixels per element value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Value Output Example Light Angle Value highlighted below symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 0 11 3 0 43 3 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 3 24 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Decode Grade Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Output Example To receive a passing Decode Grade a symbol must be successfully decoded using the Verifier s reference decode algorithm When enabled appends the symbol s Decode Grade to the verification output string A symbol will receive a 0 F if it cannot be decoded using the specified reference decode algorithm It will receive a 4 A if it can be decoded using the specified reference decode algorithm lt K756 grade aperture value wavelength value light angle value decode grade symbol contrast fixed pattern damage grade axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation grade unused error correction print growth value pixels per element value gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Grade Decode Grade highlighted below shown in numeric form symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 0 11 3 0 43 3 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 Symbol Contrast Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Measures the difference between light and dark symbol elements This measurement also includes
355. rifier s software This parameter is in units of 1 10000 of one inch or 10x the mil size Serial Cmd lt K531 aperture wavelength angle reflectance maximum reflectance minimum gt Default 50 Options 10 to 160 Wavelength Definition Expresses the wavelength of LED illumination that will be directed at the candidate symbol during verification Wavelength values are in nanometers nm Serial Cmd lt K531 aperture wavelength angle reflectance maximum reflectance minimum gt Default 660 Options 400 to 700 Angle Definition The degree angle at which the candidate symbol will be illuminated in the lighting chamber during verification Serial Cmd lt K531 aperture wavelength angle reflectance maximum reflectance minimum gt Default 45 Options 30 to 90 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 19 ISO IEC 15415 Verification Setup Reflectance Maximum Definition Serial Cmd Default Options This setting represents the maximum reflectance value percent of the symbol used to calibrate the Verifier The calibration symbol is described in Step 6 of the Quick Start procedure lt K531 aperture wavelength angle reflectance maximum reflectance minimum gt 85 0 to 100 Reflectance Minimum Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 3 20 This setting represents the minimum reflectance value percent of the symbol used to calibrate the Verifier The calibration symbol is described in Step 6 of the Qui
356. rking Method e Element Shape Deis M30 ag fe a Fie Edit view Insert Format Tools Data Window Help AV amp Bs Quiet Zone A B C D BIRRE 1 Sym_DataMark_Meth Elem_Shape Quiet_Zone 2 123 DOT PEEN ROUND gt One element PASSI a 4 0 File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help ontras s e Cell Fill Pekan SAV 8 v z T34 X f e OK E M N a 1 Contrast Cell_Fill 2 gt 20 84 N A 60 lt size lt 105 100 avg 0 failed PASS a ji W File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help b ot Ovality ai x 5 z Dot Center Offset HAA SAY amp B v ez AE29 X f P Q R 5 T U Y W 1 Dot_Ovality Dot_Center 2 lt 20 1 avg 0 failed PASS lt 20 2 avg 0 failed PASS Columns X AE File Edit view Insert Format Tools Data Window Help e Angle of Distortion m z e Symbol Type HSA ARAY amp gns A119 Sa f x YZ AA AB AC AD AE 1 Angle_Distortion Sym_Type 2 lt 7 Degrees 0 7 PASS ECC200 ECC200 PASS Columns AF Al Matrix Size Pixels Per Element Firmware Version Verifier Serial AN25 f AG v AF File Edit view Insert Format Tools Data Window HAR SRAY AH Matrix_Size Pix_Element Firmware_Vers Verifier Ser_Num Sloe Al D Number 1 2 14x14 9 5 panies AJ AM File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Date Time ESP Version Dees ARAY C
357. rtant to note that the enabling New Master Pin does not in itself cause a master symbol to be recorded The master pin must then be activated momentarily for a minimum of 10 ms before a master symbol can be read into memory Serial Cmd lt K225 status gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled After New Master Pin has been enabled and the pin activated decodes will be saved in the master database beginning with master symbol 1 If the reader is configured for a multisymbol read cycle Number of Symbols is greater than 1 the remaining decodes will be saved in each consecutive master symbol location For example if Number of Symbols is set to 3 and New Master Pin is then activated at the end of the next read cycle the decoded symbols will be saved as master symbols 1 2 and 3 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 9 15 New Master Pin 9 16 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual ee 70 Diagnostics Contents Diagnostics by ESPss icis eek gis asl ee Le ee ie 10 2 Diagnostics Serial Commands ccceeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeaeeenaeesaaeeeaeeeaeeseaeesaeessaeesaeeseeeseaeeseeeeeaeenaas 10 2 Counts Read Only 4chea teste niceties arm ae en ace 10 3 External Camera Message rres rianne ae acne ed a E Eaa 10 4 Over Temperature Message sinonieme aids a aaae a eaii ee nal 10 6 Service Messager miraion ie rat inate i E aae a ete eee a at 10 7 This section describes warning and operating messages and their settings Quaaru
358. s Definition Outputs an image file when a specified condition good read or No Read is met The video output can be confined to a single event such as a good read or can be fed as continuous live video Serial Cmd lt K739 image output status com port file format JPEG quality gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Good Read 2 No Read 3 Good Read and No Read Disabled No image file will be output at the end of the read cycle Good Read Image Output Usage Provides a visual record for comparison Definition If a Good Read condition is met the image file of the first good read image will be output immediately following the read cycle output postamble In order for a good read condition to occur all symbols must qualify in the read cycle No Read Image Output Usage Provides visual representation to identify quality issues with No Read images Definition If a No Read occurs the image file of the first No Read image will be output immediately following the read cycle output postamble Conditions where an image will not be output e The Verifier was expecting two symbols in the same image capture but only one was read e The image had a good read present and therefore would not be considered a No Read image Good Read and No Read Image Output Usage Provides a visual record for comparison and allows the user to identify quality issues with No Read images Definition The image file of t
359. s 0 to 65535 2 097seconds in 32uS increments Start of read i cycle je N p Time Before First Capture joes gt Time Before First Capture Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 6 23 Capture Timing Time Between Captures Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options This is useful in applications where more than one symbol can appear during a single read cycle multisymbol or where line speeds are slow enough that captured frames might overlap or miss a symbol A time delay can be inserted between individual frame captures in the Rapid Capture mode lt K242 time before 1st capture time between captures time 1 timed time7 gt Entering 0 s will result in no time between captures Diagram A Entering a different value in each field will vary the time delays accordingly Diagram B Note You must enter time values along with comma separators for each field you want to change If you omit fields or enter only commas the fields will remain as previously set 0 0 to 65535 2 097 seconds in 32uS increments Note Number of Captures and number of delays Time Between Captures must be the same 6 24 Start of Read Cycle Time Delay Between Captures 0 we iaiabe en Sup Rose nana Si Sees ee End of 2lsl4l5 read cycle Diagram A Time Delay Between Captures varies Diagram B a a a Lo ARTA A
360. s Verifier User s Manual 10 1 Diagnostics by ESP Diagnostics by ESP A To open the entire contents of the tree control hold down the Alt i py key and single click the To close the entire contents of the tree control hold down the Alt Diagnostics key and single click the Click this button to bring up the Diagnostics menu Parameters Diagnostics Counts Read Only Power on To open nested options single click the oo O O External Camera Message Over Temperature Message Status Disabled Warning Message OVER_TEMP Service Message Status Disabled Service Message SERVICE Threshold 300 ET Seconds To change a setting Minutes double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options Diagnostics Serial Commands Power on Reset Counts lt K406 power on resets 00wer on saves customer default saves gt External Camera Message lt K410 disconnect msg status disconnect message connect msg status control message gt Over Temperature Message lt K402 over temperature status warning message gt Service Message lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt 10 2 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Diagnostics Counts Read Only Counts for Power on Reset Saves are stored in the reader and can be displayed at any time in response to serial commands listed here in the embedded Diagnostic
361. s Verifier User s Manual 11 15 Camera Camera Configures the operation of the CCD image sensor Typically most of these parameters will be adjusted during the calibration process and do not need to be modified directly by the user Gain Usage Can be used to adjust pixel gray scale values for readability Definition The CCD has a programmable gain amplifier that controls the amount of gain applied to the pixel gray scale value prior to output This value can vary depending on lighting conditions and shutter speed SerialCmd lt K540 shutter speed gain gt Default 550 Options 0 to 1023 Shutter Speed Usage Faster shutter speeds reduce blurring in faster applications Slower shutter speeds are useful in slower and lower contrast applications Definition Shutter speed is the time in fractions of a second that the CCD sensor is exposed to light SerialCmd lt K540 shutter speed gain gt Default 1000 1 1000 second Options 50 to 50 000 Note When Live video mode is active in order to synchronize with the video format a shutter time of 1 1000 is the lowest shutter speed setting that can be applied to the camera settings Slower shutter speeds will disable the video output 11 16 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Camera Setup Illumination Source Usage Allows different intensities of light or external lighting to be applied to a variety of symbols in various environments Definition Configures the illumina
362. s Verifier internal camera If using an external camera images are received on an as ready basis Allow a 33mS delay for the first image to appear from an external camera Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 11 1 Camera Setup by ESP Camera Setup by ESP Camera Click this button to bring up the Camera Setup menu Parameters z amera Setup Camera Illumination Source External internal lighting disabled To open the entire contents of the tree control hold down the Alt key and single click the To close the entire contents of the tree control hold down the Alt key and single click the 11 2 Image Processing Settings Processing Mode Image Processing Timeout Multiple Symbols in Fast Linear Mode Mirrored Image Background Color Threshalding Threshold Mode Threshold value Reference Decode Algorithm 0 0 Both white Adaptive 128 Rapid Capture Rapid Capture Continuous Capture To open nested options single click the To change a setting double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Camera Setup Camera Setup Serial Commands Region of Interest lt K516 top left height width gt Camera lt K540 shutter speed gain gt Illumination Source lt K535 Iumination source gt Thresholding lt K512 threshold mode threshold value gt Processin
363. s by dedicating individual pins to specific functions and by requiring both devices to share acommon ground line Since both device chassis are connected to a common ground a ground loop potential and the possibility of noise interference exists Therefore cable lengths are limited to a maximum of 50 feet 19 7m Despite being the most limited this interface is used frequently because of the large installed base of RS 232 equipment Ethernet Ethernet is supported for 10Mbps per second with packets between 64 and roughly 1 500 bytes in length A 6 byte address is used which is divided into a 3 byte vendor ID and a 3 byte vendor defined field Ethernet manufacturers are assigned a unique vendor ID and are then responsible for insuring that all of their devices have unique addresses in the last 3 bytes Quaarus Verifier User s Manual A 23 Glossary of Terms Appendix K Glossary of Terms Aberration The failure of an optical lens to produce an exact point to point correspondence between the object and its resulting image Various types are chromatic spherical coma astigmatism and distortion Absorption tThe loss of light of certain wavelengths as it passes through a material and is converted to heat or other forms of energy Active IIlumination The process of lighting an area coordinated with the simultaneous acquisition of an image Strobed flash tubes and pulsed lasers are examples Ambient Light Light that is present in t
364. s for Entering and Using Master Symbols Stop Stop Bits Aux Port Stop Bits Host Port Stop Character Non Delimited Store No Read Image Store Report without file path prompt Subnet Summary of Utility Serial Commands Supplemental Type UPC EAN Supplementals Status UPC EAN Switch Model Switching by Number of Captures Switching by Timeout Switching Mode Symbol Contrast Symbol Contrast AS9132 Symbol Quality Symbol Contrast AS9132 Symbol Contrast ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Symbol Contrast ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Data Output Symbol Dimension Symbol Features 22 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual T Symbol Length 1 Interleaved 2 of 5 Symbol Length 2 Interleaved 2 of 5 Symbol Number Symbol Parse Symbol Size 1 2D Symbology Qualification Symbol Size 2 2D Symbology Qualification Symbol Size Mode 2D Symbology Qualification Symbol Size Tolerance 2D Symbology Qualification Symbol Transitions Symbol Type Symbol Verification Parameters Symbologies Symbologies by ESP Symbologies Serial Commands Symbology Symbology ID Symbology Type Synchronous Trigger Synchronous Trigger Enabled Synchronous Trigger Restrictions T Table of Contents Target Pattern Target Pattern Always OFF Target Pattern Always ON Target Pattern On When in Read Cycle Target Pattern On When NOT In Read Cycle TCP TCP IP TEI Format DD Terminal Terminal Dropdown Menu Terminal Strip Interface Kit Terminal
365. s or use of Chassis Ground Power Ground and Signal Ground lines could equipment failure or software failure A 4 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Optoisolator Outputs Appendices Optoisolator circuits can transfer pulses between the Verifier and peripherals with no direct connection with the Verifier s internal circuitry However not every optoisolator configuration provides complete isolation The following diagrams show both fully optoisolated and non optoisolated circuits They are only examples and do not represent all the possible wiring configurations Output Circuit Examples Fully Optoisolated This circuit is fully optoisolated and the recommended configuration It allows the user to apply 1 to 28 VDC to the circuit Caution The maximum current that can pass through the optoisolator is 100mA Not Optoisolated Verifier Grounded In this diagram power is applied externally but the Verifier s power ground is used to complete the circuit This setup involves some risk to the optoisolator if excessive voltages are applied Caution The maximum current that can pass through the optoisolator is 100mA Quadrus Verifier User s Manual lload 5mA lload 50mA lload 100mA VOut On 0 5V 0 5V 1 0V tOn Typ 5mS 0 7mS 0 8mS tOff Typ 5uS 5uS 5us Scanner Outputs Output A oad ak Outputs Isolated Verifier Scanner Output Outputs
366. se the entire contents of the i tree control hold down the Alt key Disabled and single click the Disabled Disabled Symbol Contrast Disabled Fixed Pattern Damage Disabled 7 Axial Non uniformity Disabled E Grid Non uniformity Disabled Modulation Grade Unused ECC Value Print Growth Both Pixels Per Element Disabled ISO IEC 15415 Setup AIM DPM Setup Minimum Element Size 10 Maximum Element Size 15 Wavelength 660 v Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 3 71 Verification by ESP Preferences Tab The Preferences tab allows the user to set defaults that are automatically activated when verification processes are completed For this reason the user is advised to set preferences before performing verification Report Settings Preferences Fields for report This information is appended at the bottom Operator Name Doe of the verification report Company Name SYZ Corp Choose the default report type to be generated when you click Save Report on the Report tab Check Autofit Content to ensure that saved PDF report content will fit on a single page Saved Options PDF Files pdf MV Show Report Options dialog during Save Report sd Ei ad PDF Files pdf Default Report Type PDF Files pdf gt HTML Files htm CS Files csv BI Autofit Content Low Graphic HTML f Append to file csv Rich Text Edit Files rtf
367. sed to create the symbol Choice of Marking Method setting should be based on the method used to create the symbol being verified Serial Cmd lt K711 element shape marking method JES 131 gt Default Dot Peen Options 0 Dot Peen 1 Laser or Chemical Etch Dot Peen Dot peen is a percussive marking method that uses changes in depth to create the contrast between light and dark elements Dot peen marks are imprinted directly on parts This method is recommended for applications in which marks must last the entire life cycle of the part Laser or Chemical Etch Laser etch marks are applied directly to parts using a YAG CO or YVO laser Laser etch marks are ideal for high volume automated environments and they can be used on a wide variety of substrates Chemical etch marks are created using an electro chemical process by which a low voltage electrical current passes through a stencil and onto a part s surface This process only works with conductive metal substrates Chemical etch marks are best suited to low volume product runs because of the complexity and time intensive nature of the marking process Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 49 AS9132 JES 131 Marking Method JES 131 Definition When enabled sets verification parameters to the JES 131 specification rather than the AS9132 specification JES 131 specifies a Cell Fill upper threshold of 110 instead of AS9132 s 105 JES 131 verification reports will display
368. settings that will be applied during operations Each index 1 to 10 will have its own settings for example lt K250 1 gt lt K250 2 gt etc Serial Cmd lt K250 database index shutter speed gain threshold mode threshold value processing mode background color narrow margins gt Default 0 Options 1 to 10 Gain Serial Cmd lt K250 database index shutter speed gain threshold mode threshold value processing mode background color narrow margins gt Default 0 Options 0 to 1023 Shutter Speed Serial Cmd lt K250 database index shutter speed gain threshold mode threshold value processing mode background color narrow margins gt Default 0 Options 50 to 50000 Threshold Mode Serial Cmd lt K250 database index shutter soeed gain threshold mode threshold value processing mode background color narrow margins gt Default Adaptive Options 0 Adaptive 1 Fixed 12 8 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual IP Database Threshold Value Serial Cmd lt K250 database index shutter speed gain threshold mode threshold value processing mode background color narrow margins gt Default 0 Options 0 to 255 Processing Mode Serial Cmd lt K250 database index shutter speed gain threshold mode threshold value processing mode background color narrow margins gt Default Standard Options 0 Standard 1 Mode 1 2 Mode 2 3 Mode 3 4 Mode 4 5 Fast Linear Mode 6 Reference Decode Algorithm Background
369. sponses and symbol data All data formatting is supported lt K740 gt lt K7415 Differences from Other Protocols e Y Modem is not supported This includes the Firmware Download command lt dy gt and the Image Send command lt uy gt An immediate response to the Verifier s Status command lt gt is not sent The response is queued for output between read cycles Also the response is formatted with host port preamble and postamble characters Aux port RS 232 interaction is not supported for transferring data between Ethernet and the aux port Transparent Half Duplex and Full Duplex These modes only function with the Host RS 232 port and are not affected by Ethernet Responses to binary frame commands from the Video TCP Port are sent when connected If not connected the response will be sent to the Primary TCP Port Primary Command TCP Port This port is used for all command processing and data outputs except binary frame command responses The application protocol used is the same as the Host RS 232 port Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 16 9 Ethernet Application Video TCP Port The Video TCP Port is transmit only output from the Verifier read only by the host and is used for binary frame data outputs as follows 1 Response to Image Send command lt op 4 gt 2 Response to Capture and Decode and Save command lt op 5 gt 3 Response to Symbol Information command lt op 8 gt 4 Res
370. ss subnet mask A bit mask is used to identify which bits in an IP address correspond to the network and subnet portions of the address Use this to configure a subnet mask that is compatible with the host network and the reader s IP address lt K125 P address subnet address gateway address P address mode primary TCP port video TCP port gt 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Communications Gateway Address Definition AA gateway is a communications device program which passes data between networks having similar functions but dissimilar implementations This should not be confused with a protocol converter Usage This parameter is currently unused by the reader Serial Cmd lt K125 P address subnet address gateway address IP address mode primary TCP port video TCP port gt Default 0 0 0 0 Options 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 IP Address Mode Definition Configures the method the reader will use to acquire its IP address Usage If host network has a DHCP server then DHCP mode can be used to assign the reader an IP address from a central location Typically the DHCP server can be configured with the reader s MACID so a known IP can be assigned If the host network does not have a DHCP server then the reader must be programmed with a Static IP address Serial Cmd lt K125 P address subnet address gateway address IP address mode primary TCP port video TCP port gt
371. symbols will appear in the FOV during a read cycle by adjusting the delay time before capture Note If not already in Edge and Rapid modes the reader will automatically change to those settings when you open the Dynamic window 1 First set the Capture 2 Next set the Number of Captures and Number of Symbols that will be read during the read cycle 3 Set Delay time lf Number of Captures is set to 1 Delay time will be the time between the start of a read cycle and the first capture If set to any number other than 1 Delay time will be the time between the capture set in Capture and the previous capture 4 Start the moving application and trigger the read cycle 5 Adjust the Delay setting so that the symbol appears near the center of the window For example if Number of Symbols is set to 3 and Capture is set to 1 the Delay time will represent the time before the capture You can change the number by manually sliding the bar tab back and forth or by typing in a number Numbers in the Delay box are rounded to the nearest value in 32uS increments Video Evaluation Calibration WOI Configuration Database Dynamic Setup 100 0 Number of Number of Read Rate Capture Captures Symbols 1 a e BE Delay Sec Delay Adiustment Show Calculator 0 066464 Coarse C Fine Decrease Increase Dynamic Setup View Note If a read cycle trigger occurs before ESP has finis
372. t After the Verifier is calibrated you must allow 15 minutes of warmup time in Live Video Mode lt K760 2 gt before starting a verification process The LEDs must reach a steady output state for verification results to be valid 3 68 gt EE Live rel timey muri Trigger Image Mode Disabled rrn Image Frame Triggered lo Live real time Quadrus Verifier User s Manual AIM DPM Verification Process Serial Cmd lt V4 gt Verification Once the reflectance calibration process is complete place the candidate symbol as close to the center of the Verifier s field of view as possible e When the candidate symbol is in position initiate the AIM DPM Verification command lt V4 gt The AIM DPM Verification Report will then appear detailing the symbol s adherence to AIM DPM guidelines AIM DPM Verification Report The AIM DPM results show data concerning the reference decode algorithm cell contrast fixed pattern damage axial and grid non uniformity cell modulation unused error correction reflectance print growth symbol type symbol size element size and pixels per element All but the last five parameters are given a numeric and alphabetical grade DPN 4 6 15 7666 7459 REFERENCE DECODE CELL CONTRAST FIXED PATTERN DAMAGE AXIAL NON UNIFORMITY GRID NON UNIFORMITY CELL MODULATION UNUSED ECC MINIMUM REFLECTANCE FINAL GRADE NON GRADED PARAMETERS PRINT GROWT
373. t if at least one object qualifies then a Bad Symbol message is output Symbol Size 1 2D Symbology Qualification Definition Checks for symbol sizes for a specified number of elements In the case of rectangular symbols checks the longer side Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size status symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimen sion tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default 10 Options 8 to 88 elements Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 8 11 Bad Symbol No Symbol Qualification Symbol Size 2 2D Symbology Qualification Definition Checks for symbol sizes for a specified number of elements In the case of rectangular symbols checks the shorter side Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size status symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimen sion tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default 10 Options 8 to 88 elements Symbol Size Tolerance 2D Symbology Qualification Definition Sets the allowable deviation up or down for symbol sizes specified in Symbol Size 1 and Symbol Size 2 Serial Cmd lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size status symbol size 1 symbol size 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Default 2 Options 0 to 10 Dimension Mode 2D Symbology Qualific
374. t K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default One Options 0 One 1 Two Data Bits Host Port Definition One or two bits added to the end of each character to indicate the end of the character Serial Cmd lt K100 baud rate parity stop bits data bits gt Default 8 Options 0 Seven 1 Eight 5 4 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Communications Host Port Protocol Usage In general the point to point protocols will work well in most applications They require no address and must use RS 232 or RS 422 communications standards Definition Protocols define the sequence and format in which information is transferred between the reader and the host or in the case of Multidrop between multiple readers and a concentrator Serial Cmd lt K140 protocol gt Default Point to Point Options 0 Point to Point 1 Point to Point with RTS CTS 2 Point to Point with XON XOFF 3 Point to Point with RTS CTS and XON XOFF 4 Polling Mode D 6 User Defined Point to Point Standard Usage Used only with RS 232 or RS 422 Definition Standard Point to Point requires no address and sends data to the host whenever it is available without a request or handshake from the host Serial Cmd lt K140 0 gt Point to Point with XON XOFF Usage If an XOFF has been received from the host data will not be sent to the host until the host sends an XON During the XOFF phase the host is free to carry on other chores and
375. t LED illumination options Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Using ESP Application Mode The Quadrus Verifier can be used as a reader as well as a verifier ESP s App Mode offers complete control of configuration parameters From Verification you can click on the App Mode button to access specific configuration menus Utilities tools Camera setup Output Format options and a Terminal window where serial commands can be entered Note The App Mode and EZ Mode buttons appear in the same position to allow easy switching between these primary modes Camera Setup Evaluation Region of Interest IP Database Dynamic Setup Click here for Click this icon to Ordered Output return to Verification Click here to open and Output Format the Terminal view features Menu toolbar E ESP Untitled DER Fie Model Options Connect View Help ax F all x ex Verification Autoconnect Send Recy Switch Model Configuration Camera Terminal Utilities Output Format Q TS a _ i 5 eH i lt M A ea res i SLT Vy Click on icons in this row Communication Read Cycle Symbologies Matchcode Diagnostics to access configuration Parameters EnA trees like the one at left Communications RS232 422 Host Port Click the Configuration icon to return to full App Mode view from Verification Camera Terminal Utilities or Output Format Host 422 Status Disabled R5232 Auxiliary Port
376. t No Read image in the read cycle The image file will immediately follow the symbol data Note If two symbols are present in the same image capture and one of them is successfully decoded no image will be output No Read and Good Read Outputs the first No Read or Good Read image in the read cycle Mismatch Outputs the image of the first mismatch condition Image Format Definition Selects the format of the image output file Serial Cmd lt K757 status comm port image mode image format jpeg quality object info output gt Default Compressed Options 0 Lossless 1 Compressed Lossless A lossless image is one that is in a high resolution format and that will not lose resolution even when manipulated and saved multiple times When Lossless is enabled the JPEG Quality setting has no effect Compressed Outputs the image in JPEG format Image quality is determined by the JPEG Quality setting JPEG Quality Definition Sets the amount of JPEG image compression A value of 1 represents the highest compression and lowest image quality and 100 represents the lowest compression and highest image quality Serial Cmd lt K757 status comm port image mode image format jpeg quality object info output gt Default 90 Options 1 to 100 percent 8 60 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Object Info Output Definition If a symbol is decoded during an image capture the symbol type and other supplementary symb
377. t Options dialog during Save Report Decade Disabled Default Report Type PDF Files pdf Symbol Contrast Disabled Fixed Pattern Damage Disabled J Autofit Content T Low Graphic HTML Append to file csv Axial Non uniformity Disabled 3 n v Grid Noreunifariely Disabled MV Store Report without file path prompt Modulation Disabled Use symbol data for file name Unused ECC Disabled Print Growth Disabled C Documents and Settingssymbol grades Default Path Pixels Per Element Disabled 7 J p ISO IEC 15415 Setup Automatically open generated report Print after saving Aperture 50 z weevelonacth ae IV Includelmage Bitmap JPEG Ande 2 JPEG ity 100 Reflectance Max 85 mee ve 1 100 Reflectance Min 10 AIM DPM Setup ISO IEC 15415 Options Minimum Element Size 10 V Enable MIL STD 130M Maximum Element Size 15 Wavelength 660 Check type each time for ISO IEC 15415 Verification Lighting 45Q SO IEC 15415 Single Capture SOAEC 15415 Multi Capture MV Enable UIl Parsing Default Settings Revert Settings 1 10 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Quick Start Step 10 Verify Symbol When you have finished setting and saving verification parameters and output preferences move to the Report tab and click the button that corresponds to the type of verification routine you need to perform Report Settings Preferences ISOAIEC 15415 4591324 Verification AIM DPM Quality Guideline Save Report
378. t Status Discrete I O DMA Do Not Send or Receive Settings Document Memo Dot Center Offset Dot Center Offset AS9132 Symbol Quality Dot Center Offset AS9132 Dot Ovality Dot Ovality AS9132 Symbol Quality Dot Ovality AS9132 Dot Peen Downloading ESP from the Web DSP Dual Camera Switching Dynamic Range Dynamic Setup Dynamic Setup Calculator E EAN Status ECC 000 ECC 000 140 ECC 050 ECC 080 ECC 100 ECC 120 ECC 130 6 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual E ECC 140 ECC 200 Edge Enhancement Editing a Macro Effect Effect of Command EID Too Long Electrical Specifications Element Element Shape Embedded Memory Embedded Menus Emissions Immunity Enable Output Format Enable PDF Information Enable Reader Enable Send and Save as Customer Defaults Encoding a UII End of Read Cycle End of Read Cycle Mode End Read Rate Test Enhanced Format Enter Decodes Second Test Enter Master Symbol Data Enter Percent Test Entering Special Characters in Embedded Menus Entering Special Characters in Serial Commands Enterprise Identifier EID Environmental EPROM Error Message Examples Error Messaging ESP Preferences ESP System Requirements Ethernet Ethernet Application Ethernet Interface Standard Ethernet Setup Ethernet USB Interface Ethernet USB Notes Evaluation Example of Object Detector Operation Example of Timeout in Continuous Capture Mode Example of Timeout in Rap
379. t V1 gt Verification ISO IEC 15415 Multi Capture lt V2 gt Verification AS9132 Verification lt V3 gt AIM DPM Reflectance Calibration lt AIMDPM Rmax Rmin gt AIM DPM Verification lt V4 gt Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Appendices Serial Command Format Serial commands are of two types utility and configuration Rules that apply to both utility and configuration commands A less than lt and greater than gt characters enclose the commands Commands and data are case sensitive That is characters must be entered as upper or lower case as specified Serial Utility Commands These are sent during operations and are not followed by a lt A gt or lt Z gt Serial Configuration K Commands These begin with a single K character followed by a 3 digit numeric character data fields and an initializing command as follows lt Knumeric parameter data data etc gt lt initializing command gt An initializing command lt A gt or lt Z gt may follow the command A lt Z gt initializes the Verifier s memory and saves for power on an lt A gt initializes the Verifier s memory but does not save for power on For example to enable UPC and save the change for power on send lt K473 1 gt lt Z gt To change Baud Rate and reset without saving changes for power on send lt K100 3 gt lt A gt Serial Configuration Command Conventions All data fields except the last must be f
380. t at least 30 mS for each secondary reader in the daisy chain If no data is received within the read cycle timeout the master sends a No Read message to the host Otherwise the complete data is sent If for example the master reader is set to timeout in 120 mS the first secondary reader downstream might be set to 90 mS the next to 30 mS and so on thus assuring that at least 30 ms elapses between transmissions Daisy chained readers can send a series of symbols by enabling Multisymbol and a common multisymbol separator If the master reader does not receive the expected number of symbols No Read messages are appended to the data string to make up the difference between the number of symbols enabled in Multisymbol and the number of symbols read For example a master and two secondary readers have Number of Symbols set to 3 and Multisymbol Separator defined as If the master and the first secondary reader do not find symbols but the next secondary reader registers a good read the transmitted results would be symbol data No Read No Read a The above example is based on the best case Other factors such as baud rate dynamic focus timing number of characters in a given symbol and the number of secondary readers in the daisy chain can affect timing and may need to be included in your calculations for complete accuracy 5 14 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Communications Command Processing Mode Auxiliary Port Mode Us
381. t output Serial Cmd lt K708 separator character unused 0 SO grade type symbol type symbol dimension size gt Default Comma Options Any ASCII character except NULL lt or gt ISO IEC 15415 Output Example symbol datay 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 0 11 3 0 43 37 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 Default Separator Character comma highlighted below AS9132 Output Example symbol_data P F 045 057 P 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 ISO Grade Type Definition Determines whether ISO IEC 15415 grades are in alphabetical or numeric form Note This setting does not affect AS9132 output because AS9132 symbol evaluations are on a pass fail basis Serial Cmd lt K708 separator character unused 0 SO grade type symbol type symbol Default Separator Character comma highlighted below dimension size gt Default Alpha Options 0 Alpha 1 Numeric 3 12 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Alpha ISO Grade Type If alphabetical grading is chosen ISO IEC 15415 grades will be represented by the letters A best B C D or F fail Output Example All Alpha grades highlighted below symbol_data C 005 660 45 A A 075 B D 0 11 B 0 43 B C 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 Output 2 C 005 660 45 4 A 4 A 075 3 B 1 D 0 11 3 B 0 43 3 B 2 C 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 Command Field Grade Aperture Value Wavelength Value Light Angle Value
382. tabase is enabled the reader s current settings for Shutter Speed Gain Threshold Mode Fixed Threshold Value Processing Mode Background Color and Narrow Margins will no longer impact reader operation For those parameters only settings that are in the database will be used for image capture and processing When in IP Database mode and at the end of a read cycle or a calibration routine if a decode has occurred the settings that were applied to that decode will move to the top of the database For example if a decode occurred using the 4th configuration index it would be moved to index 1 and the configurations preceding index 4 would be moved down one slot as illustrated below Index Moved to 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 1 5 5 When changing database settings it is not always necessary to re capture an image If the new configuration changes a camera parameter then it is necessary to re capture an image The capture mode selected Rapid or Continuous also has an impact on whether a new image needs to be captured The following summarizes the operation of the reader for the two different capture modes when IP Database is enabled 12 4 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual IP Database Rapid Capture Mode In Rapid Capture mode a capture can occur during image processing For this reason it is not possible to modify any image processing or decode parameters in this mode and only camera configuration settings in the database will take effect The fo
383. te See coe al Source for buttons more details The Verifier s field of view is shown here When a verification routine is completed the initial report is also shown in this viewing area For Help press F1 Quadrus Verifier 1 Quadrus Verifier EGMREGTEDIINNN Point to Point comi 115 2K 3 70 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Settings Tab The Settings tab allows users to view the candidate symbol in the Verifier s field of view using live video to calibrate the Verifier for ISO IEC 15415 AS9132 and AIM DPM verification to set the desired image capture number and if using a Triggered mode to determine the method of triggering Note The Live real time setting is intended for applications in which an external video monitor is used The video view in ESP is frame by frame and is not real time in the same sense as an external monitor Report Settings Preferences Ehen aal Gra E Video External Monitor Disabled Triggered Status Live real time gt ERIE Rel Trigger Mode Last Capture D Last Capture Good Read Parameters Noread Symbol Verification Slide Show A Data Matrix Selected Capture a General To open the entire contents of the tree control hold down the Alt key and i single click the next to the first level Disabled heading Symbol Verification Disabled To clo
384. ter PLC or other device that is used to execute commands and process data IEC International Electrotechnical Commission A global organization that publishes international standards for electrical electronic and other technologies Image Projection of an object or captured area onto a plane i e screen or image sensor Image Processing Transformation of captured image data into an output image with desired properties Image Resolution The number of rows and columns of pixels in an image An image sensor s total number of pixels Image Sensor Array of pixels on a CCD or CMOS sensor Initialize To implement serial configuration commands into the Verifier s active memory Input A channel or communications line Data or a discrete signal received by a device See also Output Integration Exposure of pixels on a CCD or CMOS sensor ISO International Organization for Standardization A network of the national standards institutes of more than 155 countries with a central headquarters in Geneva Switzerland IUID Item Unique Identification A United States Department of Defense initiative to implement a globally accepted identification system based on globally unique and unambiguous identifiers Ladder Orientation A linear symbol in which the bars are parallel to the symbol s direction of travel assuming horizontal movement LED Light emitting diode Often used as a strobe for objects traveling at
385. tern and clock pattern When enabled appends the symbol s Fixed Pattern Damage Grade to the verification output string Serial Cmd lt K756 grade aperture value wavelength value light angle value decode grade symbol contrast fixed pattern damage grade axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation grade unused error correction print growth value pixels per element value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Grade Output Example Fixed Pattern Damage Grade highlighted below shown in numeric form symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 0 11 3 0 43 3 2 057 0 82 08 7 ECC200 032x032 Axial Non Uniformity Definition Measures deviation along the symbol s major axes When enabled appends the symbol s Axial Non Uniformity grade and or value to the verification output string Grading Scale 4 A if lt 0 06 3 B if lt 0 08 2 C if lt 0 10 1 D if lt 0 12 0 F if gt 0 12 Serial Cmd lt K756 grade aperture value wavelength value light angle value decode grade symbol contrast fixed pattern damage grade axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation grade unused error correction print growth value pixels per element value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Grade 2 Value 3 Grade and Value Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 3 27 ISO IEC 15415 Serial Output Grade Axial Non Uniformity Output Example symbol_data 2 005 660 45 4 4 075 3 1 3 0 43 3 2 057 0 82
386. ters up to 15 signifying the angle and configuration of illumination used in the verification environment Important For reliable Direct Part Mark verification results Microscan recommends setting the Lighting parameter to 90 This is because diffuse perpendicular or on axis bright field illumination in which the symbol plane is parallel to the plane of the Verifier s sensor and the symbol is uniformly illuminated at a 90 angle of incidence is most effective for reading Direct Part Marks Note Details about other lighting configurations and their corresponding ASCII representations can be found in AIM Global s Direct Part Mark DPM Quality Guideline available at www aimglobal org AIM DPM Setup Minimum Element Size 10 Maximum Element Size 15 Wavelength 660 Lighting 459 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 43 ISO IEC 15415 Verification by Serial Command ISO IEC 15415 Verification by Serial Command Reflectance Calibration Definition Serial Cmd The Reflectance Calibration command initiates a calibration process with the minimum and maximum reflectance values that are already configured in the Verifier default minimum lt K531 10 gt default maximum lt K531 85 gt Note If the minimum and maximum reflectance values configured in the Verifier correspond with a different calibration symbol the results after calibration may be incorrect lt VER gt e Place the calibration symbol pr
387. the ISO Grade Type parameter ISO 15415 Parameters Disabled 7 Aperture Disabled wavelength Grade Light Angle Disabled Decode Disabled Symbol Contrast Disabled Fixed Pattern Damage Disabled Axial Non uniformity Disabled Grid Non uniformity Disabled Modulation Disabled Unused ECC Disabled Print Growth Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled Aperture Expresses the Synthetic Aperture Value in the verification report 150 15415 Parameters Grade Output Disabled Disabled v Wavelength Light Angle Value Decode Disabled Symbol Contrast Disabled Fixed Pattern Damage Disabled Axial Non uniformity Disabled Grid Non uniformity Disabled Modulation Disabled Unused ECC Disabled Print Growth Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 33 ISO IEC 15415 Output by ESP Wavelength Wavelength Value expresses the peak wavelength of LED light output measured in nanometers nm ISO 15415 Parameters Grade Output Disabled Aperture Disabled Wavelength Light Angle Disabled Decode Symbol Contrast Disabled Fixed Pattern Damage Disabled Axial Non uniformity Disabled Grid Non uniformity Disabled Modulation Disabled Unused ECC Disabled Print Growth Disabled Pixels Per Element Disabled Light Angle Defines the angle of incidence of LED illumination 150 15415 Parameters Grade Output Disabled Aperture Disabled Wavelength Disabled Light Angle
388. the UII output to the host computer The Verifier will not read any other symbol data when Ull Only is enabled Ull Only Enabled with Allows the Quadrus Verifier to read only UII data strings encoded in ECC 200 Data Matrix symbols and to send the UII Error Messaging output to the host computer In addition the Verifier will send an error message to the host if the UII data string is invalid UII Enabled with Pass Allows both Ull encoded symbols and non UIl symbols to be Through decoded and sent to the host UII Enabled with Error Allows the Quadrus Verifier to decode UIl symbols and non UIl Messaging and Pass symbols and to provide error messages if the UII data string is Through invalid UII Mode by ESP Thies lm 0 Click this button to bring up the I O Parameters menu Open the nested Unique Item Identifier option in the I O Parameters tree control e EEE Disabled y z Error Message Disabled Enabled Ull only To change settings double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options Y Note The setting Enabled in ESP s UII tree controls is functionally identical to UII Enabled with Pass Through in the table at the top of this page Therefore the combination of UII Enabled and Error Message Enabled is functionally identical to the UII Enabled with Error Messaging and Pass Through condition in the table at the top of the page 4 4
389. the upper left starting point of the window SerialCmd lt K516 top left height width gt Default 0 Options 0 to 656 Height Row Depth Definition Defines the size in rows of the window Maximum value is defined as the maximum row size of image sensor minus the Top value SerialCmd lt K516 top left height width gt Default 0 Options 0 to 496 Width Column Width Definition Defines the size in columns of the window Maximum value is defined as the maximum column size of Image sensor minus the Left value SerialCmd lt K516 top left height width gt Default 0 Options 0 to 656 11 12 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Camera Setup IP Database The Image Processing Database allows users to save multiple collections of camera and IP settings and to apply them sequentially during a read cycle See Chapter 12 IP Database Video Evaluation RO IP Database Dynamic Setup Shutter jier Narrow Background Threshold Fixed Speed Mode Margins Color Mode Threshold Current 1000 Reference Disabled White Adaptive 6 1000 550 Standard Disabled White Adaptive 0 7 1000 550 Standard Disabled 8 1000 550 Standard Disabled White Adaptive 0 9 1000 550 Standard Disabled White Adaptive 0 Calibrate 5 Number of Active Indexes teiaa Receive Send Settings Load Current To Index Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 11 13 Dynamic Setup Dynamic Setup You can visually determine where moving
390. ti Capture Verification lt V2 gt AS9132 Verification lt V3 gt AIM DPM Reflectance Calibration lt AIMDPM R max R min gt AIM DPM Verification lt V4 gt 3 2 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Overview of Verification The use of Data Matrix symbols in ID automation applications requires high quality marks The purpose of verification is to ensure reliability and consistency of symbols based on the strict criteria outlined in the AS9132 and ISO IEC 15415 standards and the AIM DPM quality guideline The Quadrus Verifier is designed to evaluate marks based on the specific parameters in AS9132 ISO IEC 15415 and AIM DPM AS9132 The AS9132 standard specifies uniform quality and technical requirements for direct part marking with Data Matrix symbols Direct part marking can be achieved by a variety of means including ink jet dot peen laser etch and chemical etch Note AS9132 and AS9132A are used interchangeably throughout this documentation AS9132 is the name of the specification and the suffix A denotes the current published version of the specification ISO IEC 15415 The ISO IEC 15415 standard specifies the methodologies for measuring evaluating and grading 2D symbol characteristics in order to provide an overall symbol grade AIM DPM The AIM DPM quality guideline assesses direct part mark quality for a number of parameters including cell contrast fixed pattern damage axial a
391. tidrop 7 complete the format by either choosing new parameters or place commas where unchanged data fields occur Definition User Defined Multidrop allows the user to customize the polling protocol SerialCmd lt K140 7 RES address REQ EOT STX ETX ACK NAK gt For User Defined Multidrop first select Multidrop lt K140 5 gt then User Defined Multidrop lt K140 7 gt Address Any single character 02 to 7E in hex in the ASCII table can be assigned as the address character The character chosen is used as the poll character and the subsequent ASCII character becomes the select character For example if a B 02 is selected as the address C 03 becomes the select address that the host will use in sending host select commands Note Any ASCII character except NULL 00 and a A 01 can be assigned as an address Control characters can be used to define RES through NAK in serial commands Note Definitions of commands in User Defined and User Defined Multidrop must be duplicated in host applications to enable poll and select sequences to execute correctly during transmission Note Typically parameters in User Defined Multidrop are defined by first enabling Multidrop then enabling User Defined Multidrop This pre loads multidrop characters into the parameters Then changes are made to individual characters to match the host or other requirements Host 422 Status Usage RS 232 is an industry standard RS 422 is used where gr
392. tion ay pe ae K Modulation refers to the reflectance uniformity of a symbol s light and dark elements Sg e In this example of a dot peen mark notice that the light dark values of some 3 7 ace of the elements are inconsistent ee Fe Ts Unused Error Correction Unused Error Correction indicates the amount of available error correction Print Growth Print Growth refers to the deviation larger or smaller of actual element size from intended element size due to printing problems When a symbol is printed or chemical etched the ink or etching agent may bleed when it comes in contact with the substrate causing an Overprint If there is not enough ink or if there is some other problem with printing or etching equipment the result may be an Underprint Overprint Underprint Pixels Per Element Pixels Per Element refers to the number of pixels in each individual symbol element 11 pixels This magnified symbol detail contains 4 elements each with a width of 11 pixels Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 3 11 General Verification Serial Output General Verification Serial Output This command allows the user to determine the specific output settings for Separator Character ISO Grade Type Symbol Type and Symbol Dimension Size as they appear in ISO IEC 15415 and AS9132 verification output Separator Character Definition Inserts a separator between each field of verification repor
393. tion must not exceed 7 Serial Cmd lt K712 dot center offset percentage failed offset cell fill percentage failed cell fill dot ovality percentage failed ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone grade pixels per element value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Grade 2 Value 3 Grade and Value Grade Definition A passing grade is represented by P and a failing grade is represented by F Output Example Angle of Distortion Grade highlighted below symbol_data P 004 003 F 045 057 P 002 001 F P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Value Definition Angle of Distortion shows the row column angle deviation from 90 Output or Example Angle of Distortion Value highlighted below symbol_data P 004 003 F 045 057 P 002 001 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Grade and Value Output Example symbol_data P 004 003 F 045 057 P 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Angle of Distortion Grade and Value highlighted below Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 59 AS9132 Serial Output Symbol Contrast Definition Measures the difference in the light and dark values of the symbol s elements To receive a passing grade the difference in value between the mark dark value and the substrate light value must be 20 or greater Important Symbol Contrast output is only available when Marking Method is set to Laser or Chemical Etch lt K711 1 gt Serial Cmd lt K712 dot cente
394. tion source When external lighting is configured then the on board illumination LEDs are disabled Internal illumination is provided by two sets of LEDs This allows for three levels of illumination intensity and three different illumination patterns Serial Cmd lt K535 illumination source gt Default External internal lighting disabled Options 0 External internal lighting disabled 1 Internal both inner and outer LED rings 2 Internal inner LED ring only 3 Internal outer LED ring only Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 11 17 Thresholding Thresholding Threshold Mode Usage Fixed works better when decode time must be as short as possible and the reflectance and illumination of the symbol area is uniform and unchanging Otherwise Adaptive is the preferred mode Definition This value switches the image processing threshold mode between the Adaptive and Fixed modes An adaptive routine sets the light dark threshold from data acquired from the current read A fixed mode applies the same gray scale threshold value to each and every symbol Generally Adaptive gives better results than Fixed Unlike Adaptive Fixed applies the same value consistently to each and every symbol Serial Cmd lt K512 threshold mode threshold value gt Default Adaptive Options 0 Adaptive 1 Fixed Threshold Value Usage Definition Serial Cmd Default Options 11 18 A higher value will increase the threshold for distinguish
395. tion stop status gt 2D Symbology lt K718 finder pattern status symbol size mode symbol size 1 symbol size Qualification 2 symbol size tolerance dimension mode dimension 1 dimension 2 dimension tolerance orientation mode orientation value gt Read Duration Output lt K706 status separator gt LED Indicators lt K750 green flash mode target pattern status green flash duration gt Beeper lt K702 beeper status gt LED Configuration lt K737 LED mode ISO IEC 15415 grade DPM grade gt Serial Verification lt K701 serial command echo status serial command beep status control hex output gt Video Output lt K760 video output status trigger image mode image frame gt Image Output lt K739 image output status com port file format JPEG quality gt EZ Trax Output lt K757 comm port image mode image format joeg quality object info output gt Image Captioning lt K762 mode gt Synchronous Trigger lt K761 synchronous trigger mode gt EZ Button lt K770 global status default on power on load IP database save for power on gt EZ Button Modes lt K771 position 1 mode position 2 mode position 3 mode position 4 mode gt Input 1 lt K730 input mode active state gt Output 1 Parameters lt K810 output on active state pulse width output mode gt Trend Analysis Output 1 lt K780 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on gt D
396. to Edge After Autoconfigure you may set the master reader to Edge E but the other readers must remain in Serial S Host Primary Secondary Secondary Reader Reader moo Reader 5 16 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Communications Daisy Chain Remote Secondary Reader ID Usage This command provides a handy way to assign custom daisy chain IDs to specific readers that were assigned during the daisy chain autoconfigure process Definition Assigns a new daisy chain ID to a daisy chain secondary reader The command is sent to the master reader to configure the other secondary readers Daisy Chain Reader Number Definition Specifies the target reader by sequential number which will be receiving the new Daisy Chain ID The master reader is always 0 zero All secondary readers are numbered 1 n in the order that they are connected Note These numbers are for assigning IDs only and are not changeable Serial Cmd lt K151 daisy chain reader daisy chain reader ID gt Options 1 n 0 for the master Daisy Chain Reader ID Definition A two character user defined ASCII message identifying a reader in the daisy chain Serial Cmd lt K151 daisy chain reader daisy chain reader ID gt Default Sequential numbering of reader units resulting from the Daisy Chain Auto configure lt K150 gt command for example ID Master 1 ID reader 1 2 ID reader 2 3 etc Options An
397. tors Initialize Input Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Index 11 l Input 1 Input Examples Install ESP Installing ESP from a CD Integration Interface Standards Interleaved 2 of 5 Internal Camera Timeout International Electrotechnical Commission International Organization for Standardization Invalid Al Invalid Characters Invalid Compliance Indicator Invalid DI Invalid Format Header Invalid TEI IP IP Address IP Address Mode IP Database IP Database by ESP IP Database Operation IP Database Serial Commands IP Database Window in ESP ISO ISO 15415 Single or Multi Capture ISO Certification ISO Grade Type ISO IEC 15415 ISO IEC 15415 Evaluation Parameters ISO IEC 15415 Multi Capture Verification ISO IEC 15415 Multi Capture Verification Report ISO IEC 15415 Multi Capture Verification Results ISO IEC 15415 Output by ESP ISO IEC 15415 Reflectance Calibration ISO IEC 15415 Serial Output ISO IEC 15415 Single Capture Reflectance Calibration by ESP ISO IEC 15415 Single Capture Verification ISO IEC 15415 Single Capture Verification Report ISO IEC 15415 Single Capture Verification Results ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Output 1 ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Output 2 ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Output 3 ISO IEC 15415 Verification by Serial Command ISO IEC 15415 Verification Setup 12 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual J ISO IEC 15426 2 Verifier Certification ISO IEC Multi Capture Reflectance Cali
398. ture 1 and 2 ss time between capture 7 and 8 gt Dual Camera Operations lt K243 switching mode number of internal camera captures number of external camera captures internal camera timeout external camera timeout gt Store No Read Image Symbologies lt K244 image storage type image storage mode gt Data Matrix lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status gt QR Code lt K480 status gt Code 39 lt K470 status check digit status check digit output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Code 128 lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt BC412 lt K481 status check digit output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Interleaved 2 of 5 lt K472 status check digit status check digit output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar gt UPC EAN Quadrus Verifier User s Manual lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type gt A 11 Serial Configuration Commands Pharmacode lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length min no of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt RSS Expanded lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt RSS Limited lt K483 status
399. tus disconnect message connect message status control message gt Over Temperature Message lt K402 over temperature status warning message gt Service Message Quadrus Verifier User s Manual lt K409 status service message threshold resolution gt Serial Configuration Commands Camera Region of Interest lt K516 top left height width gt Camera lt K540 shutter speed gain gt Illumination Source lt K535 illumination source gt Thresholding Image Processing Mode lt K512 threshold mode threshold value gt lt K513 processing mode gt Multiple Symbols in Fast Linear Mode lt K518 number of symbols gt Image Processing Timeout lt K245 image processing timeout Hollow Mode lt K517 hollow status gt Output Format Symbol Output Format Status lt K743 symbol output format status gt Multisymbol Format Assignment lt K742 symbol number multisymbol status gt Extraction Mode Insertion Mode lt K740 output start position length gt lt K741 output length hex string gt Ordered Output lt K744 filter number symbology length wildcard character placeholder character data gt Number of Filters lt K745 number of filters gt Output Object Information lt K734 output frame output coordinates gt Operational Commands ISO IEC 15415 Reflectance lt VER gt Calibration ISO IEC 15415 Single Capture l
400. ty grade and or value in the verification report ISO 15415 Parameters Grade Output Disabled Aperture Disabled Wavelength Disabled Light Angle Disabled Decode Disabled Symbol Contrast Disabled Fixed Pattern Damage Disabled Axial Non uniformity Disabled Grid Non uniformity Disabled Modulation Disabled Unused ECC Grade Print Growth Value Both Pixels Per Element Modulation Assesses the reflectance uniformity of the symbol s light and dark elements When enabled includes the symbol s Modulation Grade in the verification report 150 15415 Parameters Grade Output Disabled Aperture Disabled Wavelength Disabled Light Angle Disabled Decode Disabled Symbol Contrast Disabled Fixed Pattern Damage Disabled Axial Non uniformity Disabled Grid Non uniformity Disabled Disabled Unused ECC Disabled Print Growth Pixels Per Element Disabled Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 37 ISO IEC 15415 Output by ESP Unused ECC Determines the amount of error correction capacity that was used to decode the symbol and indicates the remaining amount of available error correction When enabled includes the symbol s Unused Error Correction grade and or value in the verification report 150 15415 Parameters Grade Output Disabled Aperture Disabled Wavelength Disabled Light Angle Disabled Decode Disabled Symbol Contrast Disabled Fixed Pattern Damage Disabled Axial Non uniformity Disabled Grid Non
401. uadrus Verifier User s Manual Diagnostic Warnings to Output 2 Appendices lt K791 over temp service unit external camera disconnect gt ISO IEC 15415 Verification Output 2 lt K831 grade decode symbol contrast fixed pattern damage axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation unused error correction print growth value gt AS9132 Verification Output 2 lt K841 dot center offset cell fill dot ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone gt Output 3 Parameters lt K812 output on active state pulse width output mode gt Trend Analysis Output 3 lt K782 trend analysis mode trigger evaluation period number to output on gt Diagnostic Warnings to Output 3 lt K792 over temp service unit external camera disconnect gt ISO IEC 15415 Verification Output 3 lt K832 grade decode symbol contrast fixed pattern damage axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation unused error correction print growth value gt AS9132 Verification Output 3 Verification lt K842 dot center offset cell fill dot ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone gt ISO IEC 15415 Verification Setup lt K531 aperture wavelength angle reflectance maximum reflectance minimum gt AIM DPM Verification Setup lt K532 minimum element size maximum element size wavelength lighting gt General Verification Serial Output lt K708 separator character unused 0 SO
402. uadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification AS9132 Serial Output Dot Center Offset Definition Serial Cmd Default Options Measures the deviation of actual dot centers from theoretical or ideal dot centers Worst Case Value output shows the quality of the worst dot expressed as a percentage of that particular dot center s deviation from the ideal Average Value output shows the average quality of all dots expressed as a percentage of average dot center deviation from the ideal Important Dot Center Offset is available only if Element Shape is set to Round lt K711 0 gt It cannot evaluate square elements lt K712 dot center offset percentage failed offset cell fill percentage failed cell fill dot ovality percentage failed ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone grade pixels per element value gt Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Worst Case Value 2 Average Value 3 Worst Case and Average Values 4 Grade 5 Grade and Worst Case Value 6 Grade and Average Value 7 Grade Worst Case and Average Values Worst Case Value Dot Center Offset Definition Output Example Worst Case Value is a percentage and is shown in the output string as a three digit value from 000 to 100 For example 004 4 Dot Center Offset Worst Case Value highlighted below symbol_data 004 F 045 057 P 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 3 53 AS9132 Se
403. ue and stores it in a computer s memory Front End System The object illumination optics and reader blocks of a vision system Includes all components useful to acquire a good image for subsequent processing FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array A semiconductor device containing programmable logic components and programmable interconnects Gain The amount of energy applied to pixel gray scale values prior to output expressed in dB Also optimal signal strength Global Threshold The reflectance level at which dark and light elements in a symbol can be discriminated in a scan reflectance profile Good Read The successful decoding of the information encoded in a symbol A 26 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Appendices Gradient The rate of change of pixel intensity first derivative Gray Scale Variations of values from white through shades of gray to black in a digitized image with black assigned the value of zero and white the value of one Grid Non Uniformity A measurement of the largest vector deviation of a 2D symbol s grid intersections Half Duplex A configuration in which auxiliary port data is sent directly to the host and displayed on the auxiliary port screen Histogram A graphical representation of the frequency of occurrence of each intensity or range of intensities gray levels of pixels in an image The height represents the number of observations occurring in each interval Host A compu
404. uous Read 1 Output is not recommended because there is no one to verify that a symbol was missed Note If Trigger Mode is set to Continuous Read 1 Output Number of Symbols will default to 1 if set to any number greater than 1 6 8 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Read Cycle External Level Usage This mode is effective in an application where the speeds of the conveying apparatus are variable and the time the reader spends reading each object is not predictable It also allows the user to determine if a No Read has occurred Definition External Trigger Level allows the read cycle active state to begin when a trigger change of state from an external sensing device is received The read cycle endures until the object moves out of the sensor range and the active trigger state changes again Serial Cmd lt K200 2 gt Important Level and Edge apply to the active logic state Active Off Io or Active On lon that exists while the object is in a read cycle between the rising edge and falling edge Rising edge is the trigger signal associated with the appearance of an object Falling edge is the trigger signal associated with the subsequent disappearance of the object E Initiate Read Cycle Active gt Object 1 moving in front of the detector Y beam causes a change in the trigger state s s Object D APANDA MepaE EYEE Associated waveforms assume detector External Trigger State is set to Active On End Read Cy
405. up Shutter irrar Narrow Background Threshold Fixed Mode Margins Color Mode Threshold Current 1000 550 Reference Disabled White Adaptive 1 28 1000 550 Standard Disabled White Adaptive _ 6 1000 550 Standard Disabled White Adaptive 0 7 1000 550 Standard Disabled 8 1000 550 Standard Disabled White Adaptive 0 9 1000 550 Standard Disabled White Adaptive 0 Calibrate 5 gt Number of Active Indexes eeii Tolerant Receive Send Settings Load Current To Index 12 2 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual IP Database IP Database Serial Commands Database Size lt K252 number of active database settings gt Database Index lt K250 database index shutter speed gain threshold mode fixed threshold value processing mode background color narrow margins gt Save Current Settings to Database lt K250 database index gt Load Current Settings to Database lt K250 database index gt Request Database Settings lt K250 database index gt Request all Database Settings Quadrus Verifier User s Manual lt K250 gt 12 3 Overview of IP Database Overview of IP Database Usage Useful in applications in which a variety of symbol conditions require different settings that can be applied in real time Definition Up to 10 multiple camera image processing settings can be saved to a database and be applied sequentially during operations IP Database Operation Once IP Da
406. ures lt K241 capture mode number of captures rapid capture mode gt Capture Timing lt K242 time before 1st capture time between capture 1 and 2 51111 time between capture 7 and 8 gt Dual Camera Operations lt K243 switching mode number of internal camera captures number of external camera captures internal camera timeout external camera timeout gt Store No Read Image Quadrus Verifier User s Manual lt K244 image storage type image storage mode gt Read Cycle Setup Read Cycle Setup Based on your application setting up read cycle and triggering parameters will involve a series of decisions as follows 1 N O ODOAN DOO SW ek Select the number of symbols to be read in a read cycle must not exceed Number Of Captures Decide the trigger type to be used if serial the serial character if external Level or Edge Designate how the read cycle should end Timeout New Trigger Last Frame Calculate the maximum and minimum field of view FOV Consider the speed of the transport in inches per second Select Capture mode Continuous or Rapid Select Number Of Captures Set the Time Before First Capture and Time Between Captures if any If using an external camera select the active camera s Decide if you need to alternate between cameras with Switching Mode Save settings to the IP Database Note Images can be captured at a rate of 60 second Note If you
407. us Verifier User s Manual Index 15 0 Object Info Output Object Info Output EZ Trax Output by Serial Command Open Save Operational Tips Options Optoisolator Inputs Optoisolator Outputs Ordered Output Filter Orientation Mode 2D Symbology Qualification Orientation Value Other Operational Serial Commands Output Output 1 Parameters Output 1 Pulse Output 2 Parameters Output 2 Pulse Output 3 Parameters Output 3 Pulse Output Circuit Examples Output Filter Configuration Output Filter Configuration Rule 1 Output Filter Configuration Rule 2 Output Filter Configuration Rule 3 Output Filter Length Output Format Output Format Serial Commands Output Format Status Output Format Status by ESP Output Format Status Disabled Output Format Status Enabled Output Index Output Indicators Output Mode Output 1 Output Mode Output 2 Output Mode Output 3 Output On Output 1 Output On Output 2 Output On Output 3 Output On Diagnostic Warning Output On Good Read Match Output On Mismatch Output On Mismatch or No Read Output On No Read Output On Read Cycle Output On Symbol Quality 16 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual P Output On Trend Analysis Output State Output 1 Output State Output 2 Output State Output 3 Output Symbol Data as Soon as Possible Output Symbol Data at End of Read Cycle Over Temperature Over Temperature Message Over Temperature Status Overview of IP D
408. ut 10 to 28 VDC 200 mV p p max ripple 333 mA at 24 VDC Trigger New Master Input 1 Optoisolated 5 to 28 VDC rated 12 mA at 24 VDC Outputs 1 2 Optoisolated 1 to 28 VDC rated Ice lt 100 mA at 24 VDC current limited by user Output 3 Light control Optoisolated 1 to 28 VDC rated Ice lt 100 mA at 24 VDC current limited by user 25 Pin Connector Quadrus Verifier Host 25 Pin Connector Pin ena Host and Aux RS 232 Ethernet V0 1 Chassis Ground 2 TxD Out 3 RxD In 4 RTS TxD Out 5 CTS RxD In 6 Output 1 Out 7 Signal Ground 8 Output 2 Out 9 Trigger In 10 Trigger In 11 Default Configuration In 12 Input 1 In 13 RxD In 14 RxD In 15 Light Control Out 16 TxD Out 17 Power Ground 18 Power 10 to 28 VDC In 19 TxD Out 20 Output 1 Out 21 Output 2 Out 22 Light Control Out 23 Input 1 In 24 New Master In 25 New Master In a Chassis Ground Used to connect chassis body to earth ground only Not to be used as power or signal return b Signal Ground Used for communication and signal line grounds only Not to be used as power or chassis return c The default is activated by connecting pin 11 to ground pin 7 d Power Ground Used for power return only CAUTION If using your own power supply verify correct connection of power and ground lines Incorrect connection
409. utput 8 22 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Trigger Image Mode Video Output Definition Event which triggers a video output Serial Cmd lt K760 video output status trigger image mode image frame gt Default Last Capture Options 0 Last Capture 1 Good Read 2 No Read 3 Slide Show 4 Selected Capture Last Capture At the end of a triggered read cycle the video output will be the last capture Good Read At the end of a triggered read cycle the video output will be the last good read capture Note If a good read does not occur there is no video output No Read At the end of a triggered read cycle the video output will be the last No Read capture Slide Show At the end of a triggered read cycle all of the captures taken in the read cycle will be output at a rate of 350mS between captures The last capture will be held for 700mS and then the cycle will be repeated Note This only functions in a triggered mode Selected Capture At the end of a triggered read cycle the video output will be the capture specified in the Capture Number field Image Frame Video Output Definition Specifies the image frame that will be output at the end of the read cycle Serial Cmd lt K760 video output status trigger image mode image frame gt Default 1 Options 1to5 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 23 Image Output Image Output Usage Useful for remote visual examination and review of image
410. utput On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Trend Analysis for this output to function Output 1 Parameters Output On Trend Analysis Output 1 Parameters Output On Trend Analysis Output State Normally Open Pulse Width 5 Output Mode Pulse Trend Analysis Mode Noread Number of Triggers 0 Number to Output On 0 Usage Useful in cases in which the user doesn t want to shut down for one condition but wants to monitor quality and read conditions Definition Applies Trend Analysis settings to Output 1 With Trend Analysis the user can track the occurrences and frequency of mismatches No Reads and the number of reads per trigger and output the results to any of three outputs Example Trend analysis mode No Read Number of Triggers 25 Number to Output On 4 In this example the reader would activate an output when 4 No Reads occured within a period of 25 triggers read cycles Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 8 39 Output 1 Parameters Trend Analysis Mode Trend Analysis Definition Sets the trend condition Mismatch No Read or Reads Trigger that will activate the output Serial Cmd lt K780 trend analysis mode number of triggers number to output on gt Default No Read Options 0 Mismatch 1 No Read 2 Unused 3 Bad Symbol 4 No Symbol Mismatch Output will be activated when the number of Mismatches equals the value entered for Number to Output On within the trigger window selected in Number
411. utton operations are inactive In External The read cycle endures for as long as the EZ button is pressed unless a Level timeout occurs and Timeout is enabled for End Of Read Cycle In External As with Level Edge allows a read cycle to be initiated by pressing the button Edge but unlike level mode the read cycle ends with a good read output a timeout or a new trigger Default on Power On EZ Button Definition When enabled if the EZ button is held down on power on the reader will default to customer defaults and saved for power on This is the same as sending a lt Zrc gt command Serial Cmd lt K770 global status default on power on load IP database save for power on gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 8 30 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Load IP Database EZ Button Definition Allows the user to load the IP database with calibration results When the user performs a calibration using the EZ button all the database entries are moved down one index and the results of the calibration are saved to index 0 Note the results will saved as current settings as well Serial Cmd lt K770 global status default on power on load IP database save for power on gt Default Enabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Save for Power On EZ Button Definition If enabled after calibration is complete all parameters will saved for power on Serial Cmd lt K770 global status default on powe
412. way 0 0 0 0 Go to Step 3 Communicating in IP Address Mode Static Ethernet Primary TCP Port 2001 Video TCP Port 2002 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Ethernet Using the Verifier s Default IP Address Note This procedure is only used when the Verifier is directly connected to the computer Also this is only a temporary solution since the preferred method is to receive IP Address Subnet and Gateway if necessary from your IT department 1 Determine the host computer s IP Address on the host s network Go to the start menu select Run type command and press Enter a On computers running a Windows 2000 operating system type ipconfig at the command prompt 2 Note the IP Address of the host computer 3 At the Windows command prompt type route add 192 168 0 100 host computer IP Address and press Enter This adds the Verifier s IP address to the computer s routing table 4 At the Windows command prompt type route print and press Enter 5 Look for 192 168 0 100 in the Network Destination column If it does not appear in the Network Destination column contact your IT department 6 Go to Step 3 Communicating in Ethernet Quadrus Verifier User s Manual 16 5 Preliminary Steps Using DHCP to Configure the Verifier This option assumes that the Quadrus Verifier is connected to a network with a DHCP server RS 232 configuration is required to enable the Verifier s DHCP client default IP A
413. which describe output states and functions Usage Useful when the host needs symbol data only under certain conditions Definition Defines the conditions under which decoded symbol data is transmitted to the host Serial Cmd lt K705 symbol data output status when to output gt Default Good Read Options 0 Disabled 1 Match 2 Mismatch 3 Good Read Note Symbol Data Output Status if set to Match or Mismatch will not take effect unless Matchcode Type is enabled and a master symbol is loaded into memory Disabled Usage It is useful when an application only needs to use the discrete outputs and can allow the reader to do the decision making When Disabled the host does not need the symbol data and the communication lines are used only for setup and status checks Definition When set to Disabled the reader will not transmit any data that is generated during a read cycle symbols No Reads etc Match Usage Match is used in an application that requires specific symbol information and needs to sort route or verify based on matching the specific symbol data Definition When set to Match the reader transmits symbol data whenever a symbol matches a master symbol However if Matchcode Type is Disabled it transmits on any good read Note A No Read can still be transmitted if Enabled Mismatch Usage Mismatch is typically used as a flag within the host system to prevent an item from being routed in the wrong container
414. x port connections In addition to multidrop and daisy chain hookups the aux port can plug into the terminal strip interface Y Port Connectors e Q fe svepa ost al O E m gt a m D O AUX PORT Trigger 4 pin Connector Pin Verifier Host Aux Port Pin Function 1 Chassis ground Chassis ground Chassis ground 1 Power 10 to 28VDC out 2 TxD TxD RxD 2 Trigger in 3 RxD RxD TxD 3 Power Ground 4 RTS Aux TxD RTS Aux TxD NC 4 Trigger in a 5 CTS Aux RxD CTS Aux RxD NC a For NPN type connect pins 1 and 4 6 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 b For PNP type connect pins 2 and 3 7 Signal GND Signal GND Signal GND 8 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 9 Trigger Trigger Trigger Power 3 pin Connector 10 Trigger Trigger Trigger Pin Function 11 Default Default Default 7 Power Ground 12 Input 1 Input 1 Input 1 2 Chassis Ground i RxD Ae RxD 3 Power 10 to 28VDC in 14 TxD TxD TxD 15 Light Control Light Control Light Control 16 RxD RxD RxD 17 Power ground NC Power ground 18 10 to 28 VDC NC 10 to 28VDC 19 TxD TxD TxD 20 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 21 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 22 Light Control Lig
415. xample below symbol_data P 004 003 F 045 057 P 002 001 F 08 20 P 034 P 12 4 ECC200 018x018 3 54 Quaadrus Verifier User s Manual Verification Percentage Failed Offset Definition When enabled reports the percentage of dots that failed Dot Center Offset evaluation Serial Cmd lt K712 dot center offset percentage failed offset cell fill percentage failed cell fil dot ovality oercentage failed ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone grade pixels per element value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Cell Fill Definition Measures the percentage of the ideal cell size that the module or element fills Worst Case Value output shows the quality of the worst element expressed as a percentage of the ideal cell size filled by that particular element Average Value output shows the average quality of all elements expressed as a percentage of the ideal cell size filled by the average element Serial Cmd lt K712 dot center offset percentage failed offset cell fill percentage failed cell fil dot ovality oercentage failed ovality angle of distortion symbol contrast quiet zone grade pixels per element value gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Worst Case Value 2 Average Value 3 Worst Case and Average Values 4 Grade 5 Grade and Worst Case Value 6 Grade and Average Value 7 Grade Worst Case and Average Values Worst Case Value Cell Fill Definition Worst Case Valu
416. y two characters except NULL lt or gt Note After a secondary reader accepts a new ID it automatically invokes a reset with save command Quaarus Verifier User s Manual 5 17 Network Network These port options are mutually exclusive and predetermined according to the FIS type associated with the unit For example if you have an Ethernet enabled unit you will not be able to use USB or RS 485 Multidrop commands Network connections are made through the Ethernet USB connector but setup is done through RS 232 connections Ethernet See Chapter 16 Ethernet for a more detailed discussion of Ethernet connections IP Address Definition Usage Serial Cmd Default Options Subnet Definition Usage Serial Cmd Default Options 5 18 The 32 bit address defined by the Internet Protocol in RFC 791 version 4 The Internet Protocol is the network layer for the TCP IP Protocol Suite It is a connectionless best effort packet switching protocol Use this to configure the reader with an IP address compatible with the host network Note that this only takes effect when IP Address mode is configured for Static mode lt K125 P address subnet address gatewayaddress P address mode primary TCP port video TCP port gt 192 168 0 100 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 The subnet portion of an IP address In a subnetted network the IP address is split into a subnet portion and a host portion using an addre
417. ymbol Quality Output 1 Note Output On under Output 1 Parameters must be set to Symbol Quality for this output to function Output 1 Parameters Output On Symbol Quality All ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality parameters except Print Growth feature the alphanumeric grade SETTE 7 options shown below Symbol Quality ISO 15415 If the decoded symbol s grade falls Grade Output Disabled below the selected threshold grade Decode Disabled the output will activate Symbol Contrast Disabled Fixed Pattern Damage Disabled Axial Non uniformity Disabled Disabled xl Grid Non uniformity Disabled gt gt HEE Modulation Disabled Unused ECC Disabled Print Growth Disabled Grade ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Serial Cmd lt K830 grade decode symbol contrast fixed pattern damage axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation unused error correction capacity print growth gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Grade 1 D 2 Grade 2 C 3 Grade 3 B 4 Grade 4 A Decode ISO IEC 15415 Symbol Quality Serial Cmd lt K830 grade decode symbo contrast fixed pattern damage axial non uniformity grid non uniformity modulation unused error correction capacity print growth gt Default Disabled Options 0 Disabled 1 Grade 1 D 2 Grade 2 C 3 Grade 3 B 4 Grade 4 A 8 42 Quadrus Verifier User s Manual VO Parameters Symbol Contrast ISO IEC 154
418. ymbologies Stacked Symbologies Composite Narrow Margin Status Symbology Identifier Parameters Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled White ere Yv To change a setting double click the setting and use your cursor to scroll through the options Quadrus Verifier User s Manual Symbologies Symbologies Serial Commands Data Matrix lt K479 ECC 200 status ECC 000 status ECC 050 status ECC 080 status ECC100 status ECC 140 status ECC 120 status ECC 130 status gt QR Code lt K480 status gt Code 39 lt K470 status check digit status check digit output status large intercharacter gap fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length full ASCII set gt Code 128 lt K474 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt BC412 lt K481 status check digit output fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length gt Interleaved 2 of 5 lt K472 status check digit status check digit output symbol length 1 symbol length 2 guard bar gt UPC EAN lt K473 UPC status EAN status supplementals status separator status separator character supplemental type gt Pharmacode lt K477 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length min no of bars bar width status direction fixed threshold value gt RSS Expanded lt K484 status fixed symbol length status fixed symbol length

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file